Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
ATTENTION Clicking on a PDF hyperlink takes you to the appropriate page. If necessary, scroll up or down the page to see the beginning of the referenced section.
NN47300-100 (208963-H)
.
Document status: Standard Document version: 02.02 Document date: 15 November 2006 Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. The statements, congurations, technical data, and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable, but are presented without express or implied warranty. Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specied in this document. The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks. The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of that license. The software license agreement is included in this document. Trademarks *Nortel, Nortel Networks, the Nortel logo, and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks. All other products or services may be trademarks, registered trademarks, service marks, or registered service marks of their respective owners. The asterisk after a name denotes a trademarked item. Restricted rights legend Use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013. Notwithstanding any other license agreement that may pertain to, or accompany the delivery of, this computer software, the rights of the United States Government regarding its use, reproduction, and disclosure are as set forth in the Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19. Statement of conditions In the interest of improving internal design, operational function, and/or reliability, Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice. Nortel Networks does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product(s) or circuit layout(s) described herein. Portions of the code in this software product may be Copyright 1988, Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of such portions are permitted, provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that such portions of the software were developed by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from such portions of the software without specic prior written permission. SUCH PORTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. In addition, the program and information contained herein are licensed only pursuant to a license agreement that contains restrictions on use and disclosure (that may incorporate by reference certain limitations and notices imposed by third parties). Nortel Networks software license agreement This Software License Agreement ("License Agreement") is between you, the end-user ("Customer") and Nortel Networks Corporation and its subsidiaries and afliates ("Nortel Networks"). PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING CAREFULLY. YOU MUST ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS IN ORDER TO DOWNLOAD AND/OR USE THE SOFTWARE. USE OF THE SOFTWARE CONSTITUTES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. If you do not accept these terms and conditions, return the Software, unused and in the original shipping container, within 30 days of purchase to obtain a credit for the full purchase price.
"Software" is owned or licensed by Nortel Networks, its parent or one of its subsidiaries or afliates, and is copyrighted and licensed, not sold. Software consists of machine-readable instructions, its components, data, audio-visual content (such as images, text, recordings or pictures) and related licensed materials including all whole or partial copies. Nortel Networks grants you a license to use the Software only in the country where you acquired the Software. You obtain no rights other than those granted to you under this License Agreement. You are responsible for the selection of the Software and for the installation of, use of, and results obtained from the Software. 1. Licensed Use of Software. Nortel Networks grants Customer a nonexclusive license to use a copy of the Software on only one machine at any one time or to the extent of the activation or authorized usage level, whichever is applicable. To the extent Software is furnished for use with designated hardware or Customer furnished equipment ("CFE"), Customer is granted a nonexclusive license to use Software only on such hardware or CFE, as applicable. Software contains trade secrets and Customer agrees to treat Software as condential information using the same care and discretion Customer uses with its own similar information that it does not wish to disclose, publish or disseminate. Customer will ensure that anyone who uses the Software does so only in compliance with the terms of this Agreement. Customer shall not a) use, copy, modify, transfer or distribute the Software except as expressly authorized; b) reverse assemble, reverse compile, reverse engineer or otherwise translate the Software; c) create derivative works or modications unless expressly authorized; or d) sublicense, rent or lease the Software. Licensors of intellectual property to Nortel Networks are beneciaries of this provision. Upon termination or breach of the license by Customer or in the event designated hardware or CFE is no longer in use, Customer will promptly return the Software to Nortel Networks or certify its destruction. Nortel Networks may audit by remote polling or other reasonable means to determine Customers Software activation or usage levels. If suppliers of third party software included in Software require Nortel Networks to include additional or different terms, Customer agrees to abide by such terms provided by Nortel Networks with respect to such third party software. Warranty. Except as may be otherwise expressly agreed to in writing between Nortel Networks and Customer, Software is provided "AS IS" without any warranties (conditions) of any kind. NORTEL NETWORKS DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES (CONDITIONS) FOR THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ANY WARRANTY OF NON-INFRINGEMENT. Nortel Networks is not obligated to provide support of any kind for the Software. Some jurisdictions do not allow exclusion of implied warranties, and, in such event, the above exclusions may not apply. Limitation of Remedies. IN NO EVENT SHALL NORTEL NETWORKS OR ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING: a) DAMAGES BASED ON ANY THIRD PARTY CLAIM; b) LOSS OF, OR DAMAGE TO, CUSTOMERS RECORDS, FILES OR DATA; OR c) DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS), WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF NORTEL NETWORKS, ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY. The foregoing limitations of remedies also apply to any developer and/or supplier of the Software. Such developer and/or supplier is an intended beneciary of this Section. Some jurisdictions do not allow these limitations or exclusions and, in such event, they may not apply. General a. If Customer is the United States Government, the following paragraph shall apply: All Nortel Networks Software available under this License Agreement is commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentation and, in the event Software is licensed for or on behalf of the United States Government, the respective rights to the software and software documentation are governed by Nortel Networks standard commercial license in accordance with U.S. Federal Regulations at 48 C.F.R. Sections 12.212 (for non-DoD entities) and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202 (for DoD entities). Customer may terminate the license at any time. Nortel Networks may terminate the license if Customer fails to comply with the terms and conditions of this license. In either event, upon termination, Customer must either return the Software to Nortel Networks or certify its destruction. Customer is responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property taxes, resulting from Customers use of the Software. Customer agrees to comply with all applicable laws including all applicable export and import laws and regulations. Neither party may bring an action, regardless of form, more than two years after the cause of the action arose. The terms and conditions of this License Agreement form the complete and exclusive agreement between Customer and Nortel Networks.
2.
3.
4.
b.
c.
d. e.
f.
This License Agreement is governed by the laws of the country in which Customer acquires the Software. If the Software is acquired in the United States, then this License Agreement is governed by the laws of the state of New York.
Contents
Preface
Before you begin 15 Text conventions 16 Related publications 16 How to get Help 17 Getting Help from the Nortel web site 17 Getting Help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center 18 Getting Help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code 18 Getting Help through a Nortel distributor or reseller 18
15
19
33
6 Contents Logging in 33 Managing users 35 Using the Enterprise Switch Manager window 37 Enterprise Switch Manager menu bar commands and toolbar buttons Using the Enterprise Switch Manager shortcut menu 45 Viewing device properties 46 Enterprise Switch Manager status bar 47 Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane icons 48 Using the Navigator when zooming 50 Finding unsaved congurations 51 Upgrading old task les 52 Working with the network topology map 53 Saving a topology map 53 Exporting a topology map 54 Loading a saved network topology map 55 Printing a topology map 56 Printing a topology map in one page 57 Print preview 57 Printing a specic area of the topology map 58 Finding devices on the topology map 59 Selecting devices by type 61 Arranging devices on the topology map 62 Getting Help 63
39
65
78
83
87
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 7 Navigation pane 89 Contents pane 91 Status bar 92 Finding network resources 92 Reloading VLAN Manager 93 Working with VLAN Manager 94 Port membership 94 Viewing Spanning Tree Groups 97 Viewing the Default VLAN 103 Viewing VLAN ports 105 Conguring VLANs for NSNA 106 Managing Spanning Tree Groups 108 Creating a Spanning Tree Group 108 Editing a Spanning Tree Group 110 Deleting a Spanning Tree Group 111 Adding members to a Spanning Tree Group 111 Deleting members from a Spanning Tree Group 112 Editing Spanning Tree Group port membership 112 Managing VLANs 113 Creating VLANs 113 Synchronizing the VLAN Name 127 Deleting a VLAN 127 Highlighting STGs and VLANs on the topology map 128 Viewing VLAN members in Enterprise Switch Manager 128 Viewing STG port members 129 Viewing STG root conguration 130 Managing Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 131 Adding a VLAN to the Rapid Spanning Tree 132 Editing Rapid Spanning Tree properties 132 Deleting a VLAN from Rapid Spanning Tree 132 Managing Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 133 Adding an MSTI in Multiple Spanning Tree 133 Deleting an MSTI 134 Adding a VLAN in Multiple Spanning Tree 135 Viewing VLAN Port Members in MSTP 135 Deleting a VLAN in Multiple Spanning Tree 136 Editing MSTP properties 137 Editing MSTI properties 137 Managing routing on a VLAN interface 138 Enabling OSPF on a VLAN interface 138 Inserting a VRRP interface on a VLAN 139
141
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
8 Contents MultiLink Trunks in different switch types 142 MultiLink Trunking Manager features 142 Starting MultiLink Trunking Manager 142 MultiLink Trunking Manager window 143 Menu bar commands and toolbar buttons 143 Navigation pane 145 Contents pane 146 Status bar 147 Finding network resources 147 Reloading MultiLink Trunking Manager 148 Viewing MultiLink Trunking congurations 149 Viewing trunk connections 150 Viewing no trunk congurations 151 Viewing isolated devices 152 Viewing inter switch trunks 154 Viewing SMLTs 154 Viewing single port SMLTs 155 Managing MultiLink Trunks 156 Creating MLTs on ERS 1424 16xx and ERS 8000 devices 157 Insert MLT dialog box 157 Viewing MLT port information 164 Editing a port on an MLT 164 Deleting an MLT from ERS 1424 16xx or ERS 8000 165 Editing an MLT 166 Managing SMLT congurations 166 Conguring IST links 168 Conguring SMLT links 171 Conguring IST peers 172 Conguring a single port SMLT 173 Deleting a single port SMLT 174 Highlighting devices and MLT links on the topology map 175
177
182
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 9 Reloading Multicast Manager 188 Working with Multicast Manager 189 Inserting a tree node 190 Deleting a tree node 190 Inserting a table row 191 Deleting a table row 192 Editing table cells 193 Editing multiple table cells 193 Conguring DVMRP globals 193 Conguring PIM SM globals 194 Conguring IGMP and IGMP Snoop on a device 195 Viewing IGMP and IGMP Snoop information 195 Viewing DVMRP information 196 Viewing PIM SM information 196 Viewing MRoute information 196 Viewing Multicast Manager information on topology map 196 Understanding the Multicast Manager navigation tree 199 IGMP and IGMP Snoop protocol folder 201 Devices folder 201 Snoop folder 204 MRDISC folder 209 Fast Leave folder 210 Access List folder 211 DVMRP protocol folder 213 PIM SM protocol folder 219 Multicast Route protocol folder 223
229
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
10 Contents Conguring Trap Receivers for ERS 55xx 35xx, Ethernet Switch, and Legacy BayStack devices 246 Conguring Target Address Table for ERS 55xx 35xx and Ethernet Switch devices 247 Conguring Notify Table for ERS 55xx 35xx and Ethernet Switch devices 251 Conguring Trap Receivers for ERS 1424 16xx devices 253 Viewing Trap Log 254 Conguring Trap Preferences 255 Parsing traps 258 Link up and link down trap notication conguration example 262
265
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 11 Managing SSH security groups and bulk passwords 324 Creating SSH security groups 325 Deleting SSH security groups 326 Adding devices to an SSH security group 326 Removing devices from an SSH security group 327 Conguring SSH Bulk Passwords 327 Conguring SSH properties for ERS 8000 security groups 330 Conguring SSH properties for ERS 8000 devices 332 Conguring SSH properties for ERS 55xx 35xx and Ethernet Switch security groups 333 Conguring SSH properties for ERS 55xx 35xx and Ethernet Switch devices 334 Viewing the SSH Password Conguration log le 336
339
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
12 Contents ERS 1424 16xx folder 414 ERS 1424 16xx Hardware table 415 ERS 1424 16xx Software table 415 ERS 1424 16xx Devices folder 417 ERS 55xx 35xx folder 419 ERS 55xx 35xx Hardware table 419 ERS 55xx 35xx Software table 420 ERS 55xx 35xx Devices folder 422 ERS 8000 folder 423 ERS 8000 Hardware table 424 ERS 8000 Software table 427 ERS 8000 Devices folder 430 Ethernet Switch folder 436 Ethernet Switch Hardware table 436 Ethernet Switch Software table 437 Ethernet Switch Devices folder 439 Legacy BayStack folder 441 Legacy BayStack Hardware table 441 Legacy BayStack Software table 442 Legacy BayStack Devices folder 444 Passport 1000 folder 446 Passport 1000 Hardware table 446 Passport 1000 Software table 448 Passport 1000 Devices folder 450 WLAN AP folder 453 WLAN AP Device Software table 454 WLAN AP Devices folder 455 Understanding the File Inventory Manager interface 457 Download File to Devices dialog box 457 Upload File from Devices dialog box 460 Backup Cong File dialog box 463 Restore Cong File dialog box 464 Archive Cong File dialog box 466 Synchronize Cong File dialog box 467 Device Upgrade dialog box 468 Device List for Query Inventory dialog box 469 Device List dialog box, schedule or query version 470 Device list dialog box, query only version 470 Device list dialog box, schedule only version 471 Schedule dialog box 471 View Scheduled Task dialog box 473 Display Preferences dialog box 474
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Contents 13
477
499
501
503
551
14 Contents Conguration 552 SNMP communications 552 Menu bar commands and toolbar buttons Navigation pane 556 Node Properties pane 556 Contents pane 556 Loading MIBs 557 Unloading MIBs 558 Finding a node 559 SNMP Operations 559 SNMP Get 560 SNMP GetNext 560 SNMP Walk 561 SNMP GetBulk 561 SNMP Set 563 SNMPv3 Settings 563
554
567 569
Index
571
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
15
Preface
Enterprise Switch Manager is a Java-based graphical network management application used to congure and manage certain Nortel Ethernet Routing Switches, Nortel Ethernet Switches, Legacy BayStack switches and Business Policy Switches 2000 operating within the same local area network. For more information about the devices supported by Enterprise Switch Manager, see "Supported devices" (page 21). This guide provides information about installing the Enterprise Switch Manager software and using the features and capabilities of Enterprise Switch Managers graphical user interface (GUI).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
16 Preface
Text conventions
This guide uses the following text conventions:
bold Courier text Indicates command names and options and text that you need to enter. Example: Use the dinfo command. Example: Enter show ip {alerts|route s}.
italic text
Indicates new terms, book titles, and variables in command syntax descriptions. Where a variable is two or more words, the words are connected by an underscore. Example: If the command syntax is show at <valid_route>, valid_route is one variable and you substitute one value for it.
Indicates command syntax and system output, for example, prompts and system messages. Example: Set Trap Monitor Filters
separator ( > )
Shows menu paths. Example: Protocols > IP identifies the IP option on the Protocols menu.
Related publications
For more information about the protocols used in Enterprise Switch Manager or information about using Device Manager, refer to the publications in this list. Installing Enterprise Switch Manager (NN47300-300) Conguring Network Management: Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 Software Release 4.1 (314723-E) Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8300 Conguration IP Routing and Multicast Operations using Device Manager (NN46200-505)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
17
Conguring and Managing Security: Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 Software Release 4.1 (314724-E) Conguring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Link Aggregation: Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 Software Release 4.1 (314725-E) Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8300 Conguration Security using Device Manager (NN46200-508) Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8300 Conguration VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Static Link Aggregation using the Device Manager (NN46200-510) Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Conguration IP Routing Protocols (NN47200-503) Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Security Conguration (NN47200-501) Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Conguration VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking (NN47200-502) Conguring and Managing Security: Nortel Ethernet Switches 460 and 470 Software Release 3.6 (217104-A) Conguring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking Nortel Ethernet Switches 460 and 470 Software Release 3.6 (217460-A) Reference for the BayStack 350/410/450 Management Software Operations Version 5.0 (210245-C) Networking Concepts for the Passport 1000 Series Switch (205588-B) Reference for the Passport 1000 Series Management Software Switching Operations, Release 2.1 (211192-A) Reference for the Passport 1000 Series Management Software Routing Operations, Release 2.1 (211193-A)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
18 Preface
search the Technical Support web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base for answers to technical issues sign up for automatic notication of new software and documentation for Nortel equipment open and manage technical support cases
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
19
In addition to these submanagers and tools, Enterprise Switch Manager has an associated standalone application, "Device Manager" (page 32), that has the ability to completely congure and manage a single device in the network. Since Enterprise Switch Manager is a Java-based tool, it is platform-independent. Enterprise Switch Manager also allows you to save the topology map, error log, preferences, and communities in the application. To use ESM, you do not need Java Runtime Environment (JRE). ESM bundles JRE 1.5.0, but OS patches are required, particularly for Solaris. Note: For information about operating systems, devices, and software releases supported by Enterprise Switch Manager, see Installing Enterprise Switch Manager.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Supported devices 21
Supported devices
Enterprise Switch Manager currently supports the Nortel platforms and software releases that are described in "Supported platforms and software releases" (page 21) .
Supported platforms and software releases Platform Ethernet Routing Switch 8600, including the following new hardware: 8681XLW module, 8681XLR module, 8616GTE module, 8672ATME MDA, 8608GBM module, 8608GTM module, 8632TXM module, 8648TXM module, 8672ATMM module, 8683POSM module. Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 Web Switching Module Ethernet Routing Switch 8100 Ethernet Routing Switch 8300 Passport 1050/1150/120 0/1250 Ethernet Routing Switch 1424T Ethernet Routing Switch 1612G, 1624G, 1648T BayStack 350/410/450 Business Policy Switch 2000 BayStack 380-24 T BayStack 380-24 F BayStack 420 Software release 3.0, 3.0.x, 3.1.x, 3.2.0, 3.2.0.2, 3.2.1.0, 3.2.2 (OSM 2.0), 3.3 (OSM 3.0),3.5,3.7 (OSM 4.0) 4.0 (ESM 5.0) 4.1 (ESM 6.0)
2.0, 2.0.1.1, 3.1.x, 3.2.0, 3.2.0.2, 3.2.1.0, 3.2.2 (OSM 2.0), 3.3 (OSM 3.0) 2.0 (OSM 4.0), 2.1, 2.2 (ESM 5.0), 2.2.8, 2.3 (ESM 5.1) 3.0 (ESM 6.0) 2.0.5.6, 2.0.5.7, 2.0.7.2, 2.0.7.3, 2.0.7.4, 2.1.0, 2.1.3 (OSM 2.0, OSM 3.0) 2.1 (OSM 3.0) 1.0 (OSM 3.0),1.1(OSM 4.0) 1.2 (ESM 5.0), 2.1 (ESM 6.0) 3.0, 3.1, 4.0, 4.1 (OSM 2.0), 4.2,4.3,4.4 (OSM 3.0) 1.0 (OSM 1.0), 1.0.1, 1.1, 1.2, 2.x (OSM 2.0), 3.0 (OSM 3.0), 3.1 (OSM 4.0) 2.0 (OSM 3.0), 3.0 (OSM 4.0) 2.1.0 (OSM 3.0), 3.0 (OSM 4.0) 1.0 (OSM 1.0), 1.0.2, 1.1 (OSM 2.0), 1.1.1, 1.1.2,1.1.3 (OSM 3.0), 3.0 (OSM 4.0), 3.1 (OSM 4.1) 2.3, 3.0 (OSM 3.0), 3.1 (OSM 4.0), 3.5 (OSM 4.1), 3.6 (ESM 5.0)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Software release 3.0 (OSM 3.0), 3.0 (OSM 4.0), 3.1 (OSM 4.0), 3.5 (OSM 4.1), 3.6 (ESM 5.0) 2.1.0 (only standalone supported); 2.2.0, 2.2.1 (stack also supported), 3.0, 3.0 (OSM 4.0), 3.1 (OSM 4.0), 3.5 (OSM 4.1), 3.6 (ESM 5.0) 2.0, 3.0(OSM 3.0), 3.0(OSM 4.0), 3.1(OSM 4.0), 3.5 (ESM 5.0), 3.6 (ESM 5.1) 3.1(OSM4.0), 3.5 (ESM 5.0), 3.6 (ESM 5.1) 3.0, 3.0.0.1(OSM 3.0), 3.0(OSM 4.0),4.0(OSM 4.0), 4.1 (OSM 4.1), 4.2 (ESM 5.0), 4.3 (ESM 5.1), 5.0 (ESM 6.0) 4.2 (ESM 5.0), 4.3 (ESM 5.1), 5.0 (ESM 6.0) 4.0 (ESM 5.0) 1.0, 1.2(OSM 3.0), 1.3 (OSM 4.0) AOS 21.0 1.3(OSM 4.0)
Ethernet Switch 325/425-24T Ethernet Switch 425-48T Ethernet Routing Switch 5510, 5520 Ethernet Routing Switch 5530 Ethernet Routing Switch 3510 OPTera Metro 1200/1400/1450 Alteon 2208, 2216, 2224, 2424, 2424 SSL, 3408 WLAN AP
In addition, Enterprise Switch Manager discovers any device that supports the Bay Networks Autotopology Discovery protocol or IEEE 802.1ab. These devices are visible in the Enterprise Switch Manager topology map, but you can only congure the devices listed in "Supported platforms and software releases" (page 21) .
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Supported devices 23
"Enterprise Switch Manager submanagers and devices" (page 23) shows the devices supported by the various submanagers in Enterprise Switch Manager. For more information about the submanagers, see "Enterprise Switch Manager submanagers" (page 28).
Enterprise Switch Manager submanagers and devices Topo Mgr X VLAN Mgr X MLT Mgr X Mcst Mgr X Scty Mgr X File Intry Mgr X Trap /Log Mgr X NSNA Mgr Rout Mgr x
Platform Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 Ethernet Routing Switch 8300 Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 Series Ethernet Routing Switch 1424T Ethernet Routing Switch 1612G/ 1624G/ 1648T BayStack 350/380/ 410/420/ 450 Ethernet Switch 325/425/ 460/470
X*
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Platform Ethernet Routing Switch 5510, 5520, 5530 Ethernet Routing Switch 3510 Business Policy Switch 2000 OpTera Metro WLAN AP Alteon 2208, 2216, 2224, 242 4, 2424 SSL 3408,
Topo Mgr X
VLAN Mgr X
MLT Mgr X
Mcst Mgr X
Scty Mgr X
NSNA Mgr X
Rout Mgr x
X X X
X X X
Topology Manager
The main Enterprise Switch Manager window is also referred to as the Topology Manager (TM). The Topology Manager provides a graphical view of a network of devices that support the Bay Networks Autotopology Discovery Protocol or IEEE 802.1ab.
IEEE 802.1ab
With ESM 6.0 software, Topology Manager supports the discovery of devices using IEEE 802.1ab, Station and Media Access Control Connectivity Protocol (or Link Layer Discovery Protocol [LLDP]). Topology manager uses both 802.1ab and the Bay Networks Autotopology Discovery Protocol to discover the devices on the network. 802.1ab enables stations connected to a LAN to advertise their capabilities to each other, enabling the discovery of physical topology information for network management. 802.1ab-compatible stations can consist of any
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Topology Manager
25
interconnection device including PCs, IP Phones, switches, and routers. Each station stores 802.1ab information in a standard Management Information Base (MIB), making it possible for ESM to access the information. 802.1ab also makes it possible to discover certain conguration inconsistencies or malfunctions that can result in impaired communications at higher layers. For example, it can be used to discover duplex mismatches. Each 802.1ab station: advertises connectivity and management information about the local station to adjacent stations on the same 802 LAN. receives network management information from adjacent stations on the same LAN.
Currently, the following Nortel devices support 802.1ab: Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Release 5.0 Ethernet Routing Switch 8300 Release 3.0 Ethernet Switch 325/425 Release 3.6 Nortel IP Phones
With 802.1ab support, ESM is no longer restricted to the discovery of Nortel devices: it can discover any 802.1ab-enabled devices on the network, including third-party switches, routers, and IP Phones. ESM can also display MED devices in the network. Note: ESM can only discover third-party 802.1ab-enabled devices on the network. ESM cannot provide management for these devices. The following gure shows an example of how 802.1ab works in a network.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
1. The Ethernet Routing Switch and 802.1ab-enabled router advertise chassis/port IDs and system descriptions to each other. 2. The devices store the information about each other in local MIB databases, accessible by using SNMP. 3. A management workstation running ESM retrieves the data stored by each device and builds a network topology map. The following gure shows a sample ESM topology with third-party devices discovered on the network through 802.1ab.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
27
To enable discovery of MED endpoints, you must also enable the MED TLVs on those endpoints.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
For details on conguring 802.1ab on your device, refer to the documentation for your device.
User Manager
With User Manager, you can manage user access to ESM. You can set read and write permissions and specify passwords for multiple users. For more information, see "Managing users" (page 35).
VLAN Manager
VLAN Manager allows you to: Create, delete, or modify VLANs and Spanning Tree instances (for Nortel Spanning Tree Groups [STG], Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol [RSTP], and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol [MSTP]) across one or multiple devices View VLAN information, membership, and port conguration information in tabular format
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
29
View Spanning Tree Protocol information such as members of Spanning Tree Groups (STGs) and Spanning Tree Protocol conguration View VLAN nodes across the network
For more information about VLAN Manager, see "Using VLAN Manager" (page 83).
For more information about MultiLink Trunking Manager, see "Using MultiLink Trunking Manager" (page 141).
Multicast Manager
Multicast Manager allows you to: View the following multicast conguration and protocols found in the network: IGMP DVMRP PIM-SM MRDISC with Fast Leave DVMRP:PIM Gateway Display multicast forwarding paths from a selected source or group Congure multicast parameters for the following protocols: IGMP and IGMP Snoop DVMRP globals PIM-SM globals MRDISC with Fast Leave DVMRP:PIM For more information about Multicast Manager, see "Using Multicast Manager" (page 177).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Security Manager
Security Manager allows you to manage access to device and network management functions on network devices discovered by Enterprise Switch Manager. You can set, change, and synchronize security features for the following: Command Line Interface (CLI) access Web access Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) access Remote Access Dial-In User Services (RADIUS) properties SNMPv3 properties Access policies Secure Shell (SSH) bulk password Note: For Ethernet Routing Switches 8600 v3.2.1 and later, you cannot use Enterprise Switch Manager to modify CLI user and password. For Ethernet Routing Switches 8600 v3.5 and later, you cannot use Enterprise Switch Manager to modify web user name and password. You can divide the network into one or more security groups that you manage independently. You use security groups to group together devices that you want to have the same passwords and access features. For more information, see "Using Security Manager" (page 265).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
For more information, see "Using Trap Log manager" (page 229)
NSNA Manager
NSNA Manager manages the Nortel Secure Network Access (NSNA) solution in a network. The NSNA solution protects an enterprise network by providing a predened level of clientless access to users, based on credentials and security features. NSNA Manager lets you manage NSNA on Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8300 Series and Ethernet Routing Switch 55xx devices. For more information, see "Using NSNA Manager" (page 477)
Routing Manager
With Routing Manager, you can congure routing parameters for devices across a network discovered by ESM. Routing Manager supports the following protocols: IP RIP OSPF VRRP IPv6 IPv6 OSPF
Tftp Server
Tftp server allows you to: transfer les between servers without authentication trace information about le transfer when the trace mode feature is enabled
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Smart Diff
Smart Diff allows you to: compare two ASCII-based switch conguration les support conguration les generated from or created for Ethernet Routing Switches 8000, 1424T, and 1600
MIB Browser
MIB Browser allows you to manage SNMP-enabled network devices and applications. MIB Browser enables loading, browsing, and searching MIBs, walking the MIB tree, and performing all other SNMP-related functions. MIB Browser also enables viewing and operating the data available through an SNMP agent in a managed device. For more information, see "Using MIB Browser" (page 551).
Device Manager
Device Manager is a standalone application that you can launch either from Enterprise Switch Manager or separately. This application allows you to: download image and conguration les completely manage and congure Layer 2 and, if applicable, Layer 3 protocols and features for a single network device monitor trafc ow through the device view a device image indicating which ports are active and, for Ethernet Routing Switches, which modules are installed
For more information about Device Manager, see the documents listed in "Related publications" (page 16).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
33
Logging in
When the Enterprise Switch Manager starts, it displays the initial login dialog box ("Login dialog box" (page 34)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
To log in to Enterprise Switch Manager: Step 1 Action Enter a user name and password. Note: Both the default user name and the default password for the Enterprise Switch Manager are admin. To protect the Enterprise Switch Manager from unauthorized access, change the password as soon as possible. 2 Click Login. The Enterprise Switch Manager window appears. (See "Using the Enterprise Switch Manager window" (page 37)). End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
35
Managing users
With User Manager, you can manage user proles for access to ESM. You can set read and write permissions and specify passwords for multiple users. Users can then create their own topologies to manage and congure their own personal preferences related to ESM and its submanagers. Administrators can view and modify any user settings. Nonadministrator users can only view and modify their own user information. Note: To manage users in ESM, you must have administrator access. To manage users with User Manager: Step 1 Action Do one of the following: From the Enterprise Switch Manager menu bar, choose Tools > User Manager. On the keyboard, press Ctrl+M. On the Enterprise Switch Manager toolbar, click User Manager.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
2 3
To add a new administrator, select the ESM Administrators node. To add a new user, select the ESM Users node. From the menu bar, choose File > Add User, or from the toolbar, click the Add User icon. The Create New User dialog box appears.
Create New User dialog box
4 5
Complete the elds as required. Click OK. The new user appears in the user list.
To make any additional changes to the user properties, update the elds in the contents pane, and click Apply Changes.
User Manager elds Tab Profile Item Identity Name Full Name Email Mobile Description New Password Confirm New Password Description ESM user name. Users full name. Users e-mail address. Users mobile phone number. User description. User password. User password confirmation.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
37
Tab Preferences
Description User permissions for the listed submanagers: read-only, read/write, or none. The e-mail address to which unauthorized login notifications are forwarded. If any user attempts to log in to ESM using an incorrect user name or password, a notification is sent to this e-mail address.
End
Deleting a user
To delete a user: Step 1 2 Action In the user list, select the user you want to delete. Choose File > Delete User. A warning dialog box appears to conrm that you want to delete the user. 3 Click Yes. The user is removed from the user list. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Note: The Enterprise Switch Manager window remains open and can display highlighted devices after the Enterprise Switch Manager submanager windows open. If you close the Enterprise Switch Manager window while Enterprise Switch Manager submanager windows are open, the submanagers are also closed. "Enterprise Switch Manager window" (page 38) shows the Enterprise Switch Manager window.
Enterprise Switch Manager window
"Parts of the Enterprise Switch Manager window" (page 38) describes the parts of the Enterprise Switch Manager window.
Parts of the Enterprise Switch Manager window Part Title bar Menu bar Description Displays the application name, software version, and the path of the opened file. Provides access to all Enterprise Switch Manager commands. For more information, see "Enterprise Switch Manager menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 39).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
39
Part Toolbar
Description Provides quick access to commonly used Enterprise Switch Manager commands. For more information, see "Enterprise Switch Manager menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 39). Displays the network topology map. For more information, see "Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane icons" (page 48). Provide access to an entire map, table, or other text that spans two pages in the contents pane. Displays status information and the map legend. For more information, see "Enterprise Switch Manager status bar" (page 47).
Contents pane
When you successfully query a device on the network, the Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane presents a logical map of the network displaying a variety of information about the network connections. The specic information available on the network topology map depends on the size of the network discovered. For example, in a very large network topology, the device IP addresses and port numbers are not displayed unless you magnify the network topology map.
Save As
Ctrl+A
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Menu
Command
Toolbar button
Shortcut keys
Description
Export
Ctrl+E
Exports a topology map as the file type you specify (SVG, JPEG, PNG, or TIF). Opens the upgrade dialog box for upgrading old task files. Opens the Print Preview dialog box.
Ctrl+U
Ctrl+P
Opens the Print dialog box, where you set print parameters.
Prints the topology in one page. Exits Enterprise Switch Manager. Edits SNMP communities and CLI passwords accessible by Enterprise Switch Manager. See"Accessing devices with different SNMP communities" (page 78) and"Accessing NSNAS with different CLI user names and passwords" (page 80) for more information. Edits network preferences and identifies seed addresses used by Enterprise Switch Manager. See "Configuring general system preferences " (page 65) for more information. Specifies preferences for traps. See "Configuring Trap Preferences" (page 255). Allows you to hide specific devices from the topology. See "Hidden Devices" (page 76)for more information. [Del] Deletes the current network topology displayed in the contents pane. Opens the Find Device dialog box, where you set parameters to find a device in the topology map. For
Preferences
Clear Map
Ctrl+F
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
41
Menu
Command
Toolbar button
Shortcut keys
Description more information, see "Finding devices on the topology map" (page 59).
Select All
Selects all devices within a supported product family. For more information, see "Selecting devices by type" (page 61) . Displays network link speeds in color on the network topology map. The status bar provides a color legend for the link speeds (see "Enterprise Switch Manager status bar" (page 47) ). Displays half- and full-duplex links in color on the network topology map. The status bar provides a color legend for the link duplex status (see "Enterprise Switch Manager status bar" (page 47) ). Displays the media type (Ethernet or ATM) for the links in the network topology map. Ethernet and ATM media are shown in color. The status bar provides a color legend for the link types (see "Enterprise Switch Manager status bar" (page 47) ). Launches the Link Duplex Mismatch dialog box that displays any link mismatches in the topology. Displays MultiLink Trunks discovered in the network topology. Displays IP addresses of isolated routing ports or brouter ports. Displays port labels in the topology map. Displays device labels in the topology map. Displays a list of all the system tasks that have been scheduled. Returns the topology map display to the view prior to the last modification (node move).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
View
Link Speeds
Link Duplex
Link Types
Link Mismatch
MultiLink Trunks Show Port Address Show Port Labels Show Device Labels Scheduled Task Previous Transform
Menu
Toolbar button
Shortcut keys
Description Returns the topology map display to the view after the next transform. When zooming in on a particular section of the topology map, you can enable the navigator window to provide a smaller reference view of the entire map.
Full Screen
F12
Displays the topology map in full screen. To return to the normal view, press F12. Displays the error log for Enterprise Switch Manager. You can save the error log to a text file. Zooms in. Select Zoom In, then select an area on the topology map to zoom in on. Zooms out. Select Zoom Out, then select an area on the topology map to zoom out from. Selects nodes. Use the hand tool to select nodes and devices. Launches Device Manager to monitor and configure the selected device. Launches Web-based management to configure the selected device.
Error Log
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Telnet
Ping
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
43
Menu
Command Hide
Toolbar button
Shortcut keys
Description Hides the selected device from the topology. See "Hidden Devices" (page 76) for a description of this feature. Opens the Report dialog box, which displays the device IP address, name, type, and description. Dumps the current topology to the log. Displays the properties of the selected device. See "Using the Enterprise Switch Manager shortcut menu" (page 45) for a description of this feature.
Report
Note: The commands on the Device menu are only enabled when a device is selected on the Enterprise Switch Manager topology map.
Actions
Discover Map
Discovers a seed address in a network. See "Configuring general system preferences " (page 65) for more information. Stops the discovery process.
Layout Map
Rearranges a topology map for better viewing. For more information, see "Arranging devices on the topology map" (page 62) . Opens the Find Unsaved Configurations dialog box that lists the devices with unsaved changes in their configuration files. The dialog box contains the device IP address, the time/date when the configuration was last changed, and the time/date when the devices configuration was last saved. For more information, see "Finding unsaved configurations" (page 51) .
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Menu Tools
Toolbar button
Description Opens VLAN Manager. See "Using VLAN Manager" (page 83) , for more information about this application. Opens MultiLink Trunking Manager. See "Using MultiLink Trunking Manager" (page 141) , for more information about this application. Opens Multicast Manager. See "Using Multicast Manager" (page 177) for more information about this application. Opens Security Manager. See "Using Security Manager" (page 265) for more information about this application. Opens File Inventory Manager. See "Using File Inventory Manager" (page 339) for more information about this application. Opens Trap/Log Manager. See "Using Trap Log manager" (page 229) for more information about this application. Opens NSNA Manager. See "Using NSNA Manager" (page 477) for more information about this application. Opens Routing Manager. See "Using Routing Manager" (page 501) for more information about this application. Starts the default TFTP server. Compares configuration files. See "Comparing switch configuration files with Smart Diff" (page 365) for more information. Opens MIB Browser. See "Using MIB Browser" (page 551) for more information about this application.
[F3]
Multicast Manager
[F4]
Security Manager
[F5]
[F6]
Trap/Log Manager
[F7]
NSNA Manager
[F8]
Routing Manager
Ctrl+R
[F9] [F10]
MIB Browser
[F11]
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
45
Menu
Toolbar button
Shortcut keys
Description Opens User Manager. See "Managing users" (page 35)for more information about this application.
Help
Contents
[F1]
Online Support
Starts a Web browser and opens the Nortel Customer Support Web page. Displays a key to the icons used in the Enterprise Switch Manager topology map. Displays Enterprise Switch Manager application information.
Legend
Note: The Open Home Page option is applicable only for AP devices.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
For devices with active (undimmed) icons on the topology map, the Device Properties dialog box ("Device Properties dialog box (devices with active icons)" (page 46) ) includes the name, type, and location of the device. The bottom of the Device Properties dialog box shows the port status of the device.
Device Properties dialog box (devices with active icons)
For devices with disabled (dimmed) icons on the topology map, the Device Properties dialog box shows only the name and device type ("Device Properties dialog box (devices with disabled icons)" (page 46) ). For more information about device icons, see "Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane icons" (page 48) .
Device Properties dialog box (devices with disabled icons)
"Device Properties dialog box items" (page 46) describes the items in the full size Device Properties dialog box.
Device Properties dialog box items Item Name Type SysName Description The IP address, system name, or host name of the device. The chassis type. The name of the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
47
Description The system assigned name. The physical location of the device. The contact information for the system administrator. This item reflects the contact information entered as part of the system information for this device in Device Manager. The time elapsed since the device was last booted. The devices port status. The color of the box representing each port indicates if the port is up (green), has no link (is down) (orange), or is being tested (blue).
UpTime Ports
Menu commands and toolbar buttons Enterprise Switch Manager and submanager operations
Icon
Located on the right, the icon field displays a legend for color-coded information of Enterprise Switch Manager and submanagers. Depending on what selections are made from the View menu, this legend shows the following default information for Enterprise Switch Manager:
Link Speeds10Mb/s (purple), 100Mb/s (orange), or 1Gb/s (green) 10 Gb/s (red) Link DuplexHalf-duplex (green) or full duplex (orange) Link typesEthernet (purple) or ATM (orange) Link MismatchDuplex (orange)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Field
Description
If none of these items is selected from the View menu, this field is blank. To modify the default color display in this field, see "Configuring other system preferences" (page 69).
Passport 1K
ERS 8K
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
49
Icon
Description Ethernet Routing Switch Series 8300. This device can be configured and monitored by Enterprise Switch Manager and its submanagers Ethernet Routing Switches 1424, 1612, 1624, or 1648. These devices can be configured and monitored by Enterprise Switch Manager and its submanagers. Ethernet Switches 325, 425, 460, and 470. These devices can be configured and monitored by Enterprise Switch Manager and its submanagers. Ethernet Routing Switch 5510, 5520, 5530, and 3510. These devices can be configured and monitored by Enterprise Switch Manager and its submanagers. BayStack 310, 350, 380, 420 and 450 switches, Business Policy Switch 2000, or OPTera Metro 1200, 1400, or 1450 Ethernet service module. These devices are partially supported by Enterprise Switch Manager and its submanagers. Alteon switch. This device can be configured and monitored by Enterprise Switch Manager and its submanagers.
Ethernet Switch
Alteon
Wireless AP
Wireless AP Series switch. This device can be configured and monitored by Enterprise Switch Manager and its submanagers.
NSNAS
Nortel Secure Network Access Switch (NSNAS). You can open the Security & Routing Element Manager (SREM) for the NSNAS by double-clicking the NSNAS icon from the topology view. IP Phone. Enterprise Switch Manager can discover 802.1ab-enabled IP Phones on the network, although the IP Phones cannot be configured by Enterprise Switch Manager.
IP Phone
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Icon
Other router
SNMPv3 device
SNMPv3 device. This device can be configured and monitored by Enterprise Switch Manager and its submanagers.
When the icons of supported devices are dimmed, it means the device was listed in the topology table of a neighboring device, but that it did not respond to SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) queries from Enterprise Switch Manager. You may be able to get SNMP responses from such devices by adding appropriate community strings. For more information, see "Accessing devices with different SNMP communities" (page 78)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
51
You may nd it easier to use Edit > Find Device in Map to easily locate a device before you resize a specic region of the map. For more information, see "Finding devices on the topology map" (page 59).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Find Unsaved Congurations dialog box items Item Device sysUpTime LastChange LastSavedToNVRam (Passport 1k) Description The IP address, system name, or host name of the device. Total uptime of the system. The date and time when the configuration of the device was last changed. The date and time when the configuration of the device was last saved. If the device configuration was never saved, this text box reads "none." The date and time when the configuration of the device was last saved. If the device configuration was never saved since switch reset, this text box reads "none."
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
53
2 3 4
Enter the path to the old task le to upgrade (click the ellipsis to browse). To save the task le to the scheduler, click the Save to Scheduler check box. To save a copy of the task le, click the Save to File check box. In the Target File eld, enter the path for the new le (click the ellipsis to browse). Click Upgrade. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
The Save dialog box appears "Save dialog boxsaving a topology map" (page 54).
Save dialog boxsaving a topology map
2 3
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Working with the network topology map Save dialog boxexporting a topology map
55
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
The Open File dialog box appears ("Open File dialog box" (page 56)).
Open File dialog box
2 3
Select the lename (with a .topo extension) that contains your saved network topology. Click Open. The topology map is displayed in the contents pane. End
If you chose File > Print, the Page Setup dialog box appears ("Page Setup dialog box" (page 57)). Click OK to open the Print dialog.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Working with the network topology map Page Setup dialog box
57
The Page Setup dialog box appears ("Page Setup dialog box" (page 57)). Click OK to open the Print dialog.
Print preview
To preview your output before printing:
From the Enterprise Switch Manager menu bar, choose File > Print Preview.
The Print Preview dialog box appears ("Print Preview dialog box" (page 58)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Do one of the following: To view the Page Setup dialog box, click Page Setup. To fit all content into one page, click Shrink. To alter the on-screen display size, click Zoom In or Zoom Out. To Print the view as shown, click Print. To close the dialog box without printing, click Close.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
59
Print as usual. Only the area inside the blue rectangle is printed. End
The Find Device dialog box appears ("Find Device dialog box" (page 60)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
2 3
Click the By IP Address radio button if locating by IP is required. Enter the IP Address/Name in the By Name/IP Address eld. If no device is selected in the target device list, ESM tries to nd the device on the topology map to match the IP Address/Name and highlights the device, if found. If the device is not found, select the target devices list to query the ARP table for these device(s). Select the By Mac Address(FDB) or By Mac Address(ARP) radio button if locating by MAC address is desired. By Mac Address(FDB) will query the FDB table (layer 2). By Mac Address(ARP) will query the ARP table (layer 3).
4 5
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
61
6 7
Make sure that a device is selected in the target device list before entering the MAC Address in OR MAC Address. Click Find. The search result is displayed in the table, and either the devices are highlighted or an address not found message is displayed. End
Enterprise Switch Manager highlights the icons for the devices of the selected type on the network map. Also, the status bar displays the results of the selection operation ("Select all devices status bar message" (page 62)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
62 Using Enterprise Switch Manager Select all devices status bar message
End
The nodes are automatically arranged on the map. You may also need to manually adjust nodes on the map until you have the desired layout. To move multiple devices in the topology map:
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Getting Help
63
Step 1
Action Select the devices by performing one of the following: Click and drag a selection box around the desired devices. Press Ctrl and click the desired devices.
To move the selected group, press Ctrl and click one of the selected devices, then drag the group to the desired position. End
Getting Help
Help in Enterprise Switch Manager is arranged by subject. A Web browser, such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer, appears to display Help les. You can use the contents frame or the Help index to locate information. To access Help:
Do one of the following: From the Enterprise Switch Manager menu bar, choose Help > Contents. On the keyboard, press F1. On the Enterprise Switch Manager toolbar, click Help. The Help files open in a Web browser.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
65
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Step 1
Action From the Enterprise Switch Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears, with the General tab displayed ("Preferences dialog box" (page 66)).
In the Seed Address(es) box, type the IP address of one or more devices in the network. Separate multiple IP addresses with commas.
3 4 5
In the MaxHops box, type the maximum number of hops. Use the Layout slider to indicate whether greater speed or better accuracy is more important. Select other options in the dialog box to control the appearance of the topology map. See "Preferences dialog box items" (page 67) for a description of the available options.
6 7 8
Click Apply. Click OK. On the Enterprise Switch Manager toolbar, click Discover Map.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
67
Or, from the Enterprise Switch Manager menu bar, choose Actions > Discover Map. 9 If a submanager window is already open, an alert box appears to advise you that the submanagers must be reloaded, and prompts you to continue or not ("Discovery alert box" (page 67)).
Discovery alert box
10
Click Yes to proceed. Enterprise Switch Manager reloads topology information from the network devices, and refreshes the topology map. End
"Preferences dialog box items" (page 67) describes the items in the Preferences dialog box.
Preferences dialog box items Section Discovery Item Seed Address(es) Description The IP address(es) of one or more devices that Enterprise Switch Manager queries using SNMP to start the discovery process. For a list of supported devices, see Installing Enterprise Switch Manager.
Note: If the devices you want to monitor and configure are not connected to the same network, you can specify multiple seed addresses, separated by commas. Separate networks do not appear to be connected in the network topology map.
Max Hops
The number of hops, between 1 and 20, that a data packet travels from one router or intermediate point to another in the network. (Default is 5 hops.) Opens the Restrict Discovery dialog box to restrict device discovery to only the devices in the subnets entered. Refer to "Restricting discovery" (page 75) for more information.
Restrict Discovery
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Section Map
Item Layout
Description Drag the slider to the right (better) or to the left (faster) to indicate how you want Enterprise Switch Manager to lay out devices in the network topology map. Refer to "Layout slider" (page 77) for more information. Determines how a device is identified in the network topology map. The selections are: HostName SysName IP Address (Default)
Show Device by
Truncates Internet host name domains. Example: nortel.com becomes nortel Lets you select an option for viewing inactive devices. The options are: DimmedNon-highlighted items are shaded. (Default) InvisibleRemoves non-highlighted items from the topology map.
Automatically Save on Exit Automatically Relayout after discovery Retain map position after discovery
If checked, the current network topology map is automatically saved to the default.topo file. If checked, the network topology map is adjusted for better viewing as it is loaded in Enterprise Switch Manager. If checked, the map position retains the position of the old nodes after rediscovery. If there is a newly discovered device, it redraws the map without affecting the saved nodes.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
69
Section SNMP
Description The number of times, between 0 and 5, Enterprise Switch Manager tries to connect to a device using SNMP. (The default is 1.) The amount of time, between 3 and 10 seconds, Enterprise Switch Manager waits before trying to connect to a device again. (The default is 5.) The number of SNMP requests, between 20 and 250, that Enterprise Switch Manager maintains as open or outstanding. (The default is 100.) If checked, additional SNMP information is written to the Enterprise Switch Manager error log, and can provide assistance in troubleshooting.
Timeout
Note: Selecting Trace could slightly slow down performance as extra information is gathered.
Listen for Traps Listen for Syslogs Configure Trap Ports TFTP Device Manager TFTP Server Select JDM
If checked, Enterprise Switch Manager receives traps for all the devices managed through ESM. If checked, Enterprise Switch Manager receives logs for all the devices managed through ESM. Opens the Configure Trap Ports dialog box to add or delete trap ports. Allows you to enter the IP address of the default TFTP server used by submanager applications. When Device Manager is launched from ESM, this option specifies whether ESM uses the bundled JDM or another existing JDM version. Specifies the path of the folder containing the JDM version to use when Select JDM is set to Use Other Location. Specifies the path of the folder containing the Security & Routing Element Manager (SREM) version to use when a Nortel Secure Network Access Switch (NSNAS) icon is double-clicked from the topology view.
To congure these system preferences: Step 1 Action From the menu bar, choose Edit > Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears with the General tab displayed. 2 Select the Others tab. The Others tab appears.
Preferences Others tab
3 4 5 6
To congure e-mail server properties, complete the elds in the Mail Server Conguration pane. To specify the editor to use for editing conguration les, complete the elds in the Editor Preferences pane. To enable or disable the ring tone when ESM launches, select or clear the check box in the Application Control pane. To change a color preference, click a property in the Color Preferences pane. The Choose property color dialog box appears ("Choose property color dialog box" (page 71)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
71
7 8
Using the tabs and options provided, choose the desired color for the specied property. Click OK. In the Color Preferences pane, the new color appears next to the property. To reset the color properties to their original colors, click Reset Colors.
Do one of the following: To apply changes, click Apply. To cancel changes, click Cancel.
10
Click OK. The following table describes the elds in the Others tab.
Preferences Others tab Section Mail Server Configuration Item SMTP Host Name Sender Name FROM Description Sets the SMTP host name. It can be the host name or the IP address of the SMTP server. Sets the default user name that is defined as the sender unless otherwise specified. Sets the e-mail address that is defined as the default sender unless otherwise specified.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Section
Item TO CC BCC
Description Sets the main recipients e-mail address. You can specify more than one entry in a comma-separated format. Sets the copied recipients e-mail address. You can specify more than one entry in a comma-separated format. Sets the blind copied recipients e-mail address. You can specify more than one entry in a comma-separated format. In Windows, you can select from the following options: Wordpad Notepad Others
Editor Preferences
Select Editor
In UNIX, you can select from the following options: Vi Emacs Others
If you want to specify an editor that is not listed, select Others. Other Editor When you select Others in the Select Editor field, you can type the complete path of the desired editor or browse to the editor using the ellipsis button. Note: Be sure to specify a valid editor. ESM opens the configuration file with the program you specify and does not validate your choice. Application Control Color Preferences Application launch with ring tone Link Speed Link Duplex Link Type Link Mismatch Topology Manager Specifies whether a ring tone is emitted when the ESM application launches. Specifies the colors used for various link speeds. Specifies the colors used for the link duplex values. Specifies the colors used for the link types. Specifies the color used to identify link mismatches. Specifies the background color to display in Topology Manager.
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
73
Submanager preferences
The Preferences dialog box also contains tabs to congure preferences for the submanagers. To access these preferences from each submanager menu, click Edit > Preferences. These preferences allow you to select, for each submanager, specic devices to congure and manage, based on device family, subnet, or individual device. Therefore, the preferences allow you to congure a small group of devices within a larger network. The submanager preferences that you set are independent of one another. To congure submanager preferences: Step 1 Action Do one of the following: From the main menu, choose Edit > Preferences. Then, from the Preferences dialog box, choose the appropriate tab for the submanager you want to congure. From a submanager menu, choose Edit > Preferences.
The submanager Preferences dialog box appears ("Submanager Preferences dialog box" (page 73) shows the Preferences dialog box for VLAN manager).
Submanager Preferences dialog box
For more information about the options available in the submanager preferences dialog box, see the following:
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Manage all discovered devices" (page 74) "Manage devices by device family" (page 74) "Manage devices by sub network" (page 74) "Manage selected devices" (page 74) End
75
Or, from the Enterprise Switch Manager menu bar, choose Actions > Discover Map. An alert box appears to advise you that the submanagers must be reloaded, and to prompt whether you want to continue ("Discovery alert box" (page 67)). 2 Click Yes to proceed. Enterprise Switch Manager reloads topology information from the network devices, and refreshes the topology map with it. End
See "Enterprise Switch Manager menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 39) for more information.
Restricting discovery
You can restrict the discovery process to specic devices or specic subnets. Use the Restrict Discovery dialog box to enter IP addresses or subnets that are available for discovery by Enterprise Switch Manager. Only devices within the listed IP addressees or subnets are displayed in the Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane. To restrict discovery to certain subnets or devices: Step 1 2 Action From the Enterprise Switch Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Preferences. Click Restrict Discovery. The Restrict Discovery dialog box appears ("Restrict Discovery dialog box" (page 76)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Click the new row, and do one of the following: To restrict discovery to a specic subnet, type the IP address and subnet mask of the subnet. To restrict discovery to a specic device, type the device IP address and leave the subnet mask blank.
5 6 7
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each device or subnet that you want to discover. Click Enable. Click Save. End
Hidden Devices
ESM provides a Hidden Device menu that allows you to hide specic devices from the topology. Note: In the Device menu, the Delete option in OSM 4.1 has been changed to Hide. To open the Hidden Devices dialog box: Step 1 Action From the main menu, choose Edit > Hidden Devices. The Hidden Devices dialog box appears ("Hidden Devices dialog box" (page 77)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
77
To hide devices, use the arrows to move them from the Available devices box to the Devices to hide box. The devices identied by an asterisk (*) are currently hidden.
Click Ok. Enterprise Switch Manager redraws the topology according to the Hidden Devices list. End
Layout slider
Use the layout slider to improve the readability of the topology map. It adjusts the layout of the devices in the network topology using the Spring algorithm, which balances the distances between devices and minimizes the number of crossing lines. To use the layout slider: Step 1 Action Choose Edit > Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears ("Preferences dialog box" (page 66)). 2 In the Map area, slide the ruler between faster and better to adjust the layout display. Enterprise Switch Manager retains the locations of nodes until you rediscover the network.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
3 4
Click Apply. To rediscover the network topology map with a new layout, do one of the following: From the Enterprise Switch Manager menu bar, choose Actions > Discover Map. On the Enterprise Switch Manager toolbar, click Discover Network. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
79
3 4
Click on the empty row and enter the IP address, subnet mask, and communities. Click OK. The changes are saved to the snmpcomm.properties le. End
SNMP version. The read community string. The community string default is public (open access). The write community. The default community string is private (restrictive access).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Part User Name Auth Protocol Auth Password Priv Protocol Priv Password
Descriptions The name of a user. This can be a string 1 to 32 characters in length. The authentication protocol used to support User-based Security Model. Options available are None, HMAC-MD5-96, and HMAC-SHA-96. The authentication password if authentication protocol is used. The privacy protocol used to support User-based Security Model. Options available are None, DES, and AES. The privacy password if privacy protocol is used.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
81
4 5
Click on the empty row and enter the IP address, subnet mask, CLI user name and CLI password for the NSNAS. Click Save. ESM saves the user name and password information for the NSNAS. End
To access the SREM for an NSNAS, go to the topology view and double-click the NSNAS icon. For the operation to succeed, you must also specify in the ESM Preferences dialog box the correct path to the folder that contains the SREM software (see "Conguring general system preferences " (page 65)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
83
VLAN
VLAN is a collection of ports on one or more switches that denes a broadcast domain. You can assign ports to a VLAN or you can create a policy VLAN, which determines the ports membership in the VLAN based on the trafc entering that port. For example, in an IP subnet-based VLAN, the port belongs to the VLAN only if the trafc passing through the port is on the specied IP subnet. You control path redundancy for VLANs by implementing the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).
NSNA
You can also use VLAN Manager to congure VLAN properties for networks and devices that support the Nortel Secure Network Access (NSNA) solution. The NSNA solution protects an enterprise network by providing a predened level of clientless access to users, based on credentials and security features. For more information about conguring NSNA with ESM, see"Conguring VLANs for NSNA" (page 106) and "Using NSNA Manager" (page 477). For detailed information about the NSNA solution and deployment scenarios, see Nortel Secure Network Access Solution Guide (320817-A). For information about conguring the NSNAS, see Nortel Secure Network Access Switch 4050 User Guide (320818-A). For switch-specic conguration information, refer to your switch documentation.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
85
"Maximum STGs and VLANs supported by switches" (page 85) lists the maximum number of STGs and VLANs supported by the different switches.
Maximum STGs and VLANs supported by switches Switch Passport 1000 Series switch Ethernet Routing Switch 1424/1612/1624/1648 switches Ethernet Routing Switch 8100 modules Ethernet Routing Switch 8300 modules Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 modules BayStack 380 3.0 BayStack 420 Ethernet Switch 410/450 Ethernet Switch 325/425 Ethernet Switch 460/470 Ethernet Routing Switch 5510, 5520, 5530, 3510 Business Policy Switch 2000 v 2.x, 3.0 Maximum number of STGs 25 1 Maximum number of VLANs 101 2048
1 64 64 1 1 1 1 16 8 8
For more information about VLANs and Spanning Tree Protocol, refer to the device-specic documentation.
Tree conguration. For more information, see "Highlighting STGs and VLANs on the topology map" (page 128) . The following sections describe the VLAN Manager window and available management functions
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
87
"VLAN Manager window parts" (page 87) describes the parts of the VLAN Manager window.
VLAN Manager window parts Part Title bar Menu bar Description Displays the submanager name. Provides access to all VLAN Manager commands. For more information, see "Menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 87) . Provides quick access to commonly used VLAN Manager commands. For more information, see "Menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 87) . Provides a navigation tree showing VLAN Manager network folder resources. For more information, see "Navigation pane" (page 89) Displays information selected in the navigation pane. For more information, see "Contents pane" (page 91) . Displays status information, including the type of device highlighted and command status. For more information, see "Status bar" (page 92) .
Toolbar
Reload
Ctrl+P
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Menu
Command
Toolbar button
Shortcut Key
Description
Closes the VLAN Manager window. Reverses any changes you made to an item or field.
Preferences
Identifies specific devices for Enterprise Switch Manager to configure and manage. See "Submanager preferences" (page 73) for more information. Ctrl+C Copies the contents of a selected cell.
Copy
Paste
Ctrl+V
Insert
Ctrl+I
Opens the Insert dialog box, where you insert an STG or VLAN on selected devices. Removes a selection and displays a message to confirm deletion of the selected VLAN. Lets you assign a VRRP virtual router ID to a VLAN. When you have made changes to your VLAN configuration, this command applies these changes to the devices in the network. Lets you insert the text file containing the MAC addresses for MAC-based VLANs. Synchronizes VLAN names across devices.
Delete
Ctrl+D
Ctrl+S
Opens the Find dialog box, where you set parameters to find matching entries
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
89
Menu
Command
Toolbar button
Shortcut Key
Description in your network. Highlights the VLAN topology map in the Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane. Queries the network configuration to report any discrepancies.
View
Help
Using
F1
Opens a Web browser that loads the Nortel Customer Support Web page. Displays information about VLAN Manager.
Navigation pane
The VLAN Managernavigation pane("VLAN Manager navigation pane" (page 90)) is located on the left side of the window. It contains a network folder for each Spanning Tree Group found in the network. When you click a Spanning Tree folder, the folder expands to display the Spanning Tree conguration information and then lists the VLANs associated with that Spanning Tree. In the navigation pane, select the folder for which you want to view Spanning Tree or VLAN information, or choose Edit > Print to print the navigation tree.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the VLAN Manager navigation pane" (page 90) describes the parts of the VLAN Manager navigation pane.
Parts of the VLAN Manager navigation pane Part Network folder Port membership icons STG folders Description Contains all of the icons and folders in the navigation pane Represent the types of port membership. See "Port membership" (page 94) for more information. Represent Spanning Tree Groups on the discovered devices. Double-click an STG folder to toggle between open and closed. See "Viewing Spanning Tree Groups" (page 97) for more information. Show you information about STGs. Click one of the icons to view information about that aspect of the STG in the contents pane. See "Viewing Spanning Tree Groups" (page 97) for more information.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
91
Description Show you information about VLANs. Click one of the icons to view information about that VLAN in the contents pane. See "VLAN icons" (page 101) for more information. Show you information about MSTP. Click one of the icons to view information about that aspect of the MSTP in the contents pane. See "Editing MSTP properties" (page 137) for more information. Show you information about the MSTP Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST). Click one of the icons to view information about that aspect of the CIST in the contents pane. See "Editing MSTP properties" (page 137) for more information. Show you information about Multiple Spanning Tree instances (MSTI). Click one of the icons to view information about that aspect of the MSTI in the contents pane. See "Adding an MSTI in Multiple Spanning Tree" (page 133) for more information. Show you information about STGs. Click one of the icons to view information about that aspect of the RSTP in the contents pane. See "Editing Rapid Spanning Tree properties" (page 132) for more information.
MSTP folder
CIST folder
MSTI folder
RSTP folder
Contents pane
When you select a network resource in the navigation pane, a table appears in the contents pane ("Default (1) folder view in the contents pane" (page 91)).
Default (1) folder view in the contents pane
To view the VLAN information in the contents pane: In the navigation pane, select an STG or VLAN icon. The example in "Default (1) folder view in the contents pane" (page 91) shows the VLAN membership information for the Default VLAN. The Default (1) folder appears in the contents pane when you select Default (1) from the navigation tree.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Status bar
The VLAN Manager status bar("VLAN Manager window" (page 86)) is located at the bottom of the VLAN Manager window and contains two elds. "VLAN Manager status bar elds" (page 92) describes the VLAN Manager status bar elds.
VLAN Manager status bar elds Field Message Icon Description Located on the left, the message field displays information about VLAN Manager operations. Located on the right, the icon field provides a legend for different types of VLANs found in the network. See "VLAN icons" (page 101) for more information about VLAN icons.
2 3 4
In the Find text box, type the text or number for your search. In the In section, click the Tree option to search the navigation tree, or click the Table option to search the contents pane. Click Next.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
93
VLAN Manager starts its search and highlights the rst match that it nds or displays a message that it found no matches. 5 If a rst match was found, click Next to nd each subsequent match, or click Previous to go back to the last match. End
Do one of the following: Click Reload with discovery of topology to rediscover network topology and reload the Enterprise Switch Manager topology map and all of the submanagers. Click Reload VLAN Manager only to just reload VLAN Manager. Enterprise Switch Manager polls devices for VLAN settings and features, but does not perform a full network topology discovery. Click Cancel to abandon the reload operation. Note: Reloading just VLAN Manager takes less time than reloading with topology discovery. However, if there are any changes in network topology, it might result in discrepancies between the information in VLAN Manager and the information on the topology map. Such discrepancies might cause incorrect
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
operation when you perform operations (such as highlighting the network map) that involve interactions between the submanagers and the topology map. If you observe such incorrect operation, reload the network map. For more information, see "Rediscovering the network map" (page 74) . End
Enterprise Switch Manager reloads topology information from the network devices, and refreshes the VLAN Manager window with it.
Port membership
In the navigation pane, the top four icons represent the port memberships described in "Port membership types and STGs" (page 94) .
Port membership types and STGs Icon Port type Unassigned Description A port that do not belong to any STG. If no devices in the network contain unassigned ports, a table does not open in the contents pane. For more information, see "Viewing the unassigned ports" (page 95) . A port that has tagging enabled and can belong to multiple STGs. If a tagged frame is received on a tagged port, with a VLAN ID specified in the tag, the switch directs it to that VLAN, if it is present. For more information, see "Viewing tagged ports" (page 95) .
Tagging
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
95
Icon
Description A port that can only route IP packets and does not belong to any STG or VLAN. For more information, see "Viewing isolated router ports" (page 96) .
Note: IRPs are applicable only to the Passport 1000 Series switch.
A port that can route IP packets as well as bridge all non-routable traffic. The routing interface is not subjected to the Spanning Tree Protocol. For more information, see "Viewing bridge routing ports" (page 96) .
Note: Bridge routing ports, or brouter ports, are available only on the Passport 1000 Series switch and the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Tagging Ports table elds" (page 96) describes the elds in the Tagging Ports table.
Tagging Ports table elds Field Device Port VlanIds Description IP address, system name, or host name of the device. Ports on which tagging is enabled. VLAN ID(s) of which the port is a member.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
97
"STG information icons" (page 97) describes the STG icons displayed in the VLAN Manager navigation pane.
STG information icons Icon Name Members Description Devices and ports that are part of the STG. For more information, see "Viewing port members" (page 98) .
Config
STG configuration information. For more information, see "Viewing and configuring STG parameters" (page 99) .
Status
STG status information, including STG topology change information. For more information, see "Viewing STG status" (page 100) . Devices that are the STG root. For more information, see "Viewing STG root status" (page 101) .
Root
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
3 4
Select the port number(s) or click All for all the ports. Click Ok.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
99
End
BridgeMax Age
Note: The 802.1D-1990 standard specifies that the range for this parameter is related to the value of dot1dStp\Time. The default is 2000 (20 seconds).
BridgeHello Time
The value in hundredths of a second that all bridges use for Hello Time when this bridge is acting as the root. The granularity of this timer is specified by the IEEE 802.1D-1990 standard to be in increments of 1/100 of a second. The default is 200 (2 seconds). The value in hundredths of a second that all bridges use for Forward Delay when this bridge is acting as the root. The default is 1500 (15 seconds). Enables or disables the spanning tree algorithm for the Spanning Tree Group.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Enables or disables SNMP traps to be sent to trace receiver every time an STP topology change occurs. A MAC address; specifically for tagged BPDUs. The VLAN tag associated with the Spanning Tree Group. This ID is used to tag BPDUs through a non-IEEE tagging bridge to another Ethernet Routing Switch.
"Status table elds" (page 100) describes the elds in the Status table.
Status table elds Field Device NumPorts Protocol Specification TimeSince Topology Change TopChanges MaxAge Description IP address of the bridge. Number of ports controlled by this bridging entity. An indication of which version of the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is operating. The IEEE 802.1d implementations display ieee8021d. Time in hundredths of a second since the last time a topology change was detected by the bridge entity or STG. The number of topology changes detected by this bridge since the management entity was last reset or initialized. Maximum age of STP information learned from the network on any port before it is discarded, in units of hundredths of a second. This is the actual value that the bridge is currently using. The default value is 2000 (20 seconds). Amount of time in hundredths of a second between transmission of configuration bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) by this device on any port when it is the root of the spanning tree. The default value is 200 (2 seconds).
HelloTime
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
101
Field HoldTime
Description Time interval in hundredths of a second during which no more than two configuration BPDUs are transmitted by this device. The default value is 100 (1 second). Time interval in hundredths of a second that controls how fast a port changes its spanning state when moving toward the Forwarding state. This value determines how long the port stays in each of the Listening and Learning states, which precede the Forwarding state. This value is also used when a topology change is detected and is under way, to age all dynamic entries in the Forwarding Database. The default value is 1500 (15 seconds).
ForwardDelay
RootCost RootPort
VLAN icons
The VLAN icons in the navigation pane represent the VLANs that are part of an STG. "VLAN Icon elements" (page 102) shows elements of VLAN icons.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Subnet baseda VLAN in which ports are dynamically added to the VLAN based on source IP subnet.
Protocol baseda VLAN in which ports are dynamically added to the VLAN based on a network protocol.
MAC SA baseda VLAN in which ports are dynamically added to the VLAN based on the source MAC address.
Stacked VLAN a VLAN in which packets are transparently tunneled through the sVLAN domain by adding a 4-byte header to each packet.
ID-based VLANa VLAN in which ports are dynamically added to the VLAN based on the VLAN ID.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
103
Description Shows the color applied when highlighting the VLAN on the topology map. See "Highlighting STGs and VLANs on the topology map" (page 128) for more information. Shows information about the VLAN. Label part VLAN name VLAN ID STG ID Typeface (italic or normal) Description The name of the VLAN. The ID number of the VLAN. The ID of the STG to which the VLAN belongs. An italic icon label indicates that an IP address has been defined for the VLAN, and that the VLAN is routable.
The VLAN ID of the default VLAN is always 1/1, and it is always a port-based VLAN. You cannot delete the default VLAN, although you can remove ports from it. To view the Default Ports table:
From the navigation tree, select Default(1). The General tab appears in the contents pane and displays the Default VLAN table.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
HighPriority QosLevel
DsField IfIndex
Passport (legacy) 1050/1100/1150/1200/1250 switch: 257 to 512 Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 Series: 2049 to 4096
Note: This field does not apply to Ethernet Switch, Legacy BayStack, or Business Policy Switch 2000 switches.
IpAddress NetMask
IP address, if any, assigned to the VLAN for routing. Subnet mask associated with the VLAN IP address.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
105
DsField
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Field IfIndex
Description Logical interface index assigned to the VLAN. This value can be in one of the following ranges:
Passport (legacy) 1050/1100/1150/1200/1250 switch: 257 to 512 Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 series: 2049 to 4096 Ethernet Switch, Ethernet Routing Switch 55xx/35xx, Legacy BayStack or Business Policy Switch 2000: 1 to 4094
IpAddress NetMask
IP address, if any, assigned to the VLAN for routing. Subnet Mask associated with the VLAN IP address.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
107
Click the Color eld for each VLAN to select the color from the drop-down menu (create, select, and congure the VLANs based on your network design). Click the FilterSetName eld for each VLAN to enter the lter set name of your choice. Click Apply Changes. "Nsna tab elds" (page 107) describes the elds in the Nsna tab.
4 5
Nsna tab elds Field Device Color FilterSetName Description Specifies devices by IP address. Specifies the color of the NSNA VLAN (red, yellow, green, voip, or none) Specifies the name of the filter set. Note: This field is applicable only when the Color field is set to red, yellow, or green.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Field FilterSetId
Description Specifies the NSNA filter ID. Values are in the range 11024. Note: This field is applicable only to Ethernet Routing Switch 8300 devices. Further, this field is not allowed for configuration of a VoIP VLAN. VoIP filters are part of the Red/Yellow filter sets.
YellowSubnet Type
Specifies the Ethernet type for the Yellow VLAN subnet (IPv4 is currently the only available option). Note: This field is applicable only when the Color field is set to yellow.
YellowSubnet
Specifies the subnet of the Yellow VLAN. Note: This field is applicable only when the Color field is set to yellow.
YellowSubnet Mask
Specifies the mask for the Yellow VLAN subnet. Note: This field is applicable only when the Color field is set to yellow.
End
Note: You must have only one Red VLAN per switch. You can, however, have multiple Yellow and Green VLANs per switch. Currently, ve Yellow and ve Green VLANs per switch are supported.
The New STG dialog box appears("New STG dialog box" (page 109)).
New STG dialog box
2 3
Insert values or select options in the option boxes. Click Ok. End
"New STG dialog box items" (page 109) describes the items in the New STG dialog box.
New STG dialog box items Item Id TaggedBpduAddress TaggedBpduVlanId Description A number between 1 and 64 that identifies the new Spanning Tree Group (STG) configured on the network. A MAC address, specifically for tagged BPDUs. The VLAN tag associated with the STG. This ID is used to tag BPDUs through a non-IEEE tagging bridge to another Nortel Ethernet Switch or Ethernet Routing Switch. STP bridge priority, in decimal. The range is 0 (highest priority) to 65535 (lowest priority). The default is 32768.
Priority
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Item BridgeMaxAge
Description Value in hundredths of a second that all bridges use for MaxAge when this bridge is acting as the root.
Note: The 802.1D-1990 standard specifies that the range for this parameter is related to the value of dot1dStpBridgeHelloTime. The default is 2000 (20 seconds).
BridgeHelloTime
Value in hundredths of a second that all bridges use for Hello Time when this bridge is acting as the root. The granularity of this timer is specified by the IEEE 802.1D-1990 standard to be in increments of 1/100 of a second. The default is 200 seconds. Value in hundredths of a second that all bridges use for Forward Delay when this bridge is acting as the root. The default is 1500 (15 seconds). Enables or disables the spanning tree algorithm for the Spanning Tree Group. Enables SNMP traps to be sent to trace receiver every time an STP topology change occurs. Deselects all of the devices on the device list. Applies your settings and closes the dialog box. Discards your settings and closes the dialog box. Opens Enterprise Switch Manager Online Help in a Web browser.
BridgeForwardDelay
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
The Delete dialog box("Delete STG dialog box" (page 111)) appears, asking you to conrm the deletion of the STG.
Delete STG dialog box
Do one of the following: Click Yes to conrm the deletion and return to the table view. Click No to cancel the deletion and return to the table view. End
Note: Multiple STGs are supported only on Passport 1000 and Ethernet Routing Switch 8600.
On the VLAN Manager toolbar, click Insert. The New STG dialog box appears("New STG dialog box" (page 109)).
2 3 4 5
Select the desired additional members from the device list. Insert values or select options in the option boxes, as required. Click Ok. The new members are added to the STG. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Managing VLANs
113
2 3 4 5 6
Click Members. In the contents pane, the port members for each device in the STG appear. To change the port membership for a device, double-click the associated PortMembers entry, and choose the ports to include. Click Ok. Click Apply Changes. End
Managing VLANs
This section contains information about common operations you can perform when managing VLANs with VLAN Manager. The following sections tells you how to perform the following operations: "Creating VLANs" (page 113) "Synchronizing the VLAN Name" (page 127) "Deleting a VLAN" (page 127)
Creating VLANs
When you create VLANs using VLAN Manager, follow these rules: VLANs must have unique VLAN IDs and names. Trunk (tagged) ports can belong to multiple VLANs and multiple Spanning Tree Groups. VLANs cannot belong to multiple Spanning Tree Groups. An access (untagged) port can belong to one and only one port-based VLAN or it can belong to one and only one policy-based VLAN for the given protocol. If you enable tagging on a port that is in a VLAN, the Spanning Tree Group conguration for that port is lost. A frames VLAN membership is determined by the following order of precedence: VLAN ID Source MAC-based VLAN IP subnet-based VLAN Protocol-based VLAN
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Port-based VLAN ID-based VLAN "New VLAN dialog box items" (page 114) describes the items in the New VLAN dialog box.
New VLAN dialog box items Item Id Name QosLevel Description A number between 1 and 4094 that identifies the new VLAN configured on the network. Name given to the VLAN. For an Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 Series device, you can set the Quality of Service level for traffic in the VLAN to a level between 0 and 7. For a Passport 1000 Series switch, you can select HighPriority mode for all traffic in the VLAN. Type of VLAN:
Port-based VLAN Source IP subnet-based VLAN Protocol-based VLAN Source MAC address-based VLAN sVLAN ID-based VLAN
Deselects all of the devices on the device list. Applies your settings and closes the dialog box. Discards your settings and closes the dialog box. Opens Enterprise Switch Manager online Help in a Web browser window.
Refer to the following sections for additional information about specic VLAN types: "Creating a port based VLAN" (page 115) "Creating a source IP subnet based VLAN" (page 116) "Creating a protocol based VLAN" (page 118) "Creating a source MAC address based VLAN" (page 121)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Managing VLANs
115
The New VLAN dialog box appears("New VLAN dialog box with byPort selected" (page 115)).
New VLAN dialog box with byPort selected
In the ID eld, type the VLAN ID. The value can be from 1 to 4094, as long as it is not already in use. (The default VLAN has a VLAN ID of 1.)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
In the Name eld, type the VLAN name (optional). If no name is entered, a default is created.
5 6 7
For an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600, select the QoS Level (optional). For Passport 1000 Series switch, specify whether the VLAN trafc will be tagged as High Priority (optional). Select the byPort Type option. Other items in the dialog box that apply to a port-based VLAN are activated.
Select the device to be congured on the VLAN by doing one of the following: Select from the device list. Click the Clear all button to toggle between all devices selected and all devices deselected. Note: Not all VLAN types are available on all devices that Enterprise Switch Manager supports. Devices that do not support port-based VLANs will be absent from the device list.
The New VLAN dialog box appears("New VLAN dialog box with bySubnet selected" (page 117)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
117
In the Id eld, type the VLAN ID. The value can be from 1 to 4094, as long as it is not already in use. (The default VLAN has a VLAN ID of 1).
In the Name eld, type the VLAN name (optional). If no name is entered, a default is created.
5 6 7
For an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600, select the QoS Level (optional). For Passport 1000 Series switch, specify if the VLAN trafc will be tagged as High Priority (optional). Select the bySubnet Type option. Other items in the dialog box that apply to a subnet-based VLAN are activated.
8 9
In the Subnet text box, type the source IP subnet address. In the Mask text box, type the IP subnet mask.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
10
Select the device to be congured on the VLAN by doing one of the following: Select from the device list. Click the Clear all button to toggle between all selected devices and all deselected devices. Note: Not all VLAN types are available on all devices that Enterprise Switch Manager supports. Devices that do not support source IP subnet-based VLANs will be absent from the device list.
11
The New VLAN dialog box appears("New VLAN dialog box with byProtocolId selected" (page 119)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
119
In the Id eld, type the VLAN ID. The value can be from 1 to 4094, as long as it is not already in use. (The default VLAN has a VLAN ID of 1.)
In the Name eld, type the VLAN name (optional). If no name is entered, a default is created.
5 6 7
For an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600, select the QoS Level (optional). For Passport 1000 Series switch, specify if the VLAN trafc will be tagged as High Priority (optional). In the Type box, select byProtocolId. Other items in the dialog box that apply to protocol based VLANs are activated.
In the ProtocolId box, select the protocol. If you select UsrDened, see "User dened protocols in a protocol based VLAN" (page 120) for more information.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Select the device to be congured on the VLAN by doing one of the following: Select from the device list. Click the Clear all button to toggle between all devices selected and all devices deselected. Note: Not all VLAN types are available on all devices that Enterprise Switch Manager supports. Devices that do not support protocol-based VLANs will be absent from the device list.
10 11
Click Ok. In the Ports table, specify the port membership by clicking on one or all of the following columns and specifying ports: ActiveMember PotentialMembers StaticMembers NotAllowedToJoin End
The following PIDs are not valid: PID0x0000 through 0x05dc: overlap with the 802.3 frame length PIDs of predened protocols (for example, IP, IPX, AppleTalk) PID 0x8100: reserved by 802.1Q to identify tagged frames PID0x9000: used by the diagnostic loopback frames
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Managing VLANs
121
PID0x8808: used by 802.3x pause frames PID0x4242: overlaps with the BPDU DSAP/SSAP
The New VLAN dialog box appears ("New VLAN dialog box with bySrcMac selected" (page 121)).
New VLAN dialog box with bySrcMac selected
In the Id eld, type the VLAN ID. The value can be from 1 to 4094, as long as it is not already in use. (The default VLAN has a VLAN ID of 1.)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
In the Name eld, type the VLAN name (optional). If no name is entered, a default is created.
5 6 7
For an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 switch, select the QoS Level (optional). For Passport 1000 Series switch, specify if the VLAN trafc will be tagged as High Priority (optional). Select the bySrcMac Type option. Other items in the dialog box that apply to source MAC address-based VLANs are activated.
Select the device to be congured on the VLAN by doing one of the following: Select from the device list. Click the Clear all button to toggle between all devices selected and all devices deselected. Note: Not all VLAN types are available on all devices that Enterprise Switch Manager supports. Devices that do not support source MAC address-based VLANs will be absent from the device list.
9 10
Click Ok. Select the newly created MAC-based VLAN, and choose Edit > Edit MAC Addresses. The Edit MAC - VLAN dialog box appears ("Edit MAC VLAN dialog box" (page 122)).
Edit MAC VLAN dialog box
11
Select Add From File and enter the le name of the text le containing the MAC addresses to added to the new MAC-based VLAN.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Managing VLANs
123
You can create this le earlier and remember where you saved the text le. You can use colons (:) or dashes (-) to delineate the MAC address. 12 13 Click Close. Click Reload. End
Creating an sVLAN
To create an sVLAN: Step 1 2 Action In the navigation pane, select an STG. Do one of the following: From the menu bar, choose Edit > Insert. On the toolbar, click Insert.
The New VLAN dialog box appears ("New VLAN dialog box with bySvlan selected" (page 124)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
124 Using VLAN Manager New VLAN dialog box with bySvlan selected
In the Id eld, type the VLAN ID. The value can be from 1 to 4094, as long as it is not already in use. (The default VLAN has a VLAN ID of 1.)
In the Name eld, type the VLAN name (optional). If no name is entered, a default is created.
5 6 7
For an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600, select the QoS Level (optional). For Passport 1000 Series switch, specify whether the VLAN trafc will be tagged as High Priority (optional). Select the bySvlan Type option. Other items in the dialog box that apply to a Svlan-based VLAN are activated.
Select the device to be congured on the VLAN by doing one of the following: Select from the device list.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Managing VLANs
125
Click the Clear all button to toggle between all devices selected and all devices deselected. Note: Not all VLAN types are available on all devices that Enterprise Switch Manager supports. Devices that do not support port-based VLANs will be absent from the device list.
The New VLAN dialog box appears ("New VLAN dialog box with byIds selected" (page 126)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
126 Using VLAN Manager New VLAN dialog box with byIds selected
In the Id eld, type the VLAN ID. The value can be from 1 to 4094, as long as it is not already in use. (The default VLAN has a VLAN ID of 1.)
In the Name eld, type the VLAN name (optional). If no name is entered, a default is created.
5 6 7
For an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600, select the QoS Level (optional). For Passport 1000 Series switch, specify whether the VLAN trafc will be tagged as High Priority (optional). Select the byID Type option. Other items in the dialog box that apply to an ID-based VLAN are activated.
Select the device to be congured on the VLAN by doing one of the following: Select from the device list.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Managing VLANs
127
Click the Clear all button to toggle between all devices selected and all devices deselected. Note: Not all VLAN types are available on all devices that Enterprise Switch Manager supports. Devices that do not support port-based VLANs will be absent from the device list.
3 4 5
Enter the desired VLAN Name in the dialog box. Click OK. Click Apply changes. End
Deleting a VLAN
To delete a VLAN: Step 1 Action Do one of the following: To delete a VLAN from all devices, select the VLAN in the navigation pane.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
To delete a VLAN from one or more specic devices, select the VLAN in the navigation pane, then select the devices in the contents pane.
Do one of the following: From the VLAN Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Delete. On the VLAN Manager toolbar, click Delete.
For more information, see the following sections: "Viewing VLAN members in Enterprise Switch Manager" (page 128) "Viewing STG port members" (page 129) "Viewing STG root conguration" (page 130)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
129
Return to the Enterprise Switch Manager window. The highlighted topology view appears in the Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane. End
"VLAN topology in the Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane" (page 129) shows highlighted members of the same VLAN.
VLAN topology in the Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
The STG Members table appears in the VLAN Manager contents pane. 2 3 From the VLAN Manager menu bar, choose View > Highlight Topology. Return to the Enterprise Switch Manager window. The devices containing STG ports are highlighted ("Viewing STG port members" (page 130)) with a color and the device IP address. End
131
2 3
From the VLAN Manager menu bar, choose View > Highlight Topology. Return to the Enterprise Switch Manager window. The highlighted topology view ("Root topology in the Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane" (page 131)) appears in the Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane with the root displayed. End
In "Root topology in the Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane" (page 131), the root of the STG is 10.127.231.4 and the port in forwarding state is 1/45 of 10.127.231.3.
Root topology in the Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Note: In release 6.0, ESM support for RSTP and MSTP is applicable for Ethernet Switches 325, 425, 460, and 470, and Ethernet Routing Switches 5500 and 8600.
The New VLAN dialog box appears ("New VLAN dialog box with byPort selected" (page 115)). 3 4 Insert values or select options in the option boxes (see "Creating VLANs" (page 113) for details). Click Ok. End
133
Step 1
Action In the navigation pane, select a VLAN folder (except VLAN 1), and do one of the following: From the VLAN Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Delete. On the VLAN Manager toolbar, click Delete.
The Delete dialog box ("Delete VLAN dialog box" (page 133)) appears, asking you to conrm the deletion of the VLAN.
Delete VLAN dialog box
Do one of the following: Click Yes to conrm the deletion and return to the table view. Click No to cancel the deletion and return to the table view. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Step 1
Action From the navigation tree, select the MSTP folder, and do one of the following: From the VLAN Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Insert. On the VLAN Manager toolbar, click Insert.
The MSTP, Insert MSTI instance dialog box appears ("MSTP, Insert MSTI instance dialog box" (page 134)).
MSTP, Insert MSTI instance dialog box
2 3
In the Instance eld, enter the desired MSTI identier. Click Ok. End
Deleting an MSTI
To delete an MSTI instance: Step 1 Action Under the MSTP folder, select the MSTI instance to delete, and do one of the following: From the VLAN Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Delete. On the VLAN Manager toolbar, click Delete.
The Delete dialog box ("Delete MSTI dialog box" (page 135)) appears, asking you to conrm the deletion of the MSTI.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
135
Do one of the following: Click Yes to conrm the deletion and return to the table view. Click No to cancel the deletion and return to the table view End
The New VLAN dialog box appears ("New VLAN dialog box with byPort selected" (page 115)). 3 4 Insert values or select options in the option boxes (see "Creating VLANs" (page 113) for details). Click Ok. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
3 4
Select the port number(s) or click All for all the ports. Click Ok. End
The Delete VLAN dialog box ("Delete VLAN dialog box" (page 133)) appears, asking you to conrm the deletion of the VLAN. 2 Do one of the following: Click Yes to conrm the deletion and return to the table view. Click No to cancel the deletion and return to the table view
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
137
End
In the contents pane, click the item that you want to edit. The eld is highlighted, and you can edit directly in the table.
Type information in the text boxes, or select from a list. The changes appear in bold.
3 4
In the OspfEnable eld, choose true to enable OSPF on this VLAN. Click Apply Changes.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
End
4 5
In the VrId eld, enter the Virtual Router ID for the VRRP interface. Click OK. The new VRRP interface appears in Routing Manager under the VRRP Interfaces folder. End
For information about conguring VRRP properties using Routing Manager, see "Conguring VRRP" (page 531).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
141
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
The MultiLink Trunking Manager window appears("MultiLink Trunking Manager window" (page 143)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
143
"MultiLink Trunking Manager window parts" (page 143) describes the parts of the MultiLink Trunking Manager window.
MultiLink Trunking Manager window parts Part Title bar Menu bar Description Displays the submanager name. Provides access to all MultiLink Trunking Manager commands. For more information, see "Menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 143). Provides quick access to commonly used MultiLink Trunking Manager commands. For more information, see "Menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 143) Provides a navigation tree showing MultiLink Trunking Manager network folder resources. For more information, see "Navigation pane" (page 145). Displays MultiLink Trunking Manager tables. For more information, see "Contents pane" (page 146). Displays status information, including discovery information, type of node highlighted, and command status. For more information, see "Status bar" (page 147).
Toolbar
"MultiLink Trunking Manager submenus" (page 144) lists the MultiLink Trunking Manager menu commands and toolbar buttons.
MultiLink Trunking Manager submenus Menu File Command Reload Toolbar button Shortcut key Ctrl+R Description Rediscovers the network and reloads MultiLink Trunking Manager with the latest information. For more information, see "Reloading MultiLink Trunking Manager" (page 148). Opens the Print dialog box, where you enter print parameters.
Ctrl+P
Closes MultiLink Trunking Manager. Reverses any changes you made to a record.
Preferences
Identifies specific devices for Enterprise Switch Manager to configure and manage. See "Submanager preferences" (page 73) for more information. Ctrl+C Copies the contents of the selected cell.
Copy
Paste
Ctrl+V
Insert
Ctrl+I
Opens the Insert dialog box, where you insert an MLT on a selected device. For more information, see "Creating MLTs on ERS 1424 16xx and ERS 8000 devices" (page 157). Removes a selection and displays a message box to confirm deletion of the selected MLT. For more information, see "Deleting an MLT from ERS 1424 16xx or ERS 8000" (page 165).
Delete
Ctrl+D
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
145
Menu
Toolbar button
Shortcut key
Description Applies any changes you have made to your MLT configuration.
Find
Ctrl+F
Opens the Find dialog box, where you set parameters to find matching entries in your network. For more information, see "Finding network resources" (page 147). Highlights MLT items in the Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane. "Highlighting devices and MLT links on the topology map" (page 175) Queries the network topology to report any discrepancies.
View
Highlight Topology
Opens a Web browser that loads the Nortel Customer Support Web page. Displays information about MultiLink Trunking Manager.
Navigation pane
MultiLink Trunking Manager displays devices and adjacent devices in a tree structure. The MultiLink Trunking Manager navigation tree("MultiLink Trunking Manager window" (page 143)) is located on the left side of the window and contains branches with the IP address of devices discovered by Enterprise Switch Manager. "MultiLink Trunking Manager navigation pane" (page 146) shows an example of the MultiLink Trunking Manager navigation pane.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
146 Using MultiLink Trunking Manager MultiLink Trunking Manager navigation pane
From the navigation tree in the navigation pane, select the folder for which you want to view MLT information, or use the Edit > Print command to print the navigation tree.
Contents pane
When you choose a folder in the navigation pane, its contents are shown in the contents pane. To view the folder in the contents pane:
In the navigation pane, select a Network folder. The contents of the folder are displayed as a table in the contents pane, as shown in the example in "MultiLink Trunking Manager contents pane" (page 146). MultiLink Trunking Manager contents pane
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
147
Status bar
The MultiLink Trunking Manager status bar is located at the bottom of the MultiLink Trunking Manager window and contains two elds. "MultiLink Trunking Manager status bar elds" (page 147) describes the elds in the MultiLink Trunking Manager status bar.
MultiLink Trunking Manager status bar elds Field Message Description Located on the left, the message field displays information about the following:
Icon
Located on the right, the icon field provides a legend for different types of trunks and devices found in the network. Trunk
No trunk
Isolated device
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
2 3 4
In the Find text box, type the text or number you are searching for. In the In section, click Tree to search the navigation tree or Table to search the contents pane. Click Next. MultiLink Trunking Manager starts its search and highlights the rst match that it nds, or displays a message that it found no matches.
If a rst match is found, click Next to nd each subsequent match, or click Previous to go back to the last match. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Viewing MultiLink Trunking congurations MultiLink Trunking Manager reload dialog box
149
Do one of the following: Click Reload with discovery of topology to rediscover network topology and reload the Enterprise Switch Manager topology map and all of the submanagers. Click Reload MultiLink Trunking Manager only to just reload MultiLink Trunking Manager. Enterprise Switch Manager polls devices for multilink trunk settings and features, but does not perform a full network topology discovery. Click Cancel to abandon the reload operation. Note: Reloading just MultiLink Trunking Manager takes less time than reloading with topology discovery. However, if there are any changes in network topology, it might result in discrepancies between the information in MultiLink Trunking Manager and the information on the topology map. Such discrepancies might cause incorrect operation when you perform operations (such as highlighting the network map) that involve interactions between the submanagers and the topology map. If you observe such incorrect operation, reload the network map. For more information, see "Rediscovering the network map" (page 74). Enterprise Switch Manager reloads topology information from the network devices and refreshes the MultiLink Trunking Manager window. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
No trunka switch that links to another device in the network but does not have an active MLT congured. Isolateda switch connected only to a hub.
The following sectionsdescribe how to use MultiLink Trunking Manager: "Viewing trunk connections" (page 150) "Viewing no trunk congurations" (page 151) "Viewing isolated devices" (page 152) "Viewing inter switch trunks" (page 154) "Viewing SMLTs" (page 154) "Viewing single port SMLTs" (page 155)
The Trunk table appears in the contents pane. "Trunk table elds" (page 150) describes the elds in the Trunk table.
Trunk table elds Field Device Id Name PortMembers PortType VlanIds Enable IfIndex Description IP address, system name, or host name of the device. Number of the MLT (assigned by MultiLink Trunking Manager). Allows you to enter a name for the MLT. Ports that are assigned to the MLT. Type of port on the MLT (access or trunk). VLAN(s) to which the ports belong. Indicates whether the MLT is enabled (true) or disabled (false). Interface index, a number from 96 to 4097, that identifies the MLT to the software.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
151
Field MltType
normalMLTUse for normal MLT that do not use SMLT features. istMLT Use for IST (inter-switch trunk) links between peer devices in SMLT configurations. splitMLTUse for SMLT links between peer devices and non-peer devices in SMLT configurations.
SmltId RunningType
Shows the SMLT ID number for split MLTs. Read only field displaying the MLT operational type:
The No Trunk table appears in the contents pane. "No Trunk table elds" (page 151) describes the elds in the No Trunk table.
No Trunk table elds Fields Device Id Name Description IP address, system name, or host name of the device. Number of the MLT. Name given to the MLT.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Ports that are assigned to the MLT. Type of port on the MLT (access or trunk). VLAN(s) to which the ports belong. Whether the MLT is enabled (true) or disabled (false). Interface index, a number that identifies the MLT to the software. The range is:
512519 for Passport (legacy) 1050, 1150, 1200, and 1250 devices 40964127 for Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 family devices
MltType
For SMLT configurations, shows one of the following types of MLT links:
normalMLTUse for normal MLT that do not use SMLT features. istMLTUse for IST (inter-switch trunk) links between peer devices in SMLT configurations. splitMLTUse for SMLT links between peer devices and non-peer devices in SMLT configurations.
SmltId RunningType
Shows the SMLT ID number for split multilink trunk links. Read only field displaying the MLT operational type:
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
153
"Isolated Device table elds" (page 153) describes the elds in the Isolated Device table.
Isolated Device table elds Field Device Id Name PortMembers PortType VlanIds Enable IfIndex Description IP address, system name, or host name of the device. Number of the MLT. Name given to the MLT. Ports that are assigned to the MLT. Type of port on the MLT (access or trunk). VLAN(s) to which the ports belong. Indicates whether the MLT is enabled (true) or disabled (false). Interface index, a number that identifies the MLT to the software. The range is:
512519 for Passport (legacy) 1050, 1150, 1200, and 1250 devices 40964127 for Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 family devices
MltType
For SMLT configurations, shows one of the following types of MLT links:
normalMLTUse for normal MLT that do not use SMLT features. istMLTUse for IST (inter-switch trunk) links between peer devices in SMLT configurations. splitMLTUse for SMLT links between peer devices and non-peer devices in SMLT configurations.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Shows the SMLT ID number for split multilink trunk links. Read only field displaying the MLT operational type:
Viewing SMLTs
An SMLT improves the reliability of a layer 2 (L2) network operating between a buildings user access switches and the network center aggregation switch. It does so by providing loadsharing among all the links and fast failover in case of link failures.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
155
For more information about SMLT congurations, see "Managing SMLT congurations" (page 166). To view SMLTs:
In the MultiLink Trunking Manager navigation pane, select the SMLT folder.
The SMLT table appears in the contents pane. "SMLT table elds" (page 155) describes the elds in the SMLT table.
SMLT table elds Field Device Id MltType Description IP address, system name, or host name of the device. Number of the MLT (assigned by MultiLink Trunking Manager). One of the following types of MLT links:
normalMLTUse for normal MLT that do not use SMLT features. istMLT Use for IST (inter-switch trunk) links between peer devices in SMLT configurations. splitMLTUse for SMLT links between peer devices and non-peer devices in SMLT configurations.
SmltId RunningType
Shows the SMLT ID number for split MLTs. Read only field displaying the MLT operational type:
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
The single-port SMLT table appears in the contents pane. "MultiLink Trunking Manager window" (page 143) describes the elds in the Single-port SMLT table.
Single port SMLT table elds Field Device Smlt Id Description IP address, system name, or host name of the device. The Split MLT ID, an integer from 1 to 512.
A read-only field with a value of 1-512 indicates the ports single port SMLT ID assignment. A blank field indicates the port is not configured for single port SMLT. Find an unused SMLT ID by viewing the currently-used IDs.
Port OperType
The slot/port number for the port. Read only field displaying the MLT operational type:
VlanIds
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
157
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
The following sectionsdescribe how to create MLTs on single devices and pairs of devices: "Creating an MLT with one device for ERS 8000" (page 158) "Creating an MLT with one device for ERS 1424 16xx" (page 160) "Creating a new MLT on a pair of devices" (page 162)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Managing MultiLink Trunks Insert MLT dialog box one device selected (ERS 8000)
159
3 4 5
In the Id text box, select the Id number for the MLT. In the Name text box, type the name of the MLT. In the Ports box, select the ports to be added to the MLT. Inactive ports appear dimmed in the Ports box.
7 8
In the VlanIds eld, select the VLAN IDs that belong to the MLT port. For MLT Type, choose normalMLT. The istMLT and splitMLT types, and also the SMLT Id value, are used only for split multilink trunks. For more information, see "Managing SMLT congurations" (page 166).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Insert MLT dialog box items for ERS 8000" (page 160) describes the items in the Insert MLT dialog box.
Insert MLT dialog box items for ERS 8000 Item Node Id Name Ports Type Description IP address of the first network device configured on the MLT. Unique identifier for the MLT, which is automatically assigned by MultiLink Trunking Manager. User-defined name of the node on the MLT. Ports in the MLT. One of the following types of MLT:
Access Trunk
VLAN IDs found on the device. One of the following types of MLT links:
normalMLTUse for normal MLT that do not use SMLT features. istMLTUse for IST (inter-switch trunk) links between peer devices in SMLT configurations. splitMLTUse for SMLT links between peer devices and non-peer devices in SMLT configurations.
SMLT Id
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
161
Step 1
Action Select a device from the rst (folder) level of the MultiLink Trunking Manager navigation pane. The Device table appears in the contents pane.
For Ethernet Routing Switch 1424/16xx devices, do one of the following: From the MultiLink Trunking Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Insert. On the MultiLink Trunking Manager toolbar, click Insert. Note: This step is unnecessary for Ethernet Switch, Ethernet Routing Switch 55xx/35xx, and Legacy BayStack devices, since they are pre-congured with six MLTs. The "Insert MLT dialog box" (page 157) appears ("Insert MLT dialog box one device selected (ERS 1424/16xx)" (page 161)).
Insert MLT dialog box one device selected (ERS 1424/16xx)
3 4 5
In the Id text box, select the Id number for the MLT. In the Name text box, type the name of the MLT. In the Ports box, select the ports to be added to the MLT. Inactive ports appear dimmed in the Ports box.
6 7
In the Master Port text box, type the master port number. Click Ok. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Insert MLT dialog box for ERS 1424/16xx" (page 162) describes the items in the Insert MLT dialog box.
Insert MLT dialog box for ERS 1424/16xx Item Node Id Name Ports Master Port Description IP address of the first network device configured on the MLT. Unique identifier for the MLT, which is automatically assigned by MultiLink Trunking Manager. User-defined name of the node on the MLT. Ports in the MLT. The maximum number of ports for one trunk is four. Identifies the master port number of the port trunk entry.
Do one of the following: From the MultiLink Trunking Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Insert. On the MultiLink Trunking Manager toolbar, click Insert.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
163
The Insert MLT dialog box appears ("Insert MLT dialog box pair of devices selected" (page 163)).
Insert MLT dialog box pair of devices selected
3 4
In the Id eld for both nodes, select the same Id number for the MLT. In one of the Name elds, type the name of the MLT. The text you type appears in both Node Name elds.
In the Ports text box, select the ports to be added to the MLT. In the Insert MLT dialog box, port numbers are highlighted in green to indicate that the ports are already connected between the two devices. Inactive ports are indicated by dimmed port numbers.
Select the VLAN IDs for both nodes to be included in the MLT port. Note: Both nodes must belong to the same VLAN ID list.
For MLT Type, choose normalMLT. The istMLT and splitMLT types, and also the SMLT Id value, are used only for split multilink trunks. For more information, see "Managing SMLT congurations" (page 166).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
For information about the elds in the Insert MLT dialog box, see "Insert MLT dialog box items for ERS 8000" (page 160) or "Insert MLT dialog box for ERS 1424/16xx" (page 162), as required.
To open the Insert MLT dialog box, see "Creating an MLT with one device for ERS 8000" (page 158). The information displayed in the dialog box includes the VLAN(s) and STG(s) to which the port belongs and the port link status. The port link status information includes whether the port is up or down and what other device/ports the port is connected to.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
165
The PortMembers dialog box appears ("PortMembers dialog box" (page 165)).
PortMembers dialog box
Click the port numbers that you want to add or delete from the MLT. Port numbers that appear to be pressed in are already being used, and port numbers that are dimmed are inactive.
The Delete dialog box appears, asking you to conrm the deletion ("Delete MLT dialog box" (page 165)).
Delete MLT dialog box
Click Yes.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
End
Editing an MLT
To edit an MLT: Step 1 Action In the navigation pane, select a device. The MLT table appears in the contents pane. 2 3 Double-click the eld in the table. Type information in the text boxes, or select from a list. Your changes are displayed in bold. 4 On the MultiLink Trunking Manager toolbar, click Apply Changes. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
167
To congure SMLT, you must establish three sets of congurations on the devices: On the two peer aggregation switches, you congure an IST (inter-switch trunk). For more information, see "Conguring IST links" (page 168). On the two peer aggregation switches, you congure SMLT links to the edge switch. For more information, see "Conguring SMLT links on peer devices" (page 171). On the non-peer device, you congure normal MLT links to the two peer devices. For more information, see "Conguring SMLT links on non peer devices" (page 172). On the two peer devices, you congure the IST peers. For more information, see "Conguring IST peers" (page 172).
"Typical triangle SMLT conguration" (page 167) shows a typical triangle SMLT conguration.
Typical triangle SMLT conguration
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Managing SMLT congurations Insert MLT dialog box, creating an IST on two devices
169
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
In the Id boxes, enter an ID number. In the Name boxes, enter a name for the IST. In the Ports areas, select the ports that will be part of the IST. For Port Type, select trunk. In the VlanIds boxes, select the same VLAN. All ports on the SMLT conguration must belong to the same VLAN. For the MLT Types, choose istMLT. Click Ok. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Alternatively, you may be able to use the procedure described in "Conguring IST links on pairs of devices" (page 168) to congure both ends of the IST at the same time. However, you can only do that if Enterprise Switch Manager determines that the physical connections you are conguring as an IST already exist. To congure an IST link on a single device: Step 1 2 3 Action In the MultiLink Trunking Manager navigation pane, select a folder for one of the devices on which you want to congure the IST. On the MultiLink Trunking Manager toolbar, click Insert. The Insert MLT dialog box for a single node appears ("Insert MLT dialog box, creating an IST on one device" (page 170)).
Insert MLT dialog box, creating an IST on one device
4 5 6 7
In the Id box, enter an ID number. In the Name box, enter a name for the IST. Use the same name as for the other end of the IST. In the Ports areas, select the ports that will be part of the IST. For Port Type, select trunk.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
171
8 9 10
In the VlanId box, select the VLAN. All ports on the SMLT conguration must belong to the same VLAN. For the MLT Types, choose istMLT. Click Ok. End
4 5
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
9 10
4 5 6 7 8 9
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
173
Step 1 2
Action In the MultiLink Trunking Manager navigation pane, open the Smlt Network folder. In the Smlt Network folder, click the Inter-Switch Trunk folder. The contents pane shows all of the devices with inter switch trunks congured.
For the IstPeerIp of each peer device, enter the IP address associated with the VLAN on the other peer in the SMLT conguration. For the IstVlanId of both peer devices, enter the VLAN ID of the SMLT conguration. All ports in an SMLT conguration must be in the same VLAN. Click Apply. For the IstSessionEnable of both peer devices, click the entry to select true. Click Apply. End
4 5 6 7 8
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
4 5 6 7
In the Device eld, choose a device from the drop-down list. Enter an SMLT Id. In the Port eld, choose a port. Click OK. End
"Insert SSmlt dialog box items" (page 174) describes the items in the Insert SSmlt dialog box.
Insert SSmlt dialog box items Item Device Smlt Id Description IP address of the network device. The Split MLT ID, an integer from 1 to 512.
A read-only field with a value of 1-512 indicates the ports single port SMLT ID assignment. A blank field indicates the port is not configured for single port SMLT. Find an unused SMLT ID by viewing the currently-used IDs.
Port
175
From the MultiLink Trunking Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Delete. On the MultiLink Trunking Manager toolbar, click Delete.
The Delete dialog box appears, asking you to conrm the deletion. 3 Click Yes. End
2 3
From the MultiLink Trunking Manager menu bar, choose View > Highlight Topology. Return to the Enterprise Switch Manager window. The topology view appears in the Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane with devices connected to the MLT highlighted in blue and the ports in the MLT or SMLT highlighted in green ("Highlight topology view in Enterprise Switch Manager" (page 176)). If you select either a no trunk or an isolated device from the MultiLink Trunking Manager navigation pane, only the highlighted device appears in the Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
176 Using MultiLink Trunking Manager Highlight topology view in Enterprise Switch Manager
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
177
Multicast protocols
Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 supports the following multicast protocols: Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) and IGMP Snoopingsee "IGMP and IGMP Snooping" (page 178) IGMP with Fast Leavesee "IGMP with Fast Leave" (page 178)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocolsee "DVMRP" (page 179) PIM-SMsee "PIM SM" (page 179) PMBR (PIM Multicast Border Router)see "PMBR" (page 179)
Ethernet Routing Switches 1600 support the following multicast protocols and features: IGMP and IGMP snoopingsee "IGMP and IGMP Snooping" (page 178) Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocolsee "DVMRP" (page 179) Multicast Route
Ethernet Switch, Ethernet Routing Switch 55xx/35xx, and Legacy BayStack support IGMP and IGMP snoopingsee "IGMP and IGMP Snooping" (page 178). At its most basic, IP multicast is the communication of data and services to multiple destinations with a single transmission.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
179
To facilitate the conguration Fast Leave Mode should be congurable on a VLAN and /or port basis. Enabling the feature for a given VLAN enables the feature on all ports of that VLAN.
DVMRP
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) advertises shortest-path routes to multicasting source networks (any network containing hosts with the capability to issue multicast datagrams). When DVMRP is coupled with IGMP membership, a multicast stream is learned from both the routers and directly attached hosts.
PIM SM
Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM), as dened in RFC 2362, was designed to support multicast groups spread out across large areas of a company or the Internet. PIM-SM routes multicast packets to multicast groups, and establishes distribution trees across wide area networks. Unlike dense mode protocols, such as DVMRP, that initially ood multicast trafc to all routers over an entire internetwork, PIM-SM sends multicast trafc only to routers that have specically joined a multicast group. This technique reduces trafc ow over WAN links and overhead costs for processing unwanted multicast packets. Dense-mode protocols use a "ood-and-prune" technique, which is efcient where receivers are densely populated. However, for sparsely populated networks, PIM-SM is more efcient because it sends multicast trafc only to those routers that belong to a specic multicast group and that choose to receive the trafc. PIM-SM is independent of any specic unicast routing protocol, but it does require the presence of a unicast routing protocol, such as RIP or OSPF. PIM-SM uses the information from the unicast routing table to create and maintain multicast trees that enables PIM-enabled routers to communicate.
PMBR
A PMBR (PIM Multicast Border Router) is a router that sits at the boundary of a PIM-SM (Sparse Mode) domain and inter-operates with other types of multicast routers such as those that run DVMRP (Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol). That is, in order to inter-operate with networks that run dense-mode, broadcast and prune, protocols such as DVMRP, all packets generated within a PIM-SM region must be pulled out to that regions PIM Multicast Border Routers (PMBRs). Generally a PMBR would use both protocols (PIM-SM and DVMRP) and implement inter-operability functions that are not required by regular PIM routers. To support inter-operability, a special entry type, referred to as (*,*,RP), must be supported by all PIM routers. PMBRs are also responsible
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
for delivering externally generated packets to routers within the PIM domain. All PIM routers must be capable of supporting (*,*,RP) state and interpreting associated Join/Prune messages.
The following sections describe the Multicast Manager window and the monitoring features available: "Starting Multicast Manager" (page 180) "Multicast Manager window" (page 180) "Working with Multicast Manager" (page 189) "Highlighting STGs and VLANs on the topology map" (page 128)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
181
"Multicast Manager window parts" (page 181) describes the parts of the Multicast Manager window.
Multicast Manager window parts Part Title bar Menu bar Description Displays the submanager name. Provides access to all Multicast Manager commands. For more information, see "Menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 182)" next. Provides quick access to commonly used Multicast Manager commands. For more information, see "Menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 182). Provides a navigation tree showing Multicast Manager protocols. For more information, see "Highlight topology view in Enterprise Switch Manager" (page 176). Displays information selected in the navigation pane. For more information, see "Contents pane" (page 186). Displays status information, including the command description from a tool tip, and a key to the type of Multicast groups discovered. For more information, see "Status bar" (page 147).
Toolbar
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Ctrl+P
Preferences
Identifies specific devices for Enterprise Switch Manager to configure and manage. See "Submanager preferences" (page 73) for more information. Ctrl+I Opens the Insert dialog box.
Ctrl+D
Removes a selection and displays a message box to confirm deletion. Copies the contents of the selected cell.
Copy
Ctrl+C
Paste
Ctrl+V
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
183
Menu
Toolbar button
Purpose Opens a dialog box that lets you add a new row to the table.
Modify
Ctrl+M
Opens a dialog box that lets you modify multiple table cells at one time. Deletes the selected row from the table.
Ctrl+X
Apply Changes
Applies changes made to your multicast configuration to the device configuration file. Ctrl+F Opens the Find dialog box, where you set parameters to find matching entries in your network. Opens the Find dialog box, which allows you to find the routing interface for an IP address. See "Finding a routing interface" (page 187) for more information. Highlights the devices running the multicast protocol within the topology map in the Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane, and highlights the multicast forwarding path from the source subnet. To view source subnets or forwarding devices, you must select the IP address associated with the subnet or device.
Find
Find Route
Ctrl+R
View
Highlight Topology
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Menu Help
Command Using
Toolbar button
Shortcut key F1
Purpose Opens a Web browser and loads the online Help system for Multicast Manager. Opens a Web browser and loads the Nortel Customer Support Web page. Displays information about Multicast Manager.
Online Support
Navigation pane
The Multicast Manager navigation pane ("Multicast Manager navigation pane" (page 185)) is on the left side of the window. It contains the protocol folders in the navigation tree. In the navigation pane, you can select the folder for which you want to view multicast information, or use the Print command to print the navigation tree. The folders in the navigation tree contain devices or elements relating to multicast protocols. Click on a folder to open it and view its contents. Most of the folders contain devices, but some contain route trees or other types of elements. Within a folder, click on a device or element icon to view more information in the contents pane. The contents pane will not show any information or column headers if there are no elements in the folder. For more information about the folders and elements in the navigation pane, see "Viewing the Default VLAN" (page 103). "Multicast Manager navigation pane" (page 185) shows the parts of the Multicast Manager navigation pane.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
185
"Parts of the Multicast Manager navigation pane" (page 185) describes the parts of the Multicast Manager navigation pane.
Parts of the Multicast Manager navigation pane Part Protocol folder Subfolder Description Contains subfolders for elements and features of a multicast protocol. Contains subfolders or elements. Click on a subfolder to open it, or click on an element to view its contents in the contents pane. A folder with neither a plus sign or a minus sign is empty, and contains neither subfolders nor elements. Indicates that a closed folder or subfolder contains folders or elements. Click the plus sign to open the folder. Click the minus sign to close the folder. Click on an icon to view information about the element in the contents pane. Some typical element icons are described below: Icon Description Table of devices
Multicast tree
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Part
Device
Contents pane
When you select a network resource in the navigation pane, a table appears in the contents pane ("Enabled Devices folder in the contents pane" (page 186)).
Enabled Devices folder in the contents pane
To view the multicast information in the contents pane: In the navigation pane, select a device or element icon from the list inside the folder for a protocol or feature. Information about the device, protocol, or feature appears in the contents pane.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
187
Status bar
The Multicast Manager status bar is located at the bottom of the Multicast Manager window. The status bar displays status information about operation results.
The Find dialog box appears ("Find dialog box" (page 92)).
Multicast Manager Find dialog box
2 3 4
In the Find text box, type the text or number for your search. In the In section, click the Tree option to search the navigation pane, or click the Table option to search the contents pane. Click Next. Multicast Manager starts its search and highlights the rst match it nds or displays a message that it found no matches.
If a rst match was found, click Next to nd each subsequent match, or click Previous to go back to the last match. End
Step 1
Action In the Multicast Manager navigation pane, choose one of the following: "DVMRP protocol folder" (page 213) > "Routes folder" (page 215) "Multicast Route protocol folder" (page 223) > "Routes folder" (page 225)
2 3 4 5 6 7
In the Routes folder, select a device. From Multicast Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Find Route. The Find Route dialog box appears. In the Target Address box, enter the IP address of the target address to which you want to nd the routing interface. Click Find. The Routing Interface text in the Find dialog box shows the routing interface, if one is found ("Multicast Manager Find Route dialog box" (page 188)).
Multicast Manager Find Route dialog box
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
189
An alert box appears to ask how you want to continue ("Multicast Manager reload dialog box" (page 189)).
Multicast Manager reload dialog box
Do one of the following: Click Reload with discovery of topology to rediscover network topology and reload the Enterprise Switch Manager topology map and all of the submanagers. Click Reload Multicast Manager only to just reload Multicast Manager. Enterprise Switch Manager polls devices known to use multicast protocols for multicast protocol settings and features, but does not perform a full network topology discovery. Click Cancel to abandon the reload operation. Note: Reloading just the Multicast Manager takes less time than reloading with topology discovery. However, if there are any changes in network topology, it might result in discrepancies between the information in Multicast Manager and the information on the topology map. Such discrepancies might cause incorrect operation when you perform operations (such as highlighting the network map) that involve interactions between the submanagers and the topology map. If you observe such incorrect operation, reload the network map. For more information, see "Rediscovering the network map" (page 74). Enterprise Switch Manager reloads topology information from the network devices, and refreshes the Multicast Manager window with it. End
See the following sections for more information about viewing and conguring multicast protocols: "Conguring DVMRP globals" (page 193) "Conguring PIM SM globals" (page 194) "Conguring IGMP and IGMP Snoop on a device" (page 195) "Viewing IGMP and IGMP Snoop information" (page 195) "Viewing DVMRP information" (page 196) "Viewing PIM SM information" (page 196) "Viewing MRoute information" (page 196) "Highlighting STGs and VLANs on the topology map" (page 128)
The Insert dialog box for the selected folder appears. 3 4 Select the IP address of the tree node you want to insert. Click OK. The new tree node appears in the navigation pane tree view under the folder into which you inserted the tree node. End
191
Step 1 2
Action Select the tree node that you want to delete. Do one of the following: From the Multicast Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Delete Tree Node. Click the Delete Tree Node button on the Multicast Manager toolbar.
Multicast Manager removes the node from the navigation pane tree view
Tree Editingadding or deleting a node from the navigation tree
End
3 4
Enter the information for the new table row. Click Ok. Multicast Manager adds the new row to the table. End
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
193
The table modication dialog box appears. 3 4 Make the changes in the dialog box. Click Ok. Multicast Manager applies the changes to all the selected cells. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Step 1 2 3
Action In the Multicast Manager navigation pane tree view, click Globals under the DVMRP folder. In the Enable column of the table on the right, change the value for the selected device to Enabled. Do one of the following: From the Multicast Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Apply Changes. On the Multicast Manager toolbar, click the Apply Changes button.
The enabled devices appear in the interfaces folder of the DVMRP tree and in the Enabled Devices folder of the IGMP and IGMP Snoop tree. End
The devices appear in the Enabled Devices folder in the tree view.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
195
End
See "IGMP and IGMP Snoop protocol folder" (page 201) for more information.
See "IGMP and IGMP Snoop protocol folder" (page 201) for more information.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
See "Multicast Route protocol folder" (page 223) for more information.
The following topics describe procedures for viewing Multicast Manager information on the topology map: "Highlighting a multicast device" (page 196) "Highlighting a multicast forwarding tree" (page 197)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
197
Step 1
Action In the Multicast Manager navigation pane, do one of the following: Select a subfolder under a protocol folder. Select a single device.
Devices supported by the protocol are highlighted. 2 From Multicast Manager menu bar, choose View > Highlight Topology. The Highlight Topology option remains selected until you deselect it. 3 Return to the Enterprise Switch Manager window. If you selected a subfolder under a protocol folder, all devices that support the feature are highlighted. If you selected a single device, the device is highlighted. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
198 Using Multicast Manager Enterprise Switch Manager with forwarding node highlighted
End
You can also select a multicast protocol feature in Multicast Manager and view in Enterprise Switch Manager the devices that are actively using that feature. To view devices using multicast protocol features: Step 1 2 Action In the Multicast Manager navigation pane, select a multicast protocol feature icon from the folders and subfolders of the navigation tree. Return to the Enterprise Switch Manager window. The devices using DVMRP are highlighted("Enterprise Switch Manager with devices using DVMRP highlighted" (page 199)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Understanding the Multicast Manager navigation tree 199 Enterprise Switch Manager with devices using DVMRP highlighted
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
The following sections describe the folders, subfolders, and tabs of the Multicast Manager navigation tree.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Devices folder
The Devices folder of the "IGMP and IGMP Snoop protocol folder" (page 201) contains those switches that have either DVMRP or PIM enabled globally. "Parts of the Devices folder" (page 201) describes the parts of the Devices folder.
Parts of the Devices folder Part "Interface tab" (page 202) "Cache tab for ERS 1424 16xx" (page 202) Description Displays information about the IGMP interfaces used. Contains information about multicast groups.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Interface tab
The Interface tab of the "Devices folder" (page 201) displays information about the IGMP interfaces used. "Parts of the Interface tab" (page 202) describes the parts of the Interface tab.
Parts of the Interface tab Part Interface Status Version Description Interface on which IGMP is enabled. Active or Not In Service Version of IGMP that is configured on the interface. For IGMP to function correctly, all routers on a LAN must be configured to run the same version of IGMP on that LAN. Version of IGMP that is running on this interface. Frequency with which IGMP Host-Query packets are transmitted on this interface. Address of the IGMP querier on the IP subnet to which the interface is attached. Maximum query response time advertised on this interface. Number of queries received whose IGMP versions do not match the IGMP version of this interface. Number of times a group membership has been added on this interface; that is, the number of times an entry for this interface has been added to the cache table. This number gives an indication of the amount of IGMP activity over time. Variable that allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet. Max Response Time in Group-Specific Queries sent in response to Leave Group messages. Also, the amount of time between Group-Specific Query messages.
Robustness LastMembQueryIntrvl
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Cache tab" (page 203) describes the parts of the Cache tab.
Parts of the Cache tab Part Address IfIndex UpTime Self LastReporter Description The IP Multicast group address for which this entry contains information. The interface from which the corresponding multicast group address is heard. The time elapsed since this entry was created. Sets whether to advertise local routes to neighbors. The IP address of the source of the last membership report received for this IP Multicast group address on this interface. If no membership report has been received, the object has the value 0.0.0.0. The amount of time (in seconds) remaining before this entry is aged out. The IGMP row status. When an interface has an IP address and DVMRP or PIM-SM is enabled, status is shown as active. Otherwise, it is shown as notInService. The time remaining until the local router assumes that there are no longer any IGMP version 1 members on the IP subnet attached to the interface. Upon hearing any IGMPv1 membership report, this value is reset to the group membership timer. When the time remaining is nonzero, the local router ignores any IGMPv2 Leave messages for this group that it receives on this interface.
ExpiryTime Status
Version1HostTimer
Members
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Part InPort
Description A unique value to identify a brouter interface or a logical interface (VLAN) that has received Group reports from various members. Time left before the group report expires on this port. This variable is updated upon receiving a group report.
Expiration
The interface on which IGMP entry is enabled. The IP address of a host for which this entry contains information. Identifies the T Port.
Snoop folder
The Snoop folder of the "IGMP and IGMP Snoop protocol folder" (page 201) contain devices that have either Snoop or proxy snoop enabled on one or more of their interfaces. "Parts of the Snoop folder" (page 204) describes the parts of the Snoop folder.
Parts of the Snoop folder Part rcVlanId SnoopEnable Description The VLAN ID for the VLAN. Enables (true) or disables (false) IGMP snooping. IGMP snooping works only when a multicast router exists in the VLAN.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Indicates whether the IGMP report proxy feature is enabled. When this feature is enabled, reports are forwarded from hosts to the multicast router once per group per query interval or when there is new group information. When this feature is disabled, all reports from different hosts are forwarded to multicast routers, and more than one group report may be forwarded for the same multicast group per query interval. The default is enabled.
SnoopMRouterPorts
Ports that have been configured as multicast router ports. Such ports are directly attached to a multicast router so the multicast data and group reports will be forwarded to the router. Caution: Configure this field only when there are multiple multicast routers that are not directly attached to one another but are directly attached to the VLAN (technically an invalid configuration). If multicast routers have a route between them (the valid configuration) and this field is configured, a multicast loop forms.
This is the IP address of a multicast querier router. The port on which the multicast querier router was heard. Time remaining before the multicast router is aged out. If the switch does not receive any queries before this time expires, it flushes out all group memberships known to the VLAN. The Query Max Response Interval (obtained from the queries received) is used as the timer resolution.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Displays the current IGMP information captured by the device. Displays the current IGMP forwarding information captured by the device. Allows you to designate a range of ports as being connected to multicast-enabled routers.
IGMPMulticast RouterOnly
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Snoop Control tab" (page 207) describes the parts of the Snoop Control tab.
Parts of the Snoop Control tab Part CtrlVid QueryInterval Description Indicates the VLAN ID of the individual IGMP VLAN. The frequency (in seconds) at which IGMP host query packets are transmitted on the interface. The range is from 1 to 65535, and the default is 125. The maximum response time (in seconds) advertised in IGMPv2 general queries on this interface. This value is not configurable for IGMPv1. Smaller values allow a router to prune groups faster. The range is from 0 to 25, and the default is 10 seconds.
MaxResponse Time
Robustness
This parameter allows tuning for the expected packet loss of a network. This value is equal to the number of expected query packet losses per serial query interval, plus 1. If a network is expected to lose query packets, the robustness value should be increased. The range is from 1 to 255, and the default is 2. The default value of 2 means that one query per query interval may be dropped without the querier aging out.
LastMember QueryInterval
The maximum response time (in seconds) that is inserted into group-specific queries sent in response to leave group messages. It is also the time between group-specific query messages. This value is not configurable for IGMPv1. Decreasing the value reduces the time to detect the loss of the last member of a group. The range is from 0 to 255, and the default is 1 second. Nortel recommends configuring this parameter to values above 1.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Part HostTimeout
Description The timer value for sending IGMP query packet when none was sent by the host in the LAN. The timer works on a per-VLAN basis. The device sends the query message if the timer is expired. The range is 1 to 16711450 with a default value of 260. The amount of time a host must wait after hearing a Query before it sends any IGMPv2 messages. The default value is 260. The range is from 1 to 16711450 seconds. The frequency (in seconds) at which a querier sends group-specific queries to group members when the querier receives a leave group message. The range is from 1 to 16711450 with a default value of 1. The current operational state of the IGMP query (enabled or disabled). The current state of the IGMP (querier or non-querier). The current state of IGMP snoop (disabled or enabled) for this entry. To enable or disable the current state, click the field and a selection box appears with the enable and disable options.
RouteTimeout
LeaveTimer
IpGroupReport Count
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
ForwardGroup IpAddr
Identifies the group IP address learned from the IGMP packet, on a per-VLAN basis.
DynamicRouter Port
MRDISC folder
The MRDISC (Multicast Route Discovery) folder of the "IGMP and IGMP Snoop protocol folder" (page 201) shows the devices that have MRDISC enabled.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the MRDISC folder" (page 210) describes the parts of the MRDISC folder.
Parts of the MRDISC folder Part Interface MrdiscEnable Discovered route ports Max advertise interval Description The interface on which IGMP is enabled. Indicates whether MRDISC is enabled. Lists ports discovered by IGMP Multicast Router Discovery (MRDISC) Protocol. The maximum time allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface, in seconds, between 2 and 180 seconds. Default is 20 seconds. The minimum time allowed between sending unsolicited router advertisements from the interface, in seconds. Must be more than 3 seconds but no greater than the value assigned to the MaxAdvertiseInterval value. Used to set the maximum number (in seconds) of multicast advertisement intervals that can be configured on the switch. Used to set the maximum number of initial multicast advertisements that can be configured on the switch. The time interval (in seconds) before the router interface drops traffic when a user leaves the multicast group.
Max initial advertise interval Max initial advertisements Neighbor dead interval
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Part HostMask
Description The subnet mask used to determine the host or hosts covered by this configuration. You can use the host subnet mask to restrict access to a portion of the hosts network. The name of the prefix list. Used to specify whether the host identified by HostAddr should be:
PrefixListName ActionMode
Denied IP multicast transmitted traffic (denyTX). Denied IP multicast received traffic (denyRX). Denied both IP multicast transmitted and received traffic (denyBOTH). Allowed IP multicast transmitted traffic (allowTX). Allowed IP multicast received traffic (allowRX). Allowed both IP multicast transmitted and received traffic (allowBOTH).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Subnet mask of the host whose membership is to be controlled. The host address mode, which can be one of the following:
denyTxdeny transmit mode denyRxdeny receive mode denyBothdeny transmit and receive mode
Globals
The Globals folder of the "DVMRP protocol folder" (page 213) shows the devices that have DVMRP globally enabled.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Globals table" (page 214) describes the parts of the Globals table.
Parts of the Globals table Part Devices Enable UpdateInterval Description The IP address, system name, or host name of the device. Indicates whether DVMRP is enabled or disabled. Periodically, each multicast router advertises routing information about each DVMRP interface, using the DVMRP export message. This field shows the time interval (in seconds) between DMVRP updates. The range is from 10 to 2000 with a default of 60. In DVMRPv3, this variable is also known as the Route Report Interval. Triggered updates are sent when routing information changes. This value is the amount of time (in seconds) between triggered update messages. The range is from 5 to 1000 with a default value of 5. In DVMRPv3, this variable is also known as the Minimum Flash Update Interval. When DVMRP advertises a route on an interface, it waits a period of time for a DVMRP neighbor to respond positively. If no neighbor responds in the given time, the router considers the network attached to the interface to be a leaf network. The leaf timer shows you how long (in seconds) the router waits for a response from a neighbor. The range is from 25 to 4000 with a default value of 125. The neighbor report timer specifies how long (in seconds) the router waits to receive a report from a neighbor before considering the connection inactive. The range is from 35 to 8000 with a default of 35. How often the DVMRP router sends probe messages on its interfaces. The range is 5 to 30 seconds with a default of 10. The route expiration timeout in seconds. The value used in aging prune entries in seconds. The garbage collect route timeout in seconds. The route discard timeout in seconds.
TriggerredUpdate Interval
LeafTimeOut
NbrTimeOut
NbrProbeInterval
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Interfaces folder
The DVMRP Interface folder of the "DVMRP protocol folder" (page 213) displays information about the interfaces with DVMRP enabled. "Parts of the Interfaces folder" (page 215) describes the parts of the Interfaces folder.
Parts of the Interfaces folder Part Interface OperState LocalAddress Metric Description The DVMRP interface, slot/port number or VLAN identification. Current operational state of this DVMRP interface (up or down). IP address of the DVMRP router interface. The distance metric for this interface, used to calculate distance vectors. The range is 1 to 31. The default value is 1, which means local delivery only.
Routes folder
The Routes folder of the "DVMRP protocol folder" (page 213) shows routing information for devices that have DVMRP globally enabled. "Parts of the Routes folder" (page 215) describes the parts of the Routes folder.
Parts of the Routes folder Part "Routes tab" (page 215) "Neighbors tab" (page 216) "Next Hops tab" (page 217) Description Displays the table of routes learned through DVMRP route exchange. Displays the DVMRP neighbors that were discovered by receiving DVMRP messages. Displays the next hop on outgoing interfaces for routing IP multicast datagrams.
Routes tab
The DVMRP Route tab of the "Routes folder" (page 215) shows the table of routes learned through DVMRP route exchange.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Routes tab" (page 216) describes the parts of the Routes tab.
Parts of the Routes tab Part Source Description The network address, when combined with the corresponding route SourceMask value, identifies the sources for which this entry contains multicast routing information. The network mask, when combined with the corresponding route Source value, identifies the sources for which this entry contains multicast routing information. Address of the upstream neighbor (in other words, the RPF neighbor) from which IP datagrams from these sources are received, or 0.0.0.0 if the network is local. DVMRP interface slot/port number or VLAN ID on which IP datagrams sent by these sources are received. Distance in hops to the source subnet. Range is 1 to 32. Amount of time (in seconds) remaining before this entry is aged out.
SourceMask
Neighbors tab
TheNeighbors tab of the "Routes folder" (page 215) displays the DVMRP neighbors that were discovered by receiving DVMRP messages. "Parts of the Neighbors tab" (page 216) describes the parts of the Neighbors tab.
Parts of the Neighbors tab Part Interface Address ExpiryTime GenerationID MajorVersion MinorVersion Description The DVMRP slot/port number or the virtual interface (VLAN) used to reach this DVMRP neighbor. IP address of the DVMRP neighbor for which this entry contains information. Time remaining before this DVMRP neighbor is aged out. Neighboring routers generation ID number. Neighboring routers major DVMRP version number. Neighboring routers minor DVMRP version number.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Part Capabilities
Description Neighboring routers capabilities. The probe flag is 1 byte long with the lower 4 bits containing the following information:
The leaf bit (0) indicates that the neighbor has only one interface with neighbors. The prune bit (1) indicates that the neighbor supports pruning. The generationID bit (2) indicates that the neighbor sends its generation ID in probe messages. The mtrace bit (3) indicates that the neighbor can handle mtrace requests.
State
onewayThe switch sees a packet from the neighbor but no adjacency has been established. activeAdjacency exists in both directions. ignoringThe switch ignores neighbor packets. downThe interface is not enabled.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Part Type
leaf if no downstream dependent neighbors exist on the outgoing virtual interface branch if downstream dependent neighbors do exist on the outgoing virtual interface.
Source
The network address that, when combined with the corresponding next hop SourceMask value, identifies the source for which this entry specifies a next hop on an outgoing interface. The network mask that, when combined with the corresponding next hop Source value, identifies the source for which this entry specifies a next hop on an outgoing interface.
SourceMask
Interface
Metric ExpiryTime
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Globals
The Globals table of the "PIM SM protocol folder" (page 219) shows devices that have PIM globally enabled. "Parts of the Globals table" (page 219) describes the parts of the Globals table.
Parts of the Globals table Part Devices Enable Mode Mbr JoinPrune Interval Description The IP address, system name, or host name of the device. Indicates whether PIM-SM is enabled or disabled. The configured mode of this interface. Sparse is the only valid entry. Indicates whether the PIM multicast border router feature is enabled or disabled. Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM router sends out the next join/prune message to its upstream neighbors. The default is 60 seconds.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Each sources DR maintains, per (S.G.) a register-suppression timer in seconds. This timer is started by the Register-Stop message; upon expiration, the sources DR resumes sending data packets to the RP. Indicates whether the static RP feature is enabled or disabled.
StaticRP
Interfaces folder
The Interfaces folder of the "PIM SM protocol folder" (page 219) shows switch nodes that have PIM globally enabled. "Parts of the Interfaces folder" (page 220) describes the parts of the Interfaces folder.
Parts of the Interfaces folder Part Interface Interface IP address Subnet mask Mode Designated router Hello interval Description The slot/port number or VLAN ID of the interface on which PIM is enabled. The IP address of the PIM interface. The network mask for the IP address of the PIM interface. The configured mode of this interface. Sparse is the only valid entry. Displays the designated router for the PIM interface. Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM router sends out the next Hello message to neighboring routers. The default is 30 seconds. Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM router sends out the next join/prune message to its upstream neighbors. The default is 60 seconds. Sets your preference for this local interface to become a C-BSR. The C-BSR with the highest BSR-priority and address is referred to as the preferred BSR. The default is -1, which indicates that the current interface is not a C-BSR. The current operational state of this PIM interface.
Operation status
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Candidate RPs folder" (page 221) describes the parts of the Candidate RPs folder.
Parts of the Candidate RPs folder Part Group address Group mask Description The IP address of the multicast group. When combined with the group mask, it identifies the prefix that the local router uses to advertise itself as a Candidate RP. The address mask of the multicast group. When combined with the group address, it identifies the prefix that the local router uses to advertise itself as a Candidate RP. The IP address of the Candidate RP. This address has to be one of the local PIM-SM enabled interfaces. The holdtime of a Candidate RP. If the local router is not the BSR, this value is 0. The minimum time remaining before the Candidate RP will be declared down. If the local router is not the BSR, this value is 0. A number uniquely identifying the component. Each protocol instance connected to a separate domain should have a different index value.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description The minimum time remaining before the Candidate RP will be declared down. If the local router is not the BSR, this value is 0. A number uniquely identifying the component. Each protocol instance connected to a separate domain should have a different index value.
Component
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description The minimum time remaining before the bootstrap switch will be declared down. If the local router is not the BSR, this value is 0. A number uniquely identifying the component. Each protocol instance connected to a separate domain should have a different index value.
Component
Component
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Multicast Route protocol folder" (page 224) describes the parts of the Multicast Route protocol folder.
Parts of the Multicast Route protocol folder Part "PIM DVMRP Gateway folder" (page 224) "Timed Prune folder" (page 224) "Routes folder" (page 225) "MRoute RPM Trees folder" (page 227) Description Displays devices that are configured as gateways between PIM and DVMRP domains.
Displays forwarding entries that will not be pruned until a configurable timer expires. Displays protocol-independent multicast route and next hop information. Displays the reverse path multicast tree for all active sources.
Protocol
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Timed prune folder" (page 225) describes the parts of the Timed Prune folder.
Parts of the Timed prune folder Part Group address Source address Source subnet mask Description Indicates the IP Multicast Group Address associated with the IP multicast stream. The Source Subnet IP address of the sender of the IP multicast stream. This is the Source Subnet Mask IP address of the sender of the IP multicast stream.
Routes folder
The Routes folder of the "Multicast Route protocol folder" (page 223) shows protocol-independent multicast route and next hop information. "Parts of the Routes folder" (page 225) describes the parts of the Routes folder.
Parts of the Routes folder Part "Routes tab" (page 225) "Next Hops tab" (page 226) Description Displays multicast route information. Displays multicast next hop information.
Routes tab
The Routes tab of the "Routes folder" (page 225) shows multicast route information. "Parts of the Routes tab" (page 225) describes the parts of the Routes tab.
Parts of the Routes tab Part Group Source Description The IP multicast group address for which this entry contains multicast routing information. The network address which, when combined with the corresponding route SourceMask value, identifies the sources for which this entry contains multicast routing information. The network mask which, when combined with the corresponding route Source value, identifies the sources for which this entry contains multicast routing information.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Source mask
Description The slot/port number or VLAN ID on which IP datagrams sent by these sources to this multicast address are received. The address of the upstream neighbor (e.g., RPF neighbor) from which IP datagrams from these sources to this multicast address are received, or 0.0.0.0 if the network is local. The routing protocol through which this route was learned.
Expiry time
Protocol
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Interfaces tab
"Parts of the Interfaces tab" (page 227) describes the parts of the Interfaces tab.
Parts of the Interfaces tab Part Interface Local| Address Metric Description The DVMRP interface or VLAN identification. The IP address of the DVMRP router interface. The distance metric for this interface, used to calculate distance vectors. The range is 1 to 31. The default value is 1, which means local delivery only. The current operational state of this DVMRP interface (up or down).
OperState
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
229
The Trap/Log Manager dialog box appears ("Trap/Log Manager dialog box" (page 230)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
231
The Insert Syslog dialog box appears ("Insert Syslog dialog box for ERS 8000 devices" (page 231)).
Insert Syslog dialog box for ERS 8000 devices
"Insert Syslog box elds for ERS 8000" (page 231) describes the Insert Syslog dialog box elds
Insert Syslog box elds for ERS 8000 Part Id IPAddr UdpPort definition ID for the syslog host being created. IP address of the syslog host. The UDP port to use to send messages to the syslog host (514 to 530). Default value is 514.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
definition The syslog host facility used to identify messages (LOCAL0 to LOCAL7) The Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 Series message severity for which syslog messages will be sent. Default value has all values enabled: info, fatal, warning and error. The fields that map the Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 Series severity levels to syslog severity. Default value is info. The fields that map Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 Series warning severity levels to syslog severity. Default value is warning. The fields that map Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 error severity levels to syslog severity. Default value is error. The fields that map Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 fatal severity levels to syslog severity. Default value is emergency. Enables or disables sending messages to the syslog host. Default value is false (not selected). Allows you to set these values for other similar devices.
MapInfo Severity MapWarning Severity MapError Severity MapFatal Severity Enable Multiple Devices Insertion
4 5
You can modify the existing SyslogHost properties by editing the corresponding cells in the table. To apply the changes, click the Apply Changes button in the tool bar.
233
2 3
Under the System Log tab, choose true from the Enable column. To apply the changes, click the Apply Changes button in the tool bar. End
"System Log tab elds for ERS 8000" (page 233) describes the System Log tab elds
System Log tab elds for ERS 8000 Part Enable Maximum Hosts Operation State definition Used to enable/disable the syslog feature. The maximum number of remote hosts considered active and able to receive messages from the syslog service. The operational state of the syslog service.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
234 Using Trap Log Manager Insert Syslog dialog box for ERS 16xx devices
4 5
You can modify the existing SyslogHost properties by editing the corresponding cells in the table. To apply the changes, click the Apply Changes button in the tool bar. "Insert Syslog dialog box elds for ERS 16xx" (page 234) describes the Insert Syslog dialog box elds.
Insert Syslog dialog box elds for ERS 16xx Part HostId HostIP HostSeverity HostFacility HostUDP Port Multiple Devices Insertion Description ID for the syslog host being created. IP address of the syslog host. The Ethernet Routing Switch Layer 3 routing switch message severity for which syslog messages will be sent. The syslog host facility used to identify messages (LOCAL0 to LOCAL7). The UDP port to use to send messages to the syslog host (514 to 530). Allows you to set these values for other similar devices.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
235
"System Log tab elds for ERS 16xx devices" (page 235) describes the System Log tab elds for ERS 16xx
System Log tab elds for ERS 16xx devices Part State Maximum Hosts Remote UserLog State definition Used to enable/disable the syslog feature. The maximum number of remote hosts considered active and able to receive messages from the syslog service. The highest valid value is 10. The operational state of the Remote User Log.
Conguring System Log for Ethernet Switch, ERS 55xx 35xx, and Legacy BayStack devices
To congure the system log for a host: Step 1 2 Action Under the Congure System Log folder, choose a device for which to create a system log. Choose the System Log tab. The System Log tab appears ("System log tab for Ethernet Switch, ERS 55xx/35xx, and Legacy BayStack devices" (page 236)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
236 Using Trap Log Manager System log tab for Ethernet Switch, ERS 55xx/35xx, and Legacy BayStack devices
Modify the System Log properties by editing the corresponding cells in the table. To apply the changes, click the Apply Changes button in the tool bar. End
"System Log tab elds for Ethernet Switch, ERS 55xx/35xx, and Legacy BayStack" (page 236) describes the System Log tab elds.
System Log tab elds for Ethernet Switch, ERS 55xx/35xx, and Legacy BayStack Part Address Description The IP address where log messages are sent using the remote syslog facility.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
237
Description Specifies that the remote logging feature is enabled. Specifies the type of log messages to be sent to a remote syslog server when they occur. Messages are classified based on their type:
Critical - Specifies that only critical messages are sent to the remote syslog server. Critical/Serious - Specifies that both critical and serious messages are sent to the remote syslog server. Critical/Serious/Informational - Causes all log messages are sent to the remote syslog server. None - Specifies that no log messages are sent to the remote syslog server.
Viewing SysLog
To view the SysLog: Step 1 Action In the Trap/Log Manager navigation pane, click View System Logs. The View System Logs table appears ("View Syslog dialog box" (page 237)).
View Syslog dialog box
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
The cells are non-editable. 2 To export system log information to a text le, click Export and save the le to a local location. End
Conguring Traps
For instructions on conguring traps for different switch families, see the following: "Acknowledging traps" (page 238) "Conguring Trap Receivers for ERS 8000 devices" (page 239) "Conguring Target Address Table for ERS 8000 devices" (page 240) "Conguring Target Params Table for ERS 8000 devices" (page 242) "Conguring Notify Table for ERS 8000 devices" (page 244) "Conguring Trap Receivers for ERS 55xx 35xx, Ethernet Switch, and Legacy BayStack devices" (page 246) "Conguring Target Address Table for ERS 55xx 35xx and Ethernet Switch devices" (page 247) "Conguring Target Params Table for ERS 55xx 35xx and Ethernet Switch devices" (page 249) "Conguring Notify Table for ERS 55xx 35xx and Ethernet Switch devices" (page 251) "Conguring Trap Receivers for ERS 1424 16xx devices" (page 253) "Viewing Trap Log" (page 254) "Conguring Trap Preferences" (page 255) "Parsing Traps" (page 258) "Link up and link down trap notication conguration example " (page 262)
Acknowledging traps
You can use Trap/Log Manager to enable trap acknowledgement. To enable trap acknowledgement: Step 1 Action From the Trap/Log Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Acknowledge Traps.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Conguring Traps
239
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Insert Trap Receiver dialog box elds for ERS 8000" (page 240) describes the Insert Trap Receiver dialog box elds
Insert Trap Receiver dialog box elds for ERS 8000 Part IpAddress Community Version Multiple Devices Insertion definition IP Address of the NMS(ESM) which receive the traps Community String SNMP version Allows you to set these values for other similar devices.
5 6
Populate the elds as required. Click OK. A row corresponding to the newly created trap receiver is added to the table in the contents pane. End
You can also edit the existing trap receiver by editing the corresponding cells.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Conguring Traps Insert Target Address Table dialog box for ERS 8000 devices
241
Timeout
The maximum round trip time required for communicating with the transport address defined by this row. The number of retries to be attempted when a response is not received for a generated message. Specifies a list of tag values. A tag value refers to a class of targets to which the messages may be sent The string value that identifies snmpTargetParamsTa ble entries.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
definition Specifies the storage type. Default value is other. Allows you to set these values for other similar devices.
5 6
Populate the elds as required. Click OK. A row corresponding to the newly created Target Address is added to the table in the contents pane. End
You can also edit the existing Target Address entries by editing the corresponding cells.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Conguring Traps Insert Target Params dialog box for ERS 8000 devices
243
"Insert Target Params dialog box elds for ERS 8000" (page 243) describes the Insert Target Params dialog box elds
Insert Target Params dialog box elds for ERS 8000 Part Name MPModel definition Specifies the unique name of the target parameters table Specifies the Message Processing model, SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, or SNMPv3/USM. Default value is SNMPv1. Specifies the security model, SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, or SNMPv3/USM. Default value is SNMPv1. Specifies a new security name, which identifies the principal to generate SNMP messages. The security level. The valid options are noAuthNoPriv, authNoPriv, and authPriv. Default value is noAuthNoPriv. Specifies the storage type. Default value is non-volatile. Allows you to set these values for other similar devices.
5 6
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
A row corresponding to the newly created Target Params entry is added to the table in the contents pane. End
You can also edit the existing target parameters by editing the corresponding cells.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Conguring Traps
245
"Insert Notify Table dialog box elds for ERS 8000" (page 245) describes the Insert Trap Receiver dialog box elds
Insert Notify Table dialog box elds for ERS 8000 Part Name Tag definition Specifies the unique identifier associated for the notify table. A single tag value used to select entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable that contains a tag value equal to the value of an instance of this object is selected. If this object contains a value of zero length, no entries are selected. This object determines the type of notification generated for entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable that are selected by the corresponding instance of snmpNotifyTag. If the value of this object is trap, then any messages generated for selected rows contain SNMPv2-Trap PDUs. If the value of this object is inform, then any messages generated for selected rows contain Inform PDUs. Note: If an SNMP entity only supports generation of traps (and not informs), then this object may be read-only.
Type
Specifies the storage type. Default value is other. Allows you to set these values for other similar devices.
5 6
Populate the elds as required. Click OK. A row corresponding to the newly created notication is added to the table in the contents pane. End
You can also edit the existing notications by editing the corresponding cells.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Conguring Trap Receivers for ERS 55xx 35xx, Ethernet Switch, and Legacy BayStack devices
To congure trap receivers: Step 1 2 3 4 Action In the Trap/Log Manager navigation pane, click Congure Traps/Notications. Choose the switch for which you want to congure trap receivers. In the contents pane, click the Trap Receivers tab. To add a trap receiver entry for a device, click the create icon in the tool bar or choose Edit > Create from the Trap/Log Manager menu. The Insert Trap Receiver dialog box appears ("Insert Trap Receiver dialog box for ERS 55xx/35xx, Ethernet Switch, and Legacy BayStack devices" (page 246)).
Insert Trap Receiver dialog box for ERS 55xx/35xx, Ethernet Switch, and Legacy BayStack devices
"Insert Trap Receiver dialog box elds for ERS 55xx/35xx, Ethernet Switch, and Legacy BayStack" (page 246) describes the Insert Trap Receiver dialog box elds
Insert Trap Receiver dialog box elds for ERS 55xx/35xx, Ethernet Switch, and Legacy BayStack Part Indx NetAddr Comm Multiple Devices Insertion definition Index for this trap receiver table IP Address of the NMS(ESM) which receive the traps Community String Allows you to set these values for other similar devices.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Conguring Traps
247
5 6
Populate the elds as required. Click OK. A row corresponding to the newly created trap receiver is added to the table in the contents pane. End
You can also edit the existing trap receiver by editing the corresponding cells.
Conguring Target Address Table for ERS 55xx 35xx and Ethernet Switch devices
The notication table, target address table and target address param table entries for a device can be added by clicking the create icon in the tool bar or by choosing from the menu item. A row corresponding to the newly created table will be added to the table in the right panel.The device also can be congured for the existing entry by editing the corresponding cells. To congure the Target Address Table: Step 1 2 3 4 Action In the Trap/Log Manager navigation pane, click Congure Traps/Notications. Choose the switch for which you want to congure target addresses. In the contents pane, click the Target Address Table tab. To add a target address entry for a device, click the Create icon in the tool bar or choose Edit > Create from the Trap/Log Manager menu. The Insert Target Address Table dialog box appears ("Insert Target Address Table dialog box ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch devices" (page 248)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
248 Using Trap Log Manager Insert Target Address Table dialog box ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch devices
"Insert Target Address Table dialog box elds for ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch " (page 248) describes the Insert Target Address Table dialog box elds
Insert Target Address Table dialog box elds for ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch Part Name TDomain TAddress definition Specifies the name of the target table. Specifies the TDomain for the target table. The IP address and the host of the target and the UDPport number.
Timeout
The maximum round trip time required for communicating with the transport address defined by this row. The number of retries to be attempted when a response is not received for a generated message. Specifies a list of tag values. A tag value refers to a class of targets to which the messages may be sent The string value that identifies snmpTargetParamsTa ble entries.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Conguring Traps
249
definition Specifies the storage type. Default value is other. Allows you to set these values for other similar devices.
5 6
Populate the elds as required. Click OK. A row corresponding to the newly created Target Address is added to the table in the contents pane. End
You can also edit the existing Target Address entries by editing the corresponding cells.
Conguring Target Params Table for ERS 55xx 35xx and Ethernet Switch devices
To congure the Target Params Table: Step 1 2 3 4 Action In the Trap/Log Manager navigation pane, click Congure Traps/Notications. Choose the switch for which you want to congure target parameters. In the contents pane, click the Target Params Table tab. To add a target parameter entry for a device, click the create icon in the tool bar or choose Edit > Create from the Trap/Log Manager menu. The Insert Target Params dialog box appears ("Insert Target Params dialog box for ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch devices" (page 250)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
250 Using Trap Log Manager Insert Target Params dialog box for ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch devices
"Insert Target Params dialog box elds for ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch devices " (page 250) describes the Insert Target Params dialog box elds
Insert Target Params dialog box elds for ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch devices Part Name MPModel definition Specifies the unique name of the target parameters table Specifies the Message Processing model, SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, or SNMPv3/USM. Default value is SNMPv1. Specifies the security model, SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, or SNMPv3/USM. Default value is SNMPv1. Specifies a new security name, which identifies the principal to generate SNMP messages. The security level. The valid options are noAuthNoPriv, authNoPriv, and authPriv. Default value is noAuthNoPriv. Specifies the storage type, volatile or non-volatile. Default value is other. Allows you to set these values for other similar devices.
5 6
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Conguring Traps
251
A row corresponding to the newly created Target Params entry is added to the table in the contents pane. End
You can also edit the existing target parameters by editing the corresponding cells.
Conguring Notify Table for ERS 55xx 35xx and Ethernet Switch devices
To congure the Notify Table: Step 1 2 3 4 Action In the Trap/Log Manager navigation pane, click Congure Traps/Notications. Choose the switch for which you want to congure notications. In the contents pane, click the Notify Table tab. To add a notication entry for a device, click the Create icon in the tool bar or choose Edit > Create from the Trap/Log Manager menu. The Insert Notify Table dialog box appears ("Insert Notify Table dialog box for ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch devices" (page 251)).
Insert Notify Table dialog box for ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch devices
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Insert Notify Table dialog box elds for ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch devices " (page 252) describes the Insert Notify Table dialog box elds
Insert Notify Table dialog box elds for ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch devices Part Name Tag definition Specifies the unique identifier associated for the notify table. A single tag value used to select entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable that contains a tag value equal to the value of an instance of this object is selected. If this object contains a value of zero length, no entries are selected. This object determines the type of notification generated for entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable that are selected by the corresponding instance of snmpNotifyTag. If the value of this object is trap, then any messages generated for selected rows contain SNMPv2-Trap PDUs. If the value of this object is inform, then any messages generated for selected rows contain Inform PDUs. The default value is trap.
Type
Note: If an SNMP entity only supports generation of traps (and not informs), then this object may be read-only.
Specifies the storage type. Allows you to set these values for other similar devices.
5 6
Populate the elds as required. Click OK. A row corresponding to the newly created notication is added to the table in the contents pane.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Conguring Traps
253
End
You can also edit the existing notications by editing the corresponding cells.
"Insert Trap Receiver dialog box elds for ERS 1424/16xx devices " (page 253) describes the Insert Trap Receiver dialog box elds
Insert Trap Receiver dialog box elds for ERS 1424/16xx devices Part Index Address Community Multiple Devices Insertion definition Index for this trap receiver table IP Address of the NMS(ESM) which receive the traps Community String Allows you to set these values for other similar devices.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
4 5
Populate the elds as required. Click OK. A row corresponding to the newly created trap receiver is added to the table in the contents pane. End
You can also edit the existing trap receiver by editing the corresponding cells.
The cells are non-editable. Note: This tab shows the traps that are received from the devices in case of any events. The right-hand panel displays the Trap or Notications tab based on the version of the device. Older versions support the Trap tab and newer versions support the Notications tab.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Conguring Traps
255
To export trap log information to a text le, click Export and save the le to a local location. End
Setting lters
To set a lter for trap notications: Step 1 Action From the ESM menu bar, choose Edit > Trap Preferences > Filters. The Trap Filter Preferences dialog box appears.
Trap Filter Preferences
To add a lter, in the Filter pane, click Insert. A blank row appears in the Filters list.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
3 4
Double-click in the blank row, and add a name to the new lter. Click the Filter Components button. The existing lter components appear in the Filter Components list (the list remains blank for a new lter as no lter components are yet dened).
In the Filter Components pane, click Insert. A blank row appears in the Filter Components list.
6 7 8
Dene the parameters for the lter using the lists provided in each column. Insert additional rows as required to dene the lter. Click OK. End
Setting notications
To associate e-mail or pager notications with a particular lter: Step 1 Action To set e-mail notications, from the ESM menu bar, choose Edit > Trap Preferences > Email notications. OR To set pager notications, choose Edit > Trap Preferences > Pager notications. The Email Notications Preference dialog box or Pager Notications Preferences dialog box appears.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
257
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
3 4 5
In the new row, enter the appropriate contact information in the Pager or Email column. In the Details column, enter a short description of this notication. Double-click the Filters column. The Select Filters dialog box appears.
Select Filters dialog box
6 7 8
To associate a particular lter with this notication, select Associate in the lter row. Click OK. To save the notication, click Save. End
Parsing traps
With ESM 6.0, you can use the Trap Parser tool to identify incoming traps that have specied criteria. You can create parser les that allow you to parse traps and interpret the traps more easily. To launch the Trap Parser:
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Conguring Traps
259
Step 1
Action From the Trap/Log Manager menu bar, choose Tools > Trap Parser. Or, from the toolbar, click the Trap Parser icon. The Trap Parser dialog box appears.
Trap Parser
2 3 4
To create a new parser le, click New. In the Parser Name eld, enter a name for the new parser le. In the Match Criteria tab, in the Trap OID eld, click the ellipsis to browse for the MIB containing the trap OID. The Select OID dialog box appears.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
5 6
To load a MIB to the MIB tree, click Load MIB, browse to the MIB, and click OK. From the list of loaded MIBs, navigate to the desired MIB property. The associated OID appears in the OID eld.
Click Ok. In the Trap Parser dialog box, the OID appears in the Trap OID eld.
To specify variable binding criteria, in the Varbind Criteria pane, click Insert. A blank row appears in the Varbind Criteria list.
9 10
Specify the matching criteria and add additional rows as required. To specify agent and port criteria, in the Agents & Ports pane, click Insert. A blank row appears in the Agents & Ports list.
11 12
Specify the agent and port values. To congure the details of the event, click the Event Details tab. The Event Details tab appears.
13
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Conguring Traps
261
14
Click Apply. The new trap parser appears in the Trap Parsers list.
Trap Parser dialog box elds Section/tab Parser Name Match Criteria Trap OID Item Description Specifies the name for the parser file. In the OID section, you can specify the OID value to match. The trap PDU must match the OID to conform to this criterion. Specifies the variable-binding criteria: Parameter : OID send as a varbind within the trap PDU Operator : Any relational operator to be selected from the pull-down menu Value : The value associated with the OID send as a parameter Condition : Any logical operator to be selected from the pull-down menu. If nothing is specified, the AND operation is carried out by default. Agents & Ports The traps sent by an agent are parsed if the specified values in the Agent and Port text fields match the incoming port. If the value in the Port field is 0, then all traps sent by the agent are listed. Specifies the color associated with the severity of the event. Provides a description of the event that is associated with the matched criteria. Specifies the severity of the event. Specifies the message that is displayed with the event.
Varbind Criteria
Event Details
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Step 1
Action From the Trap/Log Manager menu bar, choose Tools > Select Trap Parser. The Select Parsers dialog box appears.
Select Parsers dialog box
2 3 4
In the row containing the desired trap parser, select the Associate check box. Click OK. Click Close. Trap/Log Manager uses the selected trap parser to parse traps. End
Conguring Traps
263
In the Agents & Ports eld, enter the address of the switch or switches to monitor and the associated ports from which they forward traps (for example Agent:134.177.214.10 and Port:162). In the Event Details tab, assign the event details as desired. Click Apply. In the Parser Name eld, enter another name, this time for the link down parser (for example, linkDown). In the Trap OID eld, enter 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 for the linkDown trap. In the Agents & Ports eld, enter the addresses of the switch or switches to monitor and the associated ports from which they forward traps (for example Agent:134.177.214.10 and Port:162). In the Event Details tab, assign the event details as required. From the Trap/Log Manager menu bar, choose Tools > Select Trap Parser. Select the LinkUp and LinkDown trap parsers. Click Ok. From the topology manager menu bar, choose Edit->Trap Preferences->Filters. Click Insert. In the Filters list, in the blank row, enter a name for the linkUp/linkDown lter (for example, linkUplinkDown). Click the Filter Components button. In the Filter Components pane, click Insert. In the Filter Components list, in the blank row, complete the elds as follows Parameter = Node Operator = Equals Value = switch IP address (in this example=134.177.214.10) Condition = AND (for multiple devices, Condition = OR and you must add additional rows to specify the other device IP addresses).
5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
Click Apply.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Click OK. From the ESM menu bar, choose Edit > Trap Preferences > Email notications. Click Insert. In the blank row, enter the recipients e-mail for the notication and provide a description of the event. Double-click the Filters column, and choose the linkUPlinkDown lter. Click OK. Click Save. Link up and Link down events on the monitored device now trigger a notication e-mail to the recipient. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
265
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
267
"Parts of the Security Manager window" (page 267) describes the parts of the Security Manager window.
Parts of the Security Manager window Part Menu bar Description Provides access to all Security Manager commands. For more information, see "Menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 267). Provides quick access to commonly used Security Manager commands. For more information, see "Menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 267). Allows you to navigate security settings for the current network devices. For more information, see "Navigation pane" (page 269). Displays elements of the folder or element selected on the navigation pane. For more information, see "Content pane" (page 269).
Toolbar
Ctrl+P
Close
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Menu Edit
Toolbar button
Copy
Ctrl+C
Paste
Ctrl+V
Insert
Ctrl+I
Insert Wizard
Ctrl+W
Opens the wizard for inserting an SNMPv3 user-related configuration. Deletes the selected folder or element.
Delete
Ctrl+D
Modify
Ctrl+M
Apply Changes
Find
Ctrl+F
View
Highlight Topology
Highlights devices on the current Enterprise Switch Manager topology view. For more information, see "Highlighting devices on the topology map" (page 277).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
269
Menu Help
Command Using
Toolbar button
Shortcut key F1
Online Support
Opens a Web browser and loads the Nortel Customer Support Web page. Displays version and date information for Security Manager.
Navigation pane
The Security Manager navigation pane displays a hierarchical folder tree that you can use to navigate security groups. "Security Manager navigation pane" (page 269) shows the navigation pane of the Security Manager window.
Security Manager navigation pane
Contents pane
The contents pane shows you the contents of the selected element in the navigation pane.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Security Manager content pane" (page 270) shows the Security Manager contents pane.
Security Manager contents pane
271
Or, from the Security Manager menu bar, choose File > Reload. An alert box appears to ask how you want to continue ("Security Manager reload dialog box" (page 271)).
Security Manager reload dialog box
Do one of the following: Click Reload with discovery of topology to rediscover network topology and reload the Enterprise Switch Manager topology map and all of the submanagers. Click Reload Security Manager only to just reload Security Manager. Enterprise Switch Manager polls devices for security settings and features, but does not perform a full network topology discovery. Click Cancel to abandon the reload operation. Note: Reloading just Security Manager takes less time than reloading with topology discovery. However, if there are any changes in network topology, discrepancies between the information in Security Manager and the information on the topology map may result. Such discrepancies might cause incorrect operation when you perform operations (such as highlighting the network map) that involve interactions between the submanagers and the topology map. If you observe such incorrect operation, reload the network map. For more information, see "Rediscovering the network map" (page 74). Enterprise Switch Manager reloads topology information from the network devices, and refreshes the Security Manager window with it. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
273
In the device list, choose the devices that you want to include in the new security group. You can use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple devices. Click OK. Security Manager creates a new security group containing the selected devices. Note: After creating a security group, you must set the RWA community for the group before you can use the security group. For more information, see "Setting security group properties" (page 273). End
"Parts of the New Group dialog box" (page 273) describes the parts of the New Group dialog box.
Parts of the New Group dialog box Part Group Name Device list Clear All OK Close Description Allows you to enter a name for the new security group. Displays a list of devices that you can add to the new security group. Use Ctrl+click and Shift+click to select multiple devices Deselects all the devices on the device list. Creates the new security group and adds the devices as members. Closes the dialog box without applying your settings.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Do one of the following: In the RWA Community box, enter the SNMP read/write/all community string for the security group. The RWA community for the group must match the RWA community currently congured on the devices in the group. In the SNMPv3 section, enter the SNMPv3 properties for the security group. The SNMPv3 user name and passwords must match the user names and passwords currently congured on the devices in the group. Note: The SNMP properties do not take effect until you click Apply Changes on the Enterprise Switch Manager toolbar. For more information, see "Managing security group attributes" (page 277).
Use the SNMPv3 dialog box to congure SNMPv3 properties for a security group. For more information, see "Adding RADIUS servers" (page 281).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
275
"Parts of the SNMPv3 dialog box" (page 275) describes the parts of the SNMPv3 dialog box.
Parts of the SNMPv3 dialog box Part User Name Authentication Protocol Authentication Password Privacy Protocol Privacy Password Description Indicates the name of the user in usmUser. Identifies the Authentication protocol used. A password that is used for authentication purposes. If no value is entered, assume the entry has no authentication capability. Identifies the privacy protocol used. A password that is used for privacy purposes. If no value is entered, assume the entry has no privacy capability. Note: Privacy has to be set with authentication.
276 Using Security Manager Security Manager New Member dialog box
In the device list, choose the devices that you want to add to the security group. You can use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple devices. Click OK. Security Manager adds the selected devices to the security group. End
Use the New Member dialog box to add new members to existing security groups. For more information, see "Adding devices to a security group" (page 275). "Parts of the New Member dialog box" (page 276) describes the parts of the New Member dialog box.
Parts of the New Member dialog box Part Group Name Device list OK Close Description Displays the name of the security group to which the members will be added. Displays a list of devices that you can add to the security group. Use Ctrl+click and Shift+click to select multiple devices Adds the devices to the security group and closes the dialog box. Closes the dialog box without applying your settings.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
277
Step 1 2 3
Action In the navigation pane, open the folder for the security group from which you want to remove devices. In the security group folder, click the device you want to remove from the group. On the Toolbar, click Delete (the X symbol). Or, from the menu bar, choose Edit > Delete. End
"Conguring SNMP access" (page 279) "Conguring Web access" (page 280) "Adding RADIUS servers" (page 281) "Removing RADIUS servers" (page 284) "Setting global RADIUS server parameters" (page 285) "Conguring SNMPv3 access" (page 285) "Managing access policies with Security Manager" (page 318) "Managing SSH security groups and bulk passwords" (page 324)
279
Part RWL3UserName RWL3Password RWL2UserName RWL2Password RWL1UserName RWL1Password ROUserName ROPassword MaxTelnet Sessions MaxRlogin Sessions Timeout
Description User name for the Layer 3 read/write CLI account. Password for the Layer 3 read/write CLI account. User name for the Layer 2 read/write CLI account. Password for the Layer 2 read/write CLI account. User name for the Layer 1 read/write CLI account. Password for the Layer 1 read/write CLI account. User name for the read-only CLI account. Password for the read-only CLI account. Maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions that are allowed (from none to 8). Maximum number of concurrent Rlogin sessions that are allowed (from none to 8). Number of seconds of inactivity for a Telnet or Rlogin session before automatic timeout and disconnect (30 to 65535 seconds).
The CLI tab also lets you specify the number of allowed Telnet sessions and remote login (rlogin) sessions. To prohibit Telnet or rlogin access to the devices, specify zero (0) as the number of allowed sessions. Ports are in the forwarding and blocking states.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
281
2 3
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Note: The default values for the Radius port (UdpPort) and the Radius accounting port (AccUdpPort) are 1812 and 1813, respectively. Many legacy servers use default ports 1645 and 1646, respectively. You must ensure that the ports specied in this table match the ports on which your Radius servers are listening. 4 5 Set the dialog box parameters as appropriate. Click OK. Security Manager creates a new entry on the "Radius Servers tab" (page 283). 6 On the Security Manager toolbar, click Apply Changes. Or, from the menu bar, choose Edit > Apply Changes. Security Manager applies your changes to the devices in the security group. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
283
Enable MaxRetries UdpPort SecretKey AccEnable AccUdpPort rcRadiusServ UsedBy rcRadiusServ SourceIpAddr
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Part TimeOut
Description Allows you to enter the number of seconds, between 1 and 10, that you require between retransmissions from the client to the RADIUS server. Allows you to enable the RADIUS server. Allows you to enter the maximum number of retries, between 1 and 6, that you require to allow requests to the server. Allows you to enter the UDP port number, between 1 and 65536, that the client will use to send requests to the server. Note: The UDP port value set for the client must be the same as the value set for the Radius server.
Allows you to enter the secret key of the authentication client. Allows you to enable accounting on this RADIUS server. Allows you to enter the UDP port number of the RADIUS accounting server.
2 3 4
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
285
2 3 4
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Step 1 2 3 4
Action Under the SNMPv3 folder in the navigation pane, click the folder for the security group for which you want to congure SNMPv3 access. In the contents pane, click the SNMP Access tab. On the SNMP Access tab, edit the SNMP community strings. On the Security Manager toolbar, click Apply Changes. Or, from the menu bar, choose Edit > Apply Changes. Security Manager applies your changes to the devices in the security group. End
To perform additional SNMPv3 congurations, see the following: "Conguring USM Access" (page 286) "Conguring VACM Group Members" (page 289) "Displaying VACM Group Access" (page 291) "Displaying VACM MIB View" (page 294) "Displaying the Community Table" (page 297) "Displaying the Target Table" (page 300) "Displaying the Target Params Table" (page 303) "Displaying the Notify Table" (page 306) "Displaying the Notify Filter Prole Table" (page 309) "Displaying the Notify Filter Table" (page 311) "Conguring SNMPv3 users with the Insert Wizard" (page 313)
287
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
3 4
In the New USM User dialog box, edit the USM user names and passwords. To apply the changes to multiple devices in the group, choose the devices for which you want to apply the changes in the Multiple Devices Insertion list. You can use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple devices. Click Ok. On the Security Manager toolbar, click Apply Changes. Or, from the menu bar, choose Edit > Apply Changes. Security Manager applies your changes to the selected devices in the security group. Security Manager applies your changes to the devices in the security group. End
5 6
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
289
Cloned Users Auth Password New Users Auth Password Priv Protocol (Optional)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
2 3
In the security group folder, click the desired device. In the contents pane, click the VACM Group Members tab. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
291
3 4
In the VACM Group Member box, edit the VACM Group Member properties. To apply the changes to multiple devices in the group, choose the devices for which you want to apply the changes in the Multiple Devices Insertion list. You can use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple devices. Click OK. On the Security Manager toolbar, click Apply Changes. Or, from the menu bar, choose Edit > Apply Changes. Security Manager applies your changes to the selected devices in the security group. End
5 6
End
SecurityModel SecurityLevel
Specifies the MIB view to which read access is authorized. Specifies the MIB view to which write access is authorized. Specifies the MIB view name to which notification access is authorized.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
293
Step 1 2
Action In the contents pane, click the VACM Group Access tab to bring it to the front. On the Toolbar, click Insert (the plus sign). The VACM Group Access dialog box appears("VACM Group Access dialog box" (page 293)).
VACM Group Access dialog box
3 4
In the VACM Group Access dialog box, edit the VACM Group Access properties. To apply the changes to multiple devices in the group, choose the devices for which you want to apply the changes in the Multiple Devices Insertion list. You can use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple devices. Click OK. On the Security Manager toolbar, click Apply Changes. Or, from the menu bar, choose Edit > Apply Changes. Security Manager applies your changes to the selected devices in the security group. End
5 6
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
SecurityModel SecurityLevel
Specifies the MIB view to which read access is authorized. Specifies the MIB view to which write access is authorized. Specifies the MIB view name to which notification access is authorized.
295
2 3
In the security group folder, click the desired device. In the contents pane, click the VACM MIB View tab. End
Mask
Type
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
3 4
In the VACM MIB View dialog box, edit the VACM MIB View properties. To apply the changes to multiple devices in the group, choose the devices for which you want to apply the changes in the Multiple Devices Insertion list. You can use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple devices. Click OK. On the Security Manager toolbar, click Apply Changes. Or, from the menu bar, choose Edit > Apply Changes. Security Manager applies your changes to the selected devices in the security group. End
5 6
297
Part Mask
Description Specifies that a bit mask be used with vacmViewTreeF amilySubtree to determine whether an OID falls under a view subtree. Determines whether access to a mib object is granted (Included) or denied (Excluded). Included is the default.
Type
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description The contextEngineID indicating the location of the context in which management information is accessed. The transport endpoints that are associated with the community string. The community string is only valid when found in an SNMPv1 (or SNMPv2c) message received from one of these transport endpoints, or when used in an SNMPv1 (or SNMPv2c) message to be sent to one of these transport endpoints. The value of this object identifies a set of entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable. If the value of this object has zero-length, transport endpoints are not checked when attempting to choose an entry in the snmpCommunityTable (that is, the community string is valid for use with any transport endpoint).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
299
3 4
In the Community Table dialog box, edit the Community Table properties. To apply the changes to multiple devices in the group, choose the devices for which you want to apply the changes in the Multiple Devices Insertion list. You can use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple devices. Click OK. On the Security Manager toolbar, click Apply Changes. Or, from the menu bar, choose Edit > Apply Changes. Security Manager applies your changes to the selected devices in the security group. End
5 6
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description The community string for which a row in this table represents a configuration. The security name assigned to this entry in the Community table. The range is 1 to 32 characters. The contextEngineID indicating the location of the context in which management information is accessed. The transport endpoints that are associated with the community string. The community string is only valid when found in an SNMPv1 (or SNMPv2c) message received from one of these transport endpoints, or when used in an SNMPv1 (or SNMPv2c) message to be sent to one of these transport endpoints. The value of this object identifies a set of entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable. If the value of this object has zero-length, transport endpoints are not checked when attempting to choose an entry in the snmpCommunityTable (that is, the community string is valid for use with any transport endpoint).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
301
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
3 4
In the Target Table dialog box, edit the Target Table properties. To apply the changes to multiple devices in the group, choose the devices for which you want to apply the changes in the Multiple Devices Insertion list. You can use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple devices. Click OK. On the Security Manager toolbar, click Apply Changes. Or, from the menu bar, choose Edit > Apply Changes. Security Manager applies your changes to the selected devices in the security group. End
5 6
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
303
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
305
3 4
In the Target Params Table dialog box, edit the Target Params Table properties. To apply the changes to multiple devices in the group, choose the devices for which you want to apply the changes in the Multiple Devices Insertion list. You can use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple devices. Click OK. On the Security Manager toolbar, click Apply Changes. Or, from the menu bar, choose Edit > Apply Changes. Security Manager applies your changes to the selected devices in the security group. End
5 6
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
307
trap inform
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
3 4
In the Notify Table dialog box, edit the Notify Table properties. To apply the changes to multiple devices in the group, choose the devices for which you want to apply the changes in the Multiple Devices Insertion list. You can use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple devices. Click OK. On the Security Manager toolbar, click Apply Changes. Or, from the menu bar, choose Edit > Apply Changes. Security Manager applies your changes to the selected devices in the security group. Security Manager applies your changes to the devices in the security group. End
5 6
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
309
Description The tag value used to select the entries in snmpTargetAddrTable. The type assigned to the community string name. Choices are:
trap inform
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
3 4
In the Notify Filter Prole Table dialog box, edit the Notify Filter Prole Table properties. To apply the changes to multiple devices in the group, choose the devices for which you want to apply the changes in the Multiple Devices Insertion list. You can use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple devices. Click OK. On the Security Manager toolbar, click Apply Changes. Or, from the menu bar, choose Edit > Apply Changes. Security Manager applies your changes to the selected devices in the security group. End
5 6
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
311
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Bit mask in combination with snmpNotifyFilterMask defines a family of subtrees. Indicates whether the family of filter subtrees defined by this entry are included or excluded from a filter. The valid options are included and excluded.
3 4
In the Notify Filter Table dialog box, edit the Notify Filter Table properties. To apply the changes to multiple devices in the group, choose the devices for which you want to apply the changes in the Multiple Devices Insertion list. You can use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple devices. Click OK. On the Security Manager toolbar, click Apply Changes.
5 6
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
313
Or, from the menu bar, choose Edit > Apply Changes. Security Manager applies your changes to the selected devices in the security group. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Click Insert. The New USM user dialog box appears("New USM user dialog box" (page 314)).
New USM user dialog box
Enter the USM user information as required, and click OK (see "Parts of the New USM user dialog box" (page 289) for more information). The new USM user appears in the User Wizard("SNMPv3 User Wizard with new user" (page 315)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
315
5 6
Select the new User, and click Next. The User Wizard prompts for MIB view information("MIB View information dialog box" (page 315)).
MIB View information dialog box
To add a new MIB View, click Insert. The VACM MIB View dialog box appears("Add MIB View dialog box" (page 316)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
8 9 10
Complete the elds as required, and click OK (see "Parts of the VACM MIB View tab" (page 295) for more information). Select the included or excluded Type button. Click Next. The User Wizard prompts for VACM Group Access information("VACM Group Access information dialog box" (page 316)).
VACM Group Access information dialog box
11
To add a new VACM Group, click Insert. The VACM Group Access dialog box appears("Add VACM Group dialog box" (page 317)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
317
12 13 14
Complete the elds as required (see "Parts of the VACM Group Access dialog box" (page 294) for more information). Click OK. Select a VACM Group Name, and click Next. The User Wizard displays an alert dialog box("VACM Group Member alert dialog box" (page 317)).
VACM Group Member alert dialog box
15
Click Continue. The User Wizard prompts for VACM Group Membership information("VACM Group Membership dialog box" (page 318)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
16
To Insert a Group Member, click Insert. The VACM Group Member dialog box appears("Add VACM Group Member dialog box" (page 318)).
Add VACM Group Member dialog box
17 18 19
Complete the elds as required (see "Parts of the VACM Group Member tab" (page 290) for more information). Click OK. Click Next. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
319
"Parts of the Access Policy Enable tab of the Attributes folder" (page 319) describes the parts of the Access Policy Enable tab.
Parts of the Access Policy Enable tab of the Attributes folder Part Enable Description Enables or disables access policies for the security group. The available settings are true and false.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Access Policy Table tab of the Attributes folder" (page 320) The following table describes the parts of the Access Policy Table tab.
Parts of the Access Policy Table tab of the Attributes folder Part Id Name Enable Description Identifies the entry in the table. Displays the name of the policy. Allows you to activate or deactivate the access policy. See "Enabling or disabling individual access policies" (page 320) for more information. Indicates whether a packet having a source IP address that matches this entry should be permitted to enter the device or denied access. Selects the protocol to which this entry should be applied. Indicates the precedence of the policy. The lower the number, the higher the precedence (1 to 128). Source network IP address. An address of 0.0.0.0 specifies any address on the network. Source network masks.
Mode
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
321
Description Trusted IP address of the host performing rlogin or rsh into the device. Applies only to rlogin and rsh.
User name assigned to the trusted host. Applies only to rlogin and rsh.
Note: You cannot use wildcard entries. The user must already be logged in with the user name to be assigned to the trusted host.
AccessLevel
2 3 4
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
5 6
Select appropriate access policy settings. Click OK. Security Manager creates a new entry on the Access Policy Table tab.
On the Security Manager toolbar, click Apply Changes. Or, from the menu bar, choose Edit > Apply Changes. Security Manager applies your changes to the devices in the security group. End
Use the New Access Policy dialog box to congure new access policies.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
323
"Parts of the New Access Policy dialog box" (page 323) describes the parts of the New Access Policy dialog box.
Parts of the New Access Policy dialog box Part Id Name PolicyEnable Mode Description ID of this policy. Name of this policy. Select to activate the access policy. Indicates whether a packet having a source IP address that matches this entry should be permitted to enter the device or denied access. Selects the protocol to which this entry should be applied. Indicates the precedence of the policy. The lower the number, the higher the precedence (1 to 128). Source network IP address. An address of 0.0.0.0 specifies any address on the network. Source network masks. Trusted IP address of the host performing rlogin or rsh into the device. Applies only to rlogin and rsh.
TrustedHost UserName
User name assigned to the trusted host. Applies only to rlogin and rsh.
Note: You cannot use wildcard entries. The user must already be logged in with the user name to be assigned to the trusted host.
Access level of the trusted host (readOnly, readWrite, or readWriteAll). Deselects all of the devices on the device list. Applies your settings and closes the dialog box Closes the dialog box without applying your settings
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Step 1
Action Under the Access Policy folder in the navigation pane, click the folder for the security group from which you want to delete an access policy. In the security group folder, click the desired device. In the contents pane, click the Access Policy Table tab. On the Access Policy Table tab, click any cell of the access policy that you want to delete. On the Toolbar, click Delete (the X symbol). Or, from the menu bar, choose Edit > Delete. Security Manager deletes the selected access policy.
2 3 4 5
On the Security Manager toolbar, click Apply Changes. Or, from the menu bar, choose Edit > Apply Changes. Security Manager applies your changes to the devices in the security group. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
325
3 4 5
In the Group Name eld, type a new group name. In the Device Family eld, choose the device family for which you would like to create an SSH security group. In the Select Target Devices device box, use the arrows to move the desired devices from the Available devices column to the Target devices in order column. You can use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple devices. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the devices in the order of your preference. Click OK. Security Manager creates a new SSH security group containing the selected devices.
6 7
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Note: After creating an SSH security group, you must set the RWA community for the group before you can use the SSH security group. For more information, see "Setting security group properties" (page 273). End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Managing SSH security groups and bulk passwords SSH New Member dialog box
327
In the device list, choose the devices that you want to add to the SSH security group. You can use Shift+click and Ctrl+click to select multiple devices. Click OK. Security Manager adds the selected devices to the SSH security group. End
Step 1 2
Action Under the SSH folder in the navigation pane, click the folder for the security group for which you want to congure SSH access. In the contents pane, click the Change Password tab. The Change Password tab appears("Change Password tab (ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch view)" (page 328)).
Change Password tab (ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch view)
Enter the current password for the devices in the RWA Password eld. (For ERS 8000 devices, you must also enter the current user name for the devices in the RWA Username eld.) Update the CLI and SNMP passwords as follows: To update the passwords for the CLI, choose the CLI tab. In the Password column, double-click a password cell to activate it, then enter the desired password. In the adjacent Conrm Password cell, enter the conrmed password. To update the SNMP passwords for ERS55xx/35xx or Ethernet Switch devices, choose the SNMP tab. In the Password column, double-click a password cell to activate it, then enter the desired password. In the adjacent Conrm Password cell, enter the conrmed password.
Initiate the password change: To initiate the password change immediately, click Change Password. The status bar shows the current status. After all devices have nished the password change, the status is displayed as Done.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
329
To initiate the password change at a later time, click Schedule, and complete the Schedule Password Change dialog box(see "Schedule Password Change dialog box" (page 329)). Note: Password change is applicable only to elds with data. Empty elds are not considered. All passwords are shown as asterisks (***), not plain text.
In the Name box, enter a name to assign to the task. The name distinguishes this task from other scheduled tasks for easy identication. Use the Schedule radio buttons to set a schedule for the task. When you choose One Time Only, Scheduler Server executes the task only once at the time you specify. When you choose Every Month on the __ Day, Scheduler Server executes the task every month on the day of the month and at the time you specify. When you choose Every Week on __, Scheduler Server executes the task every week on the day of the week and at the time you specify. When you choose Every __ Days, Scheduler Server executes the task at the interval and time you specify.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
When you choose Every Day, Scheduler Server executes the task every day at the time you specify.
8 9
In the Starting date/time boxes, set the date and time you want Scheduler Server to execute the task. Click Set. Scheduler Server schedules the task and executes it at the set time. To view the log le Scheduler Server creates when it executes this task, see "Viewing scheduled task log les" (page 403). End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
331
Step 1 2
Action Under the SSH folder in the navigation pane, click the folder for the security group for which you want to congure SSH properties. In the contents pane, click the SSH tab. The SSH tab appears("SSH tab for ERS 8000" (page 331)).
SSH tab for ERS 8000
End
"Parts of the SSH tab for ERS 8000" (page 331) describes the parts of the SSH tab.
Parts of the SSH tab for ERS 8000 Part Device Address Enable Description IP address for the device. Enable or disable SSH. Set to false to disable SSH services. Set to true to enable SSH services. Set to secure to enable SSH and disable insecure services SNMP, TFTP, and Telnet. The secure mode will take effect after reboot. Default is false. Set the SSH version. Set to both or v2only. Default is v2only. Sets the SSH connection port number. Default is 22. Sets the maximum number of SSH sessions allowed. The value can be from 0 to 8. Default is 4.
Set the SSH authentication connection timeout in seconds. Default is 60 seconds. Set the SSH key action. Enable or disable DSA authentication. Default is enabled. Enable or disable RSA authentication. Default is enabled.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Enable or disable password authentication. Default is enabled. DSA key size. Value can be from 512 to 1024. Default is 1024. RSA key size. Value can be from 512 to 1024. Default is 1024.
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
333
"Parts of the SSH device window for ERS 8000" (page 333) describes the parts of the SSH device screen.
Parts of the SSH device window for ERS 8000 Part Enable Description Enables, disables or securely enables SSH. Securely enable turns off other daemon flag, and it takes effect after reboot Indicates the SSH version Indicates the SSH connection port. Sets the maximum number of SSH sessions allowed. The value can be from 0 to 8. Default is 4. Indicates the SSH connection timeout in seconds. Indicates the SSH key action RSA key size. Value can be from 512 to 1024. Default is 1024. DSA key size. Value can be from 512 to 1024. Default is 1024. Enables or disables the SSH RSA authentication. Default is enabled. Enables or disables the SSH DSA authentication. Default is enabled. Enable or disable password authentication. Default is enabled.
Version Port MaxSession Timeout KeyAction RsaKeySize DsaKeySize RsaAuth DsaAuth PassAuth
Conguring SSH properties for ERS 55xx 35xx and Ethernet Switch security groups
To congure SSH properties for an ERS 55xx/35xx or Ethernet Switch security group: Step 1 2 Action Under the SSH folder in the navigation pane, click the folder for the security group for which you want to congure SSH properties. In the contents pane, click the SSH tab. The SSH tab appears("SSH tab for ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch" (page 334)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
334 Using Security Manager SSH tab for ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch
End
"Parts of the SSH tabfor ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch" (page 334) describes the parts of the SSH tab.
Parts of the SSH tabfor ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch Part Device Address Enable Description IP address for the device. Enable or disable SSH. Set to false to disable SSH services. Set to true to enable SSH services. Set to secure to enable SSH and disable insecure services SNMP, TFTP, and Telnet. The secure mode will take effect after reboot. Default is false. Set the SSH version. Set to both or v2only. Default is v2only. Sets the SSH connection port number. Default is 22. Set the SSH authentication connection timeout in seconds. Default is 60 seconds. Set the SSH key action. Enable or disable DSA authentication. Default is enabled. Enable or disable password authentication. Default is enabled.
Conguring SSH properties for ERS 55xx 35xx and Ethernet Switch devices
To congure SSH properties for ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch devices:
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
335
Step 1 2
Action Under the SSH folder in the navigation pane, click the folder containing the device for which you want to congure SSH properties. In the security group, click the desired device. The SSH device window appears("SSH device window for ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch" (page 335)).
SSH device window for ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch
End
"Parts of the SSH device window for ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch" (page 335) describes the parts of the SSH device screen.
Parts of the SSH device window for ERS 55xx/35xx and Ethernet Switch Part Enable Description Enables, disables or securely enables SSH. Securely enable turns off other daemon flag, and it takes effect after reboot Indicates the SSH version. Indicates the SSH connection port. Indicates the SSH connection timeout in seconds. Indicates the SSH key action
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Enables or disables the SSH DSA authentication Enables or disables the SSH password authentication Indicates the current status of the SSH DSA host key. Possible values are:
Indicates the current server IP address. Name of file for the TFTP transfer. The action for the TFTP transfer. Contains result of the last TFTP action request.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
337
2 3 4
Specify the log le to open (by default, this is sshPassword.log). Click Open. The Password Conguration log le appears. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
339
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Multiple devices Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
File types Configuration or history log Image or configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Image Configuration only Image, configuration, firmware image, or ASCII configuration file Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Image Configuration only Image, configuration, firmware image*, or ASCII configuration file* * Ethernet Switch 460/470, Ethernet Switch 425 3.0
Upload Download
Backup Archive Restore Synchronize Device upgrade Ethernet Switch Upload Download
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
341
File types Configuration only Image, configuration, firmware image*, or ASCII configuration file* * BPS 2000 2.0.5 and up, BayStack 380 3.0, BayStack 420 3.0
Backup Archive Restore Synchronize Device upgrade Alteon Upload Download Backup Archive Restore Synchronize Device upgrade OM 1000 Upload Download
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Image Configuration or dump file Image or configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Image Configuration only Image, configuration, firmware image, or ASCII configuration file Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Image
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
File types Configuration only ApplicationImage or Configuration or NN Data file Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Image
Note: The actual le upload and download operations are performed by a TFTP server. You can use either TFTP server software running on the Enterprise Switch Manager management station, or you can designate a separate machine as the TFTP server. The inventory management features of File Inventory Manager show you current information about the hardware and software discovered on your network: Device and chassis types Installed blades Serial and revision numbers Image and conguration le names and versions
This chapter describes using File Inventory Manager. It includes the following information: "Starting File Inventory Manager" (page 342) "The File Inventory Manager Window" (page 343) "Working with File Inventory Manager" (page 349) "Understanding the File Inventory Manager navigation tree" (page 407) "Understanding the File Inventory Manager interface" (page 457)
From the Enterprise Switch Manager menu bar, choose Tools > File Inventory Manager. On the keyboard, press F6. On the Enterprise Switch Manager toolbar, click File Inventory Manager.
An alert box appears, prompting you for inventory information("Query inventory alert box" (page 343)).
Query inventory alert box
Click Yes to query the discovered devices for inventory information, or click No to get inventory information from a previously saved inventory le. If you click No, File Inventory Manager prompts you for the location of the inventory le. Navigate to the le and click Open. The File Inventory Manager window appears. For more information about inventory les, see "Using inventory les" (page 350). End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the File Inventory Manager window" (page 344) describes the parts of the File Inventory Manager window.
Parts of the File Inventory Manager window Part Menu bar Description Provides access to all File Inventory Manager commands. For more information, see "Menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 344). Provides quick access to commonly used File Inventory Manager commands. For more information, see "Menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 344). Allows you to navigate File/Inventory elements for devices discovered on the network. For more information, see "Navigation pane" (page 348). Displays file and inventory information for the element selected on the navigation pane. For more information, see "Content pane" (page 348).
Toolbar
Navigation pane
Contents pane
Ctrl+S
Ctrl+O
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Menu
Toolbar button
Shortcut key
Description Allows you to save network inventory information in a tab-delimited text file. For more information, see "Saving inventory information in a tab delimited text file" (page 351)
Ctrl+P
Allows you to print either the current table or the current navigation tree. For more information, see "Printing inventory information" (page 407). Closes File Inventory Manager
Preferences
Identifies specific devices for Enterprise Switch Manager to configure and manage. See "Submanager preferences" (page 73) for more information. Ctrl+C Copies the current selection onto the clipboard.
Copy
Paste
Ctrl+V
Insert
Ctrl+I
Delete
Ctrl+D
Apply Changes
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Menu
Command Find
Toolbar button
Description Finds matching text strings in the navigation or contents panes. For more information, see "Finding elements in the inventory" (page 406). Highlights devices of the selected family on the Enterprise Switch Manager topology map. For more information, see "Highlighting devices on the topology map" (page 405) Allows you to select the information to be displayed in the Inventory view. For more information, see "Changing display preferences" (page 351). Allows you to open a File Inventory Manager log file. For more information, see "Viewing the File Inventory Manager log" (page 405). Allows you to download configuration and/or image files to devices. For more information, see "Downloading image and configuration files to devices" (page 354). Allows you to upload configuration and/or image files from devices. For more information, see "Uploading files from devices" (page 369). Allows you to create backup configuration files that can be restored to devices in the event of a network failure. For more information, see "Backing up configuration files" (page 379). Allows you to restore configuration files to devices from the backup subdirectory of the TFTP root directory. For
View
Highlight Topology
Actions
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Menu
Command
Toolbar button
Shortcut key
Description more information, see "Restoring configuration files to devices" (page 381).
Allows you to create and store archived configuration or boot.cfg files in the \ar subdirectory of the TFTP root directory. For more information, see "Archiving configuration files" (page 382). Allows you to upload a devices current configuration or boot.cfg file to the \curDep (currently deployed) subdirectory of the TFTP root directory. For more information, see "Synchronizing configuration files" (page 384). Allows you to upgrade devices by downloading an image file to the devices you specify. For more information, see "Upgrading devices" (page 385). Allows you to upgrade ERS 8000 devices using a wizard interface. For more information, see "Using Upgrade Wizard with ERS 8000 devices" (page 390). Allows you to edit configuration files with a text editor. For more information, see "Editing configuration files" (page 398). Allows you to schedule inventory queries for devices. For more information, see "Supported platforms and software releases" (page 21).
Device Upgrade
Edit File
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Menu Help
Command Using
Toolbar button
Shortcut key F1
Online Support
Opens a Web browser and loads the Nortel Customer Support Web page. Displays version and date information for File Inventory Manager.
Navigation pane
The File Inventory Manager navigation pane allows you to navigate File/Inventory elements for devices discovered on the network. To open a folder and view its elements, either click the plus sign (+) next to the folder, or double-click the folder itself. Click folder elements to view their contents in the contents pane. "Parts of the File/Inventory navigation pane" (page 348) shows the parts of the navigation pane.
Parts of the File/Inventory navigation pane
Contents pane
The contents pane shows you le and inventory information for the element selected on the navigation pane. In the contents pane, click the various tabs to view the le and inventory information about them. Use the horizontal scroll bar to view the full contents of tables that are wider than the contents pane. "Parts of the File/Inventory content pane" (page 349) shows the parts of the contents pane.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Working with File Inventory Manager Parts of the File/Inventory contents pane
349
The following sections describe the various operations that you can perform with inventory les: "Saving inventory information to a le" (page 350) "Saving inventory information in a tab delimited text le" (page 351) "Loading inventory information from a le" (page 352)
351
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Click the Expand Devices folder in Device Families tree check box if you want the Devices folders to appear in the Device Families tree view. Use the Device Family radio buttons to congure the view preferences for the device family selected in the Device Families tree view. Use the Hardware Category pull-down menu and Column Header list to choose the columns to show in the Hardware tables for each device family. Use the Software Category pull-down menu and Column Header list to choose the columns to show in the Software tables for each device family. Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog box. End
Working with File Inventory Manager File/Inventory Manager keep current data alert box
353
Do one of the following: Click Yes to add the data in the le to the currently loaded inventory data. However, any data in the le about devices in the current inventory will be discarded, and will not overwrite data in the current inventory. Click No to discard all of the currently loaded inventory data and then load the inventory data from the le.
File Inventory Manager loads the inventory information from the le. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
354 Using File Inventory Manager File/Inventory Manager reload dialog box
Do one of the following: Click Reload with discovery of topology to rediscover network topology and reload the Enterprise Switch Manager topology map and all of the submanagers. Click Reload File Inventory Manager only to just reload File Inventory Manager. Enterprise Switch Manager polls devices for le and inventory information, but does not perform a full network topology discovery. Click Cancel to abandon the reload operation. Note: Reloading just File Inventory Manager takes less time than reloading with topology discovery. However, any changes in network topology might result in discrepancies between the information in File Inventory Manager and the information on the topology map. Such discrepancies might cause incorrect operation when you perform operations (such as highlighting the network map) that involve interactions between the submanagers and the topology map. If you observe such incorrect operation, reload the network map. For more information, see "Rediscovering the network map" (page 74) . End
Enterprise Switch Manager reloads topology information from the network devices, and refreshes the File Inventory Manager window with it.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
355
For the following devices, use the procedure described in "Downloading image and conguration les to Ethernet Switch, ERS 55xx 35xx and Legacy BayStack devi" (page 357): Ethernet Switch Ethernet Routing Switch 55xx/35xx Legacy BayStack Business Policy Switch 2000 OPTera Metro 1200, 1400, and 1450 Ethernet Service Module
For Ethernet Routing Switch 1424, 1612, 1624, and 1648 devices, use the procedure described in "Find dialog box" (page 92). For Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 family devices, use the procedure described in "Downloading image, conguration, or NN Data les to ERS 8000 devices" (page 361). For WLAN AP family devices, use their procedure described in "Downloading image, conguration, or NN Data les to WLAN AP devices" (page 363). Note: File Inventory Manager does not support the upload or download of les to or from Passport 1000 series switches.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
4 5 6
Use the Action radio buttons to set whether you are downloading an image le (get-image) or a conguration le (get-conguration). Use the Image File Name or Conguration File Name boxes to enter the lename for the le you are downloading. If you are downloading an image le, use the Image1 or Image2 radio button to designate whether the downloaded image le will be used as image 1 or image 2 on the Alteon device. Use the Prex IP address for Source File radio buttons to set how the lename is interpreted: When you choose No, File Inventory Manager downloads the le with the selected lename. When you choose Yes, File Inventory Manager downloads les to the selected device according to the IP address appended to the lename. For example, suppose you have entered config.cfg as the lename, and selected the device 10.160.41.204. File Inventory Manager will download the le 10_160_41_204_cong.cfg to the device. The source directory for the download operation is determined by the settings of the TFTP server. Review the conguration settings of the TFTP server to determine the source directory.
In the Download Log le name box, choose the le to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the download operation. Or, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the text box to open a nd le dialog box that allows you to navigate to the le. You can use the log le later to view information about the download operation.
9 10
In the Available devices list, select the device(s) to which to download the selected conguration or image le. Click >> to move the selected device(s) to theTarget devices in order list. Or, click All >> to move all the available devices to the Target devices in order list. Use the << and << All buttons to move devices back to the Available devices list. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange target devices in the order in which you want Enterprise Switch Manager to download the le to them. Do one of the following: Click Download to download the le.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
11
12
357
Enterprise Switch Manager downloads the selected le to devices in the Target devices in order box in the order in which they appear. It also logs the results of the download operation to the selected log le. Click Schedule if you want the download operation to be performed at a specic time or on a regular basis. For information about scheduling tasks, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401).
A message that shows the results of the operation appears at the bottom of the dialog box("Results message on download dialog box" (page 357)). End
Downloading image and conguration les to Ethernet Switch, ERS 55xx 35xx and Legacy BayStack devices
Note: After downloading image or binary conguration les to Legacy BayStack and similar devices, the device resets. Your network may be temporarily disrupted while the device reboots. For each device, FIM waits for the device to nish the reboot before performing the download operation for the next device. If the current device did not reboot, FIM waits for 5 minutes and continues the download operation for the next device. Also, BayStack 410, 450 and 350 devices do not support downloading diagnostic les or ASCII conguration; you can only download image les to these devices. To download agent image or conguration les from a TFTP server to Legacy BayStack and similar network devices: Step 1 2 Action In the File Inventory Manager navigation pane, select the desired device family folder. From the menu bar, choose Actions > Download File to Device(s). The Download File to Device(s) dialog box appears. For more information, see "Download File to Devices dialog box" (page 457).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
In the TFTP Server box, enter the host name or IP address of the TFTP server for the download operation. If you have specied a default TFTP server in the Enterprise Switch Manager Preferences dialog box, that server will automatically appear in the TFTP Server box. For more information, see "Preferences dialog box" (page 66) .
Use the Action radio buttons to set whether you are downloading a conguration le (dnldCong), an image le (dnldImage), a rmware diagnostic le (dnldFw), or an ASCII conguration le (dnldAsciiCong). Use the CongFileName, ImageFileName, 450ImageFileName (mix stack), and FwFileName(Diag) boxes to enter the base lename for the le you are downloading. Use the Prex IP address for Source File radio buttons to set how the lename is interpreted: When you choose No, File Inventory Manager downloads the le with the selected lename. When you choose Yes, File Inventory Manager downloads les to the selected device according to the IP address appended to the lename. For example, suppose you have entered config.cfg as the lename, and selected the device 10.160.41.204. File Inventory Manager will download the le 10_160_41_204_cong.cfg to the device. The source directory for the download operation is determined by the settings of the TFTP server. Review the conguration settings of the TFTP server to determine the source directory.
In the Download Log le name box, choose the le to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the download operation. Or, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the text box to open a nd le dialog box that allows you to navigate to the le. You can use the log le later to view information about the download operation.
8 9
In the Available devices list, select one or more devices to which to download the selected conguration or image le. Click >> to move the selected device(s) to the Target devices in order list. Or, click All >> to move all the available devices to the Target devices in order list. Use the << and << All buttons to move devices back to the Available devices list.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
359
10
Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the target devices in the order in which you want Enterprise Switch Manager to download the le to them. Do one of the following: Click Download to download the le. Enterprise Switch Manager downloads the selected le to the devices in the Target devices in order list in the order in which they appear. It also logs the results of the download operation to the selected log le. Click Schedule if you want the download operation to be performed at a specic time or on a regular basis. For information about scheduling tasks, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401).
11
A message that shows the results of the operation appears at the bottom of the dialog box("Results message on download dialog box" (page 357)). End
5 6
Use the ImageFileName or CongFileName boxes to enter the lename for the le you are downloading. Use the Prex IP address for Source File radio buttons to set whether or not you are downloading the same le to all selected devices: When you choose No, File Inventory Manager downloads the selected le to all selected devices. When you choose Yes, File Inventory Manager downloads les to the selected devices according to the IP address appended to the lename. For example, suppose you have entered config.cfg as the lename, and selected the devices 10.160.41.229 and 10.160.41.204. File Inventory Manager will download the le 10_160_41_204_cong.cfg to 10.160.41.204, and download the le 10_160_41_229_cong.cfg to 10.160.41.229. The source directory for the download operation is determined by the settings of the TFTP server. Review the conguration settings of the TFTP server to determine the source directory.
In the Download Log le name box, choose the le to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the download operation. Or, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the text box to open a nd le dialog box that allows you to navigate to the le. You can use the log le later to view information about the download operation.
8 9
In the Available devices list, select one or more devices to which to download the selected le. Click >> to move the selected device(s) to the Target devices in order list. Or, click All >> to move all the available devices to the Target devices in order list. Use the << and << All buttons to move devices back to the Available devices list. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the target devices in the order in which you want Enterprise Switch Manager to download the le to them. Do one of the following: Click Download to download the le. Enterprise Switch Manager downloads the selected le to the devices in the Target devices in order list in the order in which
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
10
11
361
they appear. It also logs the results of the download operation to the selected log le. Click Schedule if you want the download operation to be performed at a specic time or on a regular basis. For information about scheduling tasks, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401).
A message that shows the results of the operation appears at the bottom of the dialog box("Results message on download dialog box" (page 357)). End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Use the Prex IP address for Source File radio buttons to set whether or not you are downloading the same le to all selected devices: When you choose No, File Inventory Manager downloads the selected le to all selected devices. When you choose Yes, File Inventory Manager downloads les to the selected devices according to the IP address appended to the lename. For example, suppose you have entered config.cfg as the lename, and selected the devices 10.160.41.229 and 10.160.41.204. File Inventory Manager will download the le 10_160_41_204_cong.cfg to 10.160.41.204, and download the le 10_160_41_229_cong.cfg to 10.160.41.229. The source directory for the download operation is determined by the settings of the TFTP server. Review the conguration settings of the TFTP server to determine the source directory.
In the Download Log le name box, choose the le to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the download operation. Or, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the text box to open a nd le dialog box that allows you to navigate to the le. You can use the log le later to view information about the download operation.
8 9
In the Available devices list, select one or more devices to which to download the selected le. Click >> to move the selected device(s) to the Target devices in order list. Or, click All >> to move all the available devices to the Target devices in order list. Use the << and << All buttons to move devices back to the Available devices list. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the target devices in the order in which you want Enterprise Switch Manager to download the le to them. Do one of the following: Click Download to download the le. Enterprise Switch Manager downloads the selected le to the devices in the Target devices in order list in the order in which they appear. It also logs the results of the download operation to the selected log le.
10
11
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
363
Click Schedule if you want the download operation to be performed at a specic time or on a regular basis. For information about scheduling tasks, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401).
A message that shows the results of the operation appears at the bottom of the dialog box("Results message on download dialog box" (page 357)). End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
If you are downloading a cong le, use the syscfg or syscfg_bak radio button to decide if the downloaded cong le will be used as syscfg or syscfg_bak on the WLAN AP device. Use the Prex IP address for Source File radio buttons to set how the lename is interpreted: When you choose No, File Inventory Manager downloads the le with the selected lename. When you choose Yes, File Inventory Manager downloads les to the selected device according to the IP address appended to the lename. For example, if you have entered config.cfg as the lename, and selected the device 10.160.41.204. File Inventory Manager will download the le 10_160_41_204_cong.cfg to the device. The source directory for the download operation is determined by the settings of the TFTP server. Review the conguration settings of the TFTP server to determine the source directory.
In the Download Log le name box, choose the le to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the download operation. Or, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the text box to open a nd le dialog box that allows you to navigate to the le. You can use the log le later to view information about the download operation.
10
Use the Reboot after successful download radio button to reboot the AP device after a successful download. The user needs to reboot the AP device in order for the newly downloaded ApplicationImage, CongFile, and NN DataFile to take effect. You can select NO if you do not want to reboot the AP device and reboot it at a later point of time. If download operations are not successful, even if you select YES to reboot the AP device, the reboot action will NOT be performed. In the Available devices list, select the device(s) to which you need to download the selected Conguration or ApplicationImage or NN Data le. Click >> to move the selected device(s) to the Target devices in order list. Or, click All >> to move all the available devices to the Target devices in order list. Use the << and << All buttons to move devices back to the Available devices list.
11
12
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
365
13
Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the target devices in the order in which you want the Enterprise Switch Manager to download the le. End
Do one of the following: Click Download , to download the le. Enterprise Switch Manager downloads the selected le to the device in the Target devices in the order dialog box in the order in which they appear. It also logs the results of the download operation to the selected log le. Click Schedule, if you want the download operation to be performed at a specic time or on a regular basis. For information about scheduling tasks, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401).
A message that shows the results of the operation appears at the bottom of the dialog box ("Results message on download dialog box" (page 357)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
A Comment line in a Switch Conguration le is either a blank line (white spaces only), or it is a line beginning with the pound symbol (#). A Command line in a Switch Conguration le is a non-comment line that ignores blank lines (with white spaces, blanks, tabs, and so on) and Divider lines. A Divider line is a Comment line that has a single pound symbol (#) comment indicator only. A Divide line is mainly used to improve readability. The Smart Diff tool scans comment lines or command lines while comparing conguration les. Smart Diff scans comment lines also as comment lines in Conguration les for the Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 series.This could mean hardware conguration. A Conguration le must contain the section that it supports, even if the section is empty. The section header, which is a comment line, identies each section with a section name in the le. Smart Diff compares Conguration les on the basis of different sections in les. During le comparison, Smart Diff locates and compares common sections across the les. For example, the CLI CONFIGURATION section in the rst le is compared to the CLI CONFIGURATION section of the second le. In the absence of common sections in the conguration le, Smart Diff treats the entire contents of the le as one big section and then compares it. In every section of the Conguration le, Smart Diff performs a line-by-line text comparison for each command line.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
367
"Results of text comparison" (page 367) displays the results of the text comparison and their description.
Results of text comparison Result Different line (D) Matched line (S) New line (N) Description Contents of the line have some different segments Contents of the line are exactly, the same Line is new in the section
Smart Diff inserts a line indicator into each line in the report. The format of a line in the report is [X, aaa, bbb], where X shows the comparison result. aaa denotes the line number in the rst le and bbb signies the line number in the second le, if it is a same or different line of data. If it is a new line, then aaa or bbb can be -. "Text comparison of the conguration les" (page 368) displays the screen after a text comparison of the conguration les. Note: The binary cong le from to Ethernet Switch, ERS 55xx/35xx, Legacy BayStack & WLAN AP family is not comparable.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
368 Using File Inventory Manager Text comparison of the conguration les
Complete the elds as described in "Compare Runtime Cong with Existing Cong dialog box elds" (page 369), and click Compare. Enterprise Switch Manager invokes Smart Diff to compare the running conguration with the saved conguration le. The output is similar to the Compare and Show Report produced using Smart Diff (see "Compare and Show Report" (page 367)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
369
The following table describes the elds in the Compare Runtime Cong With Existing Cong dialog box.
Compare Runtime Cong with Existing Cong dialog box elds Field TFTP Server TFTP Server Base Directory File Name For Runtime Config To Be Saved Existing Config File To Be Compared with Select Device Description The host name or IP address of the TFTP server for the compare operation. The base directory of the TFTP server. Click the ellipsis to browse. The name of the runtime configuration file that is saved for the compare operation. The existing configuration file to compare against the runtime configuration. Click the ellipsis to browse to the file. The selected device.
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
For Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 family devices, use the procedure described in "Uploading image and conguration les from ERS 8000 devices" (page 376). Note: File Inventory Manager does not support upload or download of les to or from Passport 1000 switches.
For WLAN AP devices, use the procedure described in "Uploading conguration les from WLAN AP Devices" (page 378)
371
For example, suppose you have entered config.cfg as the lename, and selected two devices, 10.160.41.204 and 10.160.41.229. The actual destination les will be named 10_160_41_204_cong.cfg and 10_160_41_229_cong.cfg. The destination directory for the upload operation is determined by the settings of the TFTP server. Review the conguration settings of the TFTP server to determine the destination directory.
In the Upload Log le name box, choose the le to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the download operation. Or, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the text box to open a nd le dialog box that allows you to navigate to the le. You can use the log le later to view information about the upload operation.
7 8
In the Available devices list, select one or more devices from which to upload the selected conguration or dump le. Click >> to move the selected device(s) to the Target devices in order list. Or, click All >> to move all the available devices to the Target devices in order list. Use the << and << All buttons to move devices back to the Available devices list. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the target devices in the order in which you want Enterprise Switch Manager to upload their les. Do one of the following: Click Upload to upload the le(s). File Inventory Manager opens an alert box to prompt you to conrm the upload operation ("Upload conrmation dialog box" (page 371)).Proceed to step 11.
Upload conrmation dialog box
10
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Click Schedule if you want the upload operation to be performed at a specic time or on a regular basis. For information about scheduling tasks, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401).
11
Click Yes to continue. Enterprise Switch Manager uploads the specied conguration or dump le from the devices in the Target devices in order list in the order in which they appear. It also logs the results of the upload operation to the selected log le. A message that shows the results of the operation appears at the bottom of the dialog box ("Results message on upload dialog box" (page 372)).
Results message on upload dialog box
End
Uploading conguration les from Ethernet Switch, ERS 55xx 35xx and Legacy BayStack devices
You can use File Inventory Manager to upload conguration les from Legacy BayStack and similar devices to a TFTP server. You can upload conguration les from more than one device at a time. When uploading conguration les, the actual upload operation is performed by a TFTP server. The destination directory for upload operations is determined by the settings of the TFTP server. To upload conguration les from Legacy BayStack or similar network devices to a TFTP server: Step 1 2 Action In the File Inventory Manager navigation pane, select the desired device family folder. From the menu bar, choose Actions > Upload File from Device(s). The Upload File from Devices dialog box appears. For more information, see "Upload File from Devices dialog box" (page 460). 3 In the TFTP Server box, enter the host name or IP address of the TFTP server for the upload operation.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
373
If you have specied a default TFTP server in the Enterprise Switch Manager Preferences dialog box, that server will automatically appear in the TFTP Server box. For more information, see "Preferences dialog box" (page 66). 4 Use the CongFileName box to enter the base lename for the conguration lename. Observe the following points regarding the conguration lename: During the upload operation, the IP address of the device(s) are appended to the base lename. This feature helps you upload conguration les from multiple devices without overwriting the destination les. For example, suppose you have entered config.cfg as the lename, and selected two devices, 10.160.41.204 and 10.160.41.229. The actual destination les will be named 10_160_41_204_cong.cfg and 10_160_41_229_cong.cfg. The destination directory for the upload operation is determined by the settings of the TFTP server. Review the conguration settings of the TFTP server to determine the destination directory.
In the Upload Log le name box, choose the le to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the download operation. Or, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the text box to open a nd le dialog box that allows you to navigate to the le. You can use the log le later to view information about the upload operation.
6 7
In the Available devices list, select one or more devices from which to upload the selected conguration le. Click >> to move the selected device(s) to the Target devices in order list. Or, click All >> to move all the available devices to the Target devices in order list. Use the << and << All buttons to move devices back to the Available devices list. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the target devices in the order in which you want Enterprise Switch Manager to upload the les. Do one of the following: Click Upload to upload the le(s). File Inventory Manager opens an alert box to prompt you to conrm the upload operation ("Upload conrmation dialog box" (page 371)). Proceed to step 10.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Click Schedule if you want the upload operation to be performed at a specic time or on a regular basis. For information about scheduling tasks, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401).
10
Click Yes to continue. Enterprise Switch Manager uploads the conguration le from the devices in the Target devices in order list in the order in which they appear. It also logs the results of the upload operation to the selected log le. A message that shows the results of the operation appears at the bottom of the dialog box ("Results message on upload dialog box" (page 372)). End
375
conguration les from multiple devices without overwriting the destination les. For example, suppose you have entered config.cfg as the lename, and selected two devices, 10.160.41.204 and 10.160.41.229. The actual destination les will be named 10_160_41_204_cong.cfg and 10_160_41_229_cong.cfg. The destination directory for the upload operation is determined by the settings of the TFTP server. Review the conguration settings of the TFTP server to determine the destination directory.
In the Upload Log le name box, choose the le to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the upload operation. Or, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the text box to open a nd le dialog box that allows you to navigate to the le. You can use the log le later to view information about the upload operation.
7 8
In the Available devices list, select one or more devices from which to upload the selected le. Click >> to move the selected device(s) to the Target devices in order list. Or, click All >> to move all the available devices to the Target devices in order list. Use the << and << All buttons to move devices back to the Available devices list. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the target devices in the order in which you want Enterprise Switch Manager to upload les. Do one of the following: Click Upload to upload the le(s). File Inventory Manager opens an alert box to prompt you to conrm the upload operation ("Upload conrmation dialog box" (page 371)).Proceed to step 11. Click Schedule if you want the upload operation to be performed at a specic time or on a regular basis. For information about scheduling tasks, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401).
10
11
Click Yes to continue. Enterprise Switch Manager uploads the specied le from the devices in the Target devices in order list in the order in which they appear. It also logs the results of the upload operation to the selected log le.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
A message that shows the results of the operation appears at the bottom of the dialog box ("Results message on upload dialog box" (page 372)). End
377
The destination directory for the upload operation is determined by the settings of the TFTP server. Review the conguration settings of the TFTP server to determine the destination directory.
In the Upload Log le name box, choose the le to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the upload operation. Or, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the text box to open a nd le dialog box that allows you to navigate to the le. You can use the log le later to view information about the upload operation.
7 8
In the Available devices list, select one or more devices from which to upload the selected le. Click >> to move the selected device(s) to the Target devices in order list. Or, click All >> to move all the available devices to the Target devices in order list. Use the << and << All buttons to move devices back to the Available devices list. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the target devices in the order in which you want Enterprise Switch Manager to upload their les. Do one of the following: Click Upload to upload the le(s). File Inventory Manager opens an alert box to prompt you to conrm the upload operation ("Upload conrmation dialog box" (page 371)). Proceed to step 11. Click Schedule if you want the upload operation to be performed at a specic time or on a regular basis. For information about scheduling tasks, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401).
10
11
Click Yes to continue. Enterprise Switch Manager uploads the specied le from the devices in the Target devices in order list in the order in which they appear. It also logs the results of the upload operation to the selected log le. A message that shows the results of the operation appears at the bottom of the dialog box ("Results message on upload dialog box" (page 372)). End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
In the Upload Log le name box, choose the le to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the download operation.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
379
Or, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the text box to open a nd le dialog box that allows you to navigate to the le. You can use the log le later to view information about the upload operation. 6 7 In the Available devices list, select one or more devices from which to upload the selected conguration le. Click >> to move the selected device(s) to the Target devices in order list. Or, click All >> to move all the available devices to the Target devices in order list. Use the << and << All buttons to move devices back to the Available devices list. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the target devices in the order in which you want Enterprise Switch Manager to upload the les. Do one of the following: Click Upload to upload the le(s). File Inventory Manager opens an alert box to prompt you to conrm the upload operation ("Upload conrmation dialog box" (page 371)).Proceed to step 10. Click Schedule if you want the upload operation to be performed at a specic time or on a regular basis. For information about scheduling tasks, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401).
10
Click Yes to continue. Enterprise Switch Manager uploads the conguration le from the devices in the Target devices in order list in the order in which they appear. It also logs the results of the upload operation to the selected log le. A message that shows the results of the operation appears at the bottom of the dialog box ("Results message on upload dialog box" (page 372)). End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Note: The backup le you create in this procedure will overwrite any le of the same name that exists in the \backup subdirectory of the TFTP root directory. To back up a conguration le from a device: Step 1 2 Action In the File/Inventory Manager navigation pane, select the device family folder. From the menu bar, choose Actions > Backup Cong File. The Backup Cong File dialog box appears. For more information, see "Backup Cong File dialog box" (page 463). 3 In the TFTP Server box, enter the host name or IP address of the TFTP server for the backup operation. If you have specied a default TFTP server in the Enterprise Switch Manager Preferences dialog box, that server will automatically appear in the TFTP Server box. For more information, see "Preferences dialog box" (page 66). 4 5 For Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 les, use the File radio buttons to select the type of le to back up (cong.cfg or boot.cfg). In the Backup log le name box, enter the name of the le to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the backup operation. Or, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the text box to open a nd le dialog box that allows you to navigate to the le. In the Available devices list, select one or more devices whose conguration le you want to back up. Click >> to move the selected device(s) to the Target devices in order list. Or, click All >> to move all the available devices to the Target devices in order list. Use the << and << All buttons to move devices back to the Available devices list. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the target devices in the order in which you want Enterprise Switch Manager to back them up. Do one of the following: Click Backup to back up the conguration le(s) immediately. File Inventory Manager opens an alert box to prompt you to conrm the backup operation. Proceed to step 10.
6 7
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
381
Click Schedule if you want the backup operation to be performed at a specic time or on a regular basis. For information about scheduling tasks, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401).
10
Click Yes to continue. Enterprise Switch Manager backs up the selected conguration le to the \backup subdirectory of the TFTP root directory. It backs up the devices in the order in which they appear in the Target devices in order list. It also logs the results of the backup operation to the selected backup log le. End
6 7
Click >> to move the selected device(s) to the Target devices in order list. Or, click All >> to move all the available devices to the Target devices in order list. Use the << and << All buttons to move devices back to the Available devices list. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the target devices in the order in which you want Enterprise Switch Manager to restore them. Do one of the following: Click Restore to restore the conguration le(s) immediately. File Inventory Manager opens an alert box to prompt you to conrm the restore operation. Proceed to step 10. Click Schedule if you want the restore operation to be performed at a specic time or on a regular basis. For information about scheduling tasks, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401).
10
11
Click Yes to continue. Enterprise Switch Manager restores the conguration le(s) to the devices in the order in which they appear in the Target devices in order list. It also logs the results of the restore operation to the selected restore log le. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
383
Step 1 2
Action In the File/Inventory Manager navigation pane, select the device family folder. From the menu bar, choose Actions > Archive Cong File. The Archive Cong File dialog box appears. For more information, see "Archive Cong File dialog box" (page 466).
In the TFTP Server box, enter the host name or IP address of the TFTP server for the archive operation. If you have specied a default TFTP server in the Enterprise Switch Manager Preferences dialog box, that server will automatically appear in the TFTP Server box. For more information, see "Preferences dialog box" (page 66).
4 5
For Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 les, use the File radio buttons to select the type of le to archive (cong.cfg or boot.cfg). In the Archive log le name box, enter the name of the le to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the archive operation. Or, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the text box to open a nd le dialog box that allows you to navigate to the le. To archive the conguration le only if it differs from the last saved le, select Archive Changed Cong Only and enter the TFTP server base directory in the TFTP Server Base Directory eld. In the Available devices list, select one or more devices whose conguration le you want to archive. Click >> to move the selected device(s) to the Target devices in order list. Or, click All >> to move all the available devices to the Target devices in order list. Use the << and << All buttons to move devices back to the Available devices list. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the target devices in the order in which you want Enterprise Switch Manager to archive them. Do one of the following: Click Archive to archive the le(s) immediately. File Inventory Manager opens an alert box to prompt you to conrm the archive operation. Proceed to step 10. Click Schedule if you want the archive operation to be performed at a specic time or on a regular basis. For information about scheduling tasks, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
7 8
10
11
Click Yes to continue. Enterprise Switch Manager archives the selected conguration le(s) to the \ar\YYMMDD\ subdirectory of the TFTP root directory. Enterprise Switch Manager archives the les in the order in which the devices appear in the Target devices in order list. It also logs the results of the archive operation to the selected archive log le. End
385
Click >> to move the selected device(s) to the Target devices in order list. Or, click All >> to move all the available devices to the Target devices in order list. Use the << and << All buttons to move devices back to the Available devices list. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the target devices in the order in which you want Enterprise Switch Manager to synchronize them. Do one of the following: Click Synchronize to upload the conguration le(s) immediately. File Inventory Manager opens an alert box to prompt you to conrm the synchronize operation. Proceed to step 10. Click Schedule if you want the synchronize operation to be performed at a specic time or on a regular basis. For information about scheduling tasks, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401).
10
Click Yes to continue. Enterprise Switch Manager uploads the selected conguration le(s) to the \curDep\ subdirectory of the TFTP root directory in the order in which the devices appear in the Target devices in order list and logs the results of the synchronize operation to the selected synchronize log le. End
Upgrading devices
File/Inventory Manager allows you to upgrade devices by downloading an image le to the devices you specify. You can specify the order in which Enterprise Switch Manager upgrades the devices, and the results of the upgrade operation are stored in a log le to which you can refer later. The procedure for upgrading devices differs slightly depending on the device family: For Alteon devices, use the procedure described in "Upgrading Alteon devices" (page 386). For Ethernet Switch, Ethernet Routing Switch 55xx/35xx, and Legacy Baystack devices, use the procedure described in "Upgrading Ethernet Switch, ERS 55xx 35xx and Legacy BayStack devices" (page 387). For Ethernet Routing Switch 8000, 1424, 1612, 1624, and 1648 devices, use the procedure described in "Upgrading ERS 8000 and 1424 16xx devices" (page 388). For Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 only, you can
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
also use the procedure described in "Using Upgrade Wizard with ERS 8000 devices" (page 390).
5 6
7 8
10
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
387
File/Inventory Manager opens an alert box to prompt you to conrm the upgrade operation. Proceed to step 11. Click Schedule if you want the upgrade operation to be performed at a specic time or on a regular basis. For information about scheduling tasks, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401).
11
Click Yes to continue. Enterprise Switch Manager upgrades the selected devices in the order in which they appear in the Target devices in order list and logs the results of the upgrade operation to the selected device upgrade log le. End
Upgrading Ethernet Switch, ERS 55xx 35xx and Legacy BayStack devices
Note: When upgrading Legacy BayStack and similar devices, the device resets after you download image les to the devices. Your network may be temporarily disrupted while the device reboots. If a device fails to resume running, File/Inventory Manager waits for 5 minutes and continue device upgrade operation for other devices listed in the "Target devices in order" list box. To upgrade one or more Legacy Baystack or similar devices: Step 1 2 Action In the File/Inventory Manager navigation pane, select the desired device family folder. From the menu bar, choose Actions > Device Upgrade. The Device Upgrade dialog box appears. For more information, see "Device Upgrade dialog box" (page 468). 3 In the TFTP Server box, enter the host name or IP address of the TFTP server for the upgrade operation. If you have specied a default TFTP server in the Enterprise Switch Manager Preferences dialog box, that server will automatically appear in the TFTP Server box. For more information, see "Preferences dialog box" (page 66). 4 In the Image File Name box, enter the name of the image le to download. Or, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the text box to open a nd le dialog box that allows you to navigate to the le.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
5 6
In the Image File Name (mix stack) box, enter the name of the image le to download in mixed stack congurations. In the Device Upgrade Log le name box, enter the name of the log le to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the upgrade operation. Or, click the ellipsis ( box) button to the right of the text box to open a nd le dialog box that allows you to navigate to the le. In the Available devices list, select one or more devices to upgrade. Click >> to move the selected device(s) to the Target devices in order list. Or, click All >> to move all the available devices to the Target devices in order list. Use the << and << All buttons to move devices back to the Available devices list. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the target devices in the order in which you want Enterprise Switch Manager to upgrade them. Do one of the following: Click Device Upgrade to upgrade the devices immediately. File/Inventory Manager opens an alert box to prompt you to conrm the upgrade operation. Proceed to step 11. Click Schedule if you want the upgrade operation to be performed at a specic time or on a regular basis. For information about scheduling tasks, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401).
7 8
10
11
Click Yes to continue. Enterprise Switch Manager upgrades the selected devices in the order in which they appear in the Target devices in order list. and logs the results of the upgrade operation to the selected device upgrade log le. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
389
Also, File/Inventory Manager waits until the download to one device is complete and that device is running again before it proceeds to the next device in the Target devices order list. If a device fails to resume running, File/Inventory Manager does not process the rest of the devices in the list. To upgrade one or more Ethernet Routing Switch 8000, 1424, 1612, 1624, and 1648 devices: Step 1 2 Action In the File/Inventory Manager navigation pane, select the Ethernet Routing Switch device family folder. From the menu bar, choose Actions > Device Upgrade. The Device Upgrade dialog box appears. For more information, see "Device Upgrade dialog box" (page 468). 3 In the TFTP Server box, enter the host name or IP address of the TFTP server for the upgrade operation. If you have specied a default TFTP server in the Enterprise Switch Manager Preferences dialog box, that server will automatically appear in the TFTP Server box. For more information, see "Preferences dialog box" (page 66). 4 In the Image File Name box, enter the name of the image le to download. Or, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the text box to open a nd le dialog box that allows you to navigate to the le. In the Device Upgrade Log le name box, enter the name of the log le to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the upgrade operation. Or, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the text box to open a nd le dialog box that allows you to navigate to the le. In the Available devices list, select one or more devices to upgrade. Click >> to move the selected device(s) to the Target devices in order list. Or, click All >> to move all the available devices to the Target devices in order list. Use the << and << All buttons to move devices back to the Available devices list. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the target devices in the order in which you want Enterprise Switch Manager to upgrade them. Do one of the following: Click Device Upgrade to upgrade the devices immediately.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
6 7
File/Inventory Manager opens an alert box to prompt you to conrm the upgrade operation. Proceed to step 10. Click Schedule if you want the upgrade operation to be performed at a specic time or on a regular basis. For information about scheduling tasks, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401).
10
Click Yes to continue. Enterprise Switch Manager upgrades the selected devices in the order in which they appear in the Target devices in order list and logs the results of the upgrade operation to the selected device upgrade log le. End
391
When performing the backup of cong.cfg and boot.cfg les to a TFTP server, the backup cong.cfg le name is saved as <device_ip_address>_c.c and the backup boot.cfg le name is saved as <device_ip_address>_b.c. For example, for a device with an IP address of 10.10.40.30, the backup cong.cfg le and backup boot.cfg le are uploaded as 10_10_40_30_c.c and 10_10_40_30_b.c, respectively. Note: If you choose to upload the backup le to TFTP, the newly uploaded le will overwrite any le of the same name that exists in the \backup subdirectory of the TFTP root directory. When you back up to ash, the les are not prexed with the device IP address. You should therefore provide different destination le names for the cong.cfg and boot.cfg backup les. By default the destination le names are ESM_AutoImageUpgrade_boot.cfg for boot.cfg and ESM_AutoImageUpgrade_cong.cfg for cong.cfg. If you do not specify a location for the backup operation, ESM automatically instructs the device to save a backup of the boot.cfg le in ash as ESM_AutoImageUpgrade_boot.cfg. This is because a workable boot.cfg le is required in case of malfunction during the booting process. Setting the primary runtime image and the boot image When you upgrade a device with the Upgrade Wizard, you must specify both the primary runtime image and the boot image for the process to complete successfully. The format for the boot le name is p83bxxxx.img for an ERS 8300 device and p80bxxxx.img for an ERS 8600 device (where xxxx is the version number). The format for the primary runtime image le name is p83axxxx.img for an ERS 8300 device and p80axxxx.img for an ERS 8600 device. Setting the loadable images for I/O module for ERS 8300 and R module for ERS 8600 With the ERS 8000 Upgrade Wizard you can specify the loadable images (.dld) for I/O modules (for Ethernet Routing Switch 8300) and R-modules (for Ethernet Routing Switch 8600, release 4.0.0.0 and above). To upgrade I/O modules and R-modules successfully, you must transfer the necessary loadable images to the local storage of the switch, either in ash memory or on the PCMCIA card, before the image upgrade. For the I/O modules and R-modules to function properly following the upgrade, the loadable image version must match the boot image version.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
The le name format for the 8300 loadable image is p83rxxxx.dld, where xxxx is the version number (for example, p83r2300.dld). The le name format for the 8600 loadable image is p80jxxxx.dld, (for example, p80j4000.dld). When you upgrade the loadable image, you can do so using two different methods. Specify the image in the Dld Image eld. If you specify the location of the loadable le in the Dld Image eld, the device uses the specied le to upgrade the module, and the lename is saved in the boot.cfg le. Leave the Dld Image eld blank It is not mandatory to specify the loadable image in the Dld Image eld. If you do not specify the location of the loadable le, the device uses the default loadable image: the switch searches in ash and PCMCIA for the .dld le that matches with the version of the boot image. For example, if an ERS 8300 switch uses p83b2300.img and p83a2300.img to boot, the device searches in ash and PCMCIA for the p83r2300.dld le, and uses that le for the upgrade. If you have previously specied a loadable lename during an upgrade, that lename is saved in the boot.cfg le. This instructs the device to use that particular lename during the next upgrade. However, to avoid any potential image version conicts, when no loadable image is specied, ESM removes the loadable lename reference from the boot.cfg le. As a result, the device still upgrades using the default loadable le that matches the new boot.cfg le.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
393
Click >> to move the selected device(s) to the Target devices in order list. Or, click All >> to move all the available devices to the Target devices in order list. Use the << and << All buttons to move devices back to the Available devices list. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the target devices in the order in which you want Enterprise Switch Manager to upgrade them. Click Next. The Cong Backup/Image Options dialog box appears ("Cong Backup/Image Options dialog box" (page 394)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
394 Using File Inventory Manager Cong Backup/Image Options dialog box
In the Cong Backup pane, specify the parameters for the backup operation: a. In the Conguration les eld, select the le types to back up (you can choose cong.cfg or boot.cfg, or both). b. In the BackUp les in eld, select the destination for the backup les (you can choose ash or TFTP Server or both). c. If you are uploading to TFTP, enter the host name or IP address of the TFTP server for the upload operation in the TFTP Server box. d. If you are backing up the boot.cfg le to ash, enter a lename for the backup boot.cfg le (by default, ESM_AutoImageUpgrade_boot.cfg) in the In FLASH Save Bootcong As box. e. If you are backing up the cong.cfg le to ash, enter a lename for the backup cong.cfg le (by default,
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
395
ESM_AutoImageUpgrade_cong.cfg) in the In FLASH Save Cong As box. Note: If you do not specify a location in the BackUp les in eld, when you click Apply, ESM automatically instructs the device to save a backup of the boot.cfg le in ash as ESM_AutoImageUpgrade_boot.cfg. This is because a workable boot.cfg le is required in case of malfunction during the booting process. 6 In the Image Options pane, enter a valid CLI read/write user name and password in the CLI UserName and CLI Password elds. Note: This CLI user name and password applies to all devices in the Image Options table. To update all listed devices at the same time, they must all have the same CLI user name and password. 7 For each device listed in the Image Options table, you must specify both the desired primary runtime image and the desired boot image as follows: a. In the Show Image Files in eld, choose the source location for the image le. If you choose TFTP Server as the image location, enter the host name or IP address of the TFTP server in the provided eld. b. In a device row, double-click the Boot Image, or Primary Image eld. A dialog box appears displaying the available images from the specied location. (If TFTP Server is selected, a Find File dialog box appears allowing you to browse to and select a le.) To display the available images from a different source location, close the dialog box and choose a different location from the Show images les in eld, then double-click the Boot Image or Primary Image eld again. c. Select the desired image from the list. d. Click Add. The selected image le is inserted into its respective column. Repeat these steps for the boot image and primary runtime image of each device in the list. If you make any mistakes when choosing the desired images, you can click Reset to set the Upgrade Wizard to the default view. 8 For each ERS 8300 device that houses an I/O module and each 8600 device that houses an R-module, you can specify the loadable image as follows (optional):
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Note: If an ERS 8600 device is not running release 4.0.0.0 software or above, the Dld Image column for the corresponding row is disabled. a. In the Show Image Files in eld, choose the source location for the loadable image le. (You cannot select the TFTP Server option with the loadable image, as the loadable image cannot reside on the TFTP server.) b. In a device row, double-click the Dld Image eld. A dialog box appears displaying the available .dld images from the specied location. To display the available images from a different source location, close the dialog box and choose a different location from the Show images les in eld, then double-click the Dld Image eld again. c. Select the desired image from the list. d. Click Add. The selected image le is inserted into its respective column. Note: If you do not specify the location of a required loadable image in the Dld Image eld, the device searches in ash and PCMCIA for the default loadable image version that matches the boot image version and uses this le for the upgrade. Repeat these steps for the loadable image of each device in the list. If you make any mistakes when choosing the desired images, you can click Reset to set the Upgrade Wizard to the default view. 9 Once you have specied all desired primary runtime images, boot images, loadable images, and backup parameters, click Apply. Note: If there is a version difference between the primary runtime image and the boot image, a warning message dialog appears before you can proceed. To properly upgrade images on a device, Nortel recommends that a device have the same version of boot and runtime images. ESM performs the following, one device at a time, according to the listed order of devices: backs up the conguration les on the device validates and sets the new primary runtime image and boot image validates and sets the new loadable image (if ERS 8300 I/O modules or ERS 8600 R-modules are present)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
397
This operation takes time to complete (approximately 3 minutes to complete for one switch). The logs for the image upgrades are generated in the le AutoImageUpgrade.log under the ESM home folder. End
6 7 8
Target devices in order list. Use the << and << All buttons to move devices back to the Available devices list. 9 Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the target devices in the order in which you want Enterprise Switch Manager to upgrade them. Do one of the following: Click Device Upgrade to upgrade the devices immediately. File/Inventory Manager opens an alert box to prompt you to conrm the upgrade operation. Proceed to step 10. Click Schedule if you want the upgrade operation to be performed at a specic time or on a regular basis. For information about scheduling tasks, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401).
10
11
Click Yes to continue. Enterprise Switch Manager upgrades the selected devices in the order in which they appear in the Target devices in order list and logs the results of the upgrade operation to the selected device upgrade log le. End
399
Step 1 2
Action From the File Inventory Manager menu bar, choose Actions > Edit File. An open le dialog box appears. Browse to the conguration le you want to edit, and click Open. File Inventory Manager opens the conguration le in a text editor: In Windows, the le appears in Wordpad by default. In UNIX, the le appears in vi by default. Note: To change the default text editor to use with conguration les, see "Conguring other system preferences" (page 69). End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
400 Using File Inventory Manager Device List for Query Inventory dialog box
In the Inventory File Name box, enter the name for the le to which Scheduler Server logs the results of the inventory query. Or, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the text box to open a nd le dialog box that allows you to navigate to the le. Select the IP address of the device(s) for which to perform the inventory query. Click Schedule. An alert box appears to prompt whether you are sure you want to schedule the task for the specied device.
3 4
In the Name box, enter a name to assign to the task. The name distinguishes this task from other scheduled tasks for easy identication. Use the Schedule radio buttons to set how often you want the task to run. When you choose One Time Only, Scheduler Server executes the task only once at the time you specify. When you choose Every Month on the __ Day, Scheduler Server executes the task every month on the day of the month and at the time you specify.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
401
When you choose Every Week on __, Scheduler Server executes the task every week on the day of the week and at the time you specify. When you choose Every __ Days, Scheduler Server executes the task at the interval and time you specify. When you choose Every Day, Scheduler Server executes the task every day at the time you specify.
8 9
In the Starting date/time boxes, set the date and time you want Scheduler Server to execute the task. Click Set. Scheduler Server schedules the task and will execute it at the set time. End
Scheduling tasks
You can schedule upload, download, backup, restore, archive, synchronize, and device upgrade operations to occur at a specic time, either once or on a recurring basis. The Scheduler server stores information about all scheduled tasks and runs in the background, letting Scheduler Server perform scheduled tasks even when Enterprise Switch Manager is not running. Scheduler Server maintains a list of all scheduled tasks, even after an operating system reboot. Note: In order to schedule tasks, Scheduler Server must be installed and running on your system. For information about installing Scheduler Server, see Installing Enterprise Switch Manager. To schedule a task: Step 1 Action Complete the upload, download, backup, restore, archive, synchronize, or device upgrade procedure steps for the specic device type until you reach the step in which you have the option of completing the procedure or clicking Schedule. Click Schedule. An alert box appears to prompt whether you want to schedule the task for that device. 3 Click Yes.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
The schedule dialog box for the procedure appears. For more information, see "Schedule dialog box" (page 471). "Upload File from Device(s) schedule dialog box" (page 402) shows the schedule dialog box for an upload procedure.
Upload File from Device(s) schedule dialog box
In the Name box, enter a name to assign to the task. The name distinguishes this task from other scheduled tasks for easy identication. Use the Schedule radio buttons to set how often you want the task to run. When you choose One Time Only, Scheduler Server executes the task only once at the time you specify. When you choose Every Month on the __ Day, Scheduler Server executes the task every month on the day of the month and at the time you specify. When you choose Every Week on __, Scheduler Server executes the task every week on the day of the week and at the time you specify. When you choose Every __ Days, Scheduler Server executes the task at the interval and time you specify. When you choose Every Day, Scheduler Server executes the task every day at the time you specify.
6 7
In the Starting date/time boxes, set the date and time you want Scheduler Server to execute the task. Click Set.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
403
Scheduler Server schedules the task and executes it at the set time. To view the log le Scheduler Server creates when it executes this task, "Viewing scheduled task log les" (page 403). End
The View Scheduled Task dialog box appears. For more information about the View Scheduled Task dialog box, see "View Scheduled Task dialog box" (page 473).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
404 Using File Inventory Manager View scheduled task dialog box
2 3 4
For more information about the View Scheduled Task dialog box, see "View Scheduled Task dialog box" (page 473). In the ID column, select the ID of the task whose log le you want to view. Click View Log. The Log File:(log le name) dialog box appears and displays the contents of the selected task log le. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
405
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
To view network inventory devices on the Enterprise Switch Manager topology map:
On the File Inventory Manager menu bar, choose View > Highlight Topology.
Enterprise Switch Manager highlights devices of the selected family or the individual device on the topology map. "Working with File Inventory Manager" (page 349)
Click either Table or Tree, depending on what you want to print. The operating system opens a Print dialog box.
Use the Print dialog box to select the printer and set printing parameters, and click OK. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Alteon folder
Use the Alteon folder to view information about Alteon hardware, software, and devices in the network inventory. "Parts of the Alteon folder" (page 410) describes the parts of the Alteon folder.
Parts of the Alteon folder Part "Alteon Hardware table" (page 410) "Alteon Software table" (page 411) "Alteon Devices folder" (page 412) Description Shows you information about Alteon hardware in the network inventory. Shows you information about Alteon software in the network inventory. Shows you information about specific Alteon devices and stacks in the network inventory.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Chassis tab
The Chassis tab of the Alteon Hardware table shows information about Alteon chassis. "Parts of the Chassis tab of the Alteon Hardware table" (page 411) describes the parts of the Chassis tab of the Alteon Hardware table.
Parts of the Chassis tab of the Alteon Hardware table Part No. Device PartNumber Revision Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the serial number for the device. Shows the current hardware revision of the chassis.
General tab
Use the General tab of the "Alteon Software table" (page 411) to view general information about the software currently running on an Alteon device. "Parts of the General tab of the Alteon Software folder" (page 411) describes the parts of the General tab.
Parts of the General tab of the Alteon Software folder Part No. Device Type Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the device type.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Shows the device system name (if any). Shows a description of the device, including hardware, firmware, and software version levels if available. Shows the location of the device. Shows the administrative contact for the device. Shows the elapsed time since last reset for the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Alteon Devices folder" (page 413) describes the tabs available for each device in the Alteon Devices folder.
Parts of the Alteon Devices folder Part "General tab" (page 411) "Image Config tab" (page 412) "Chassis tab" (page 411) Description Allows you to view general information about the software currently running on Alteon devices. Allows you to view information about the software image and configuration files for Alteon devices. Allows you to view information about Alteon device hardware.
General tab
Use the General tab of the "Alteon Devices folder" (page 412) to view general information about the selected Alteon device. "Parts of the General tab of the Alteon Devices folder" (page 413) describes the parts of the General tab.
Parts of the General tab of the Alteon Devices folder Part Type SysName Description Location Contact UpTime Description Shows the device type. Shows the device system name (if any). Shows a description of the device, including hardware, firmware, and software version levels if available. Shows the location of the device. Shows the administrative contact for the device. Shows the elapsed time since last reset for the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Shows the version number of image 2. Shows the image file that will be loaded the next time the card resets. Shows the configuration file that will be loaded the next time the card resets. Indicates that changes made to the configuration file need to be applied. Indicates that a save action is required because the configuration has been applied but has not been saved to the flash.
Chassis tab
"Parts of the Chassis tab of the Alteon Devices table" (page 414) describes the parts of the Chassis tab
Parts of the Chassis tab of the Alteon Devices table Part PartNumber Revision PowerSupply Status Description Shows the serial number of the device chassis. Shows the current hardware revision of the device chassis. Shows the status of the power supply to the device chassis.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Chassis tab
Use the Chassis tab of the ERS 1424/16xx Hardware table to view information about Ethernet Routing Switch 1424, 1612, 1624, and 1648 chassis. "Parts of the Chassis tab of the ERS 1424/16xx Hardware table" (page 415) describes the parts of the Chassis tab.
Parts of the Chassis tab of the ERS 1424/16xx Hardware table Part No. Device ModuleType HwRevision DeviceSerial Number Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name for the device. Shows the Ethernet Routing Switch module type. Shows the current hardware revision of the device chassis. Shows the serial number of the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the ERS 1424/16xx Software table" (page 416) describes the parts of the ERS 1424/16xx Software table.
Parts of the ERS 1424/16xx Software table Part "General tab" (page 421) Description Shows general information about software running on Ethernet Routing Switch 1424, 1612, 1624, and 1648 devices in the network inventory. Shows information about software configuration settings.
General tab
Use the General tab of the ERS 1424/16xx Software table to view general information about the software running on Ethernet Routing Switch 1424, 1612, 1624, and 1648 devices. "Parts of the General tab of the ERS 1424/16xx Software table" (page 416) describes the parts of the General tab.
Parts of the General tab of the ERS 1424/16xx Software table Part No. Device Type SysName Description Location Contact UpTime Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the type of the device. Shows the system name of the device. Shows a description of the device. Shows the location of the device. Shows the administrative contact for the device. Shows the elapsed time since the last restart of the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Note: The contents pane displays the tabs described in "Parts of the ERS 1424/16xx Devices folder" (page 417) , only when you select a device from the device folder.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Chassis tab
Use the Chassis tab of the "ERS 1424 16xx Devices folder" (page 417) to view information about Ethernet Routing Switch 1424, 1612, 1624, and 1648 chassis. "Parts of the Chassis tab of the ERS 1424/16xx Devices folder" (page 418) describes the parts of the Chassis tab.
Parts of the Chassis tab of the ERS 1424/16xx Devices folder Part ModuleType HwRevision DeviceSerialNumber Description The Ethernet Routing Switch module type. The current hardware revision of the device chassis. Serial number for the device.
General tab
Use the General tab of the "ERS 1424 16xx Devices folder" (page 417) to view general information about the selected Ethernet Routing Switch 1424, 1612, 1624, and 1648 device. "Parts of the General tab of the ERS 1424/16xx Devices folder" (page 418) describes the parts of the General tab.
Parts of the General tab of the ERS 1424/16xx Devices folder Part Type SysName Description Location Contact UpTime Description Shows the type of the device. Shows the system name of the device. Shows a description of the device. Shows the location of the device. Shows the administrative contact for the device. Shows the elapsed time since the last restart of the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Image/Cong tab of the ERS 1424/16xx Devices folder" (page 419) describes the parts of the Image/Cong tab.
Parts of the Image/Cong tab of the ERS 1424/16xx Devices folder Part PromFWVersion RuntimeSW Version FirmwareFile ConfigFName Description Shows the version number of the agent PROM firmware. Shows the version number of the runtime software. Shows the filename of the last image or firmware file downloaded to the device. Shows the filename of the last configuration file downloaded to or uploaded from the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the ERS 55xx/35xx Hardware table" (page 420) describes the parts of the ERS 55xx/35xx Hardware table.
Parts of the ERS 55xx/35xx Hardware table Part "Chassis tab" (page 420) Description Shows information about Ethernet Routing Switch 55xx and 35xx chassis.
Chassis tab
Use the Chassis tab of the "ERS 55xx 35xx folder" (page 419) to view information about Ethernet Routing Switch 55xx and 35xx chassis. "Parts of the Chassis tab of the ERS 55xx/35xx Hardware table" (page 420) describes the parts of the Chassis tab.
Parts of the Chassis tab of the ERS 55xx/35xx Hardware table Part No. Device ModuleType HwRevision DeviceSerial Number Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name for the device. Shows the Ethernet Routing Switch module type. Shows the current hardware revision of the device chassis. Shows the serial number of the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
General tab
Use the General tab of the "ERS 55xx 35xx Software table" (page 420) to view general information about the software running on Ethernet Routing Switch 55xx and 35xx devices. "Parts of the General tab of the ERS 55xx/35xx Software table" (page 421) describes the parts of the General tab.
Parts of the General tab of the ERS 55xx/35xx Software table Part No. Device Type SysName Description Location Contact UpTime Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the type of the device. Shows the system name of the device. Shows a description of the device. Shows the location of the device. Shows the administrative contact for the device. Shows the elapsed time since the last restart of the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Note: The contents pane displays the tabs described in "Parts of the ERS 55xx/35xx Devices folder" (page 422) , only when you select a device from the device folder.
Chassis tab
Use the Chassis tab of the "ERS 55xx 35xx Devices folder" (page 422) to view information about Ethernet Routing Switch 55xx and 35xx chassis. "Parts of the Chassis tab of the ERS 55xx/35xx Devices folder" (page 422) describes the parts of the Chassis tab.
Parts of the Chassis tab of the ERS 55xx/35xx Devices folder Part ModuleType HwRevision DeviceSerialNumber Description The Ethernet Routing Switch module type. The current hardware revision of the device chassis. Serial number for the device.
General tab
Use the General tab of the "ERS 55xx 35xx Devices folder" (page 422) to view general information about the selected Ethernet Routing Switch 55xx and 35xx device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the General tab of the ERS 55xx/35xx Devices folder" (page 423) describes the parts of the General tab.
Parts of the General tab of the ERS 55xx/35xx Devices folder Part Type SysName Description Location Contact UpTime Description Shows the type of the device. Shows the system name of the device. Shows a description of the device. Shows the location of the device. Shows the administrative contact for the device. Shows the elapsed time since the last restart of the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the ERS 8000 folder" (page 424) describes the parts of the ERS 8000 folder.
Parts of the ERS 8000 folder Part "ERS 8000 Hardware table" (page 424) "ERS 8000 Software table" (page 427) "ERS 8000 Devices folder" (page 430) Description Shows information about Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 device hardware in the network inventory. Shows information about software running on Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 devices in the network inventory. Shows information about each of the Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 devices discovered on the network.
Chassis tab
Use the Chassis tab of the "ERS 8000 Hardware table" (page 424) to view information about Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 family chassis. "Parts of the Chassis tab of the ERS 8000 Hardware table" (page 424) describes the parts of the Chassis tab.
Parts of the Chassis tab of the ERS 8000 Hardware table Part No. Device Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name for the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Part Type SerialNumber Hardware Revision NumSlots NumPorts BaseMacAddr HaCpu StandbyCpu
Description Shows the module type. Shows the serial number for the device. Shows the current hardware revision of the device chassis. Shows the number of slots (or cards) this device can contain. Shows the number of ports currently on this device. Shows the starting point of the block of MAC addresses used by the switch for logical and physical interfaces. Shows you the L2 redundancy on the master CPU is enabled or disabled. Shows you whether the L2 Redundancy is enabled on the standby CPU. The possible states are:
Card tab
Use the Card tab of the "ERS 8000 Hardware table" (page 424) to view information about cards installed in Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 series chassis. "Parts of the Card tab of the ERS 8000 Hardware table" (page 425) describes the parts of the Card tab.
Parts of the Card tab of the ERS 8000 Hardware table Part No. Device SlotNum FrontType Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the slot numbers of cards installed in the chassis. Indicates the card types in Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 Series devices. Front refers to the I/O portion of the module, the I/O card. Shows the model number of the module (for example, 8608GT). Shows the serial number of the I/O card.
FrontDescription FrontSerialNum
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Shows the hardware version of the I/O card. Shows the part number of the I/O card. Shows the manufacturing date code for the I/O card. Shows front deviations for the card. Shows the back type of the card. Possible values are:
Shows the back description for the card. Shows the back serial number for the card. Shows the back hardware version for the card. Shows the back part number for the card. Shows the back date code for the card. Shows the back deviations for the card.
MDA tab
Use the MDA tab of the "ERS 8000 Hardware table" (page 424) to view information about MDA installed in Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 family devices in the network inventory. "Parts of the MDA tab of the ERS 8000 Hardware table" (page 426) describes the parts of the MDA tab.
Parts of the MDA tab of the ERS 8000 Hardware table Part No. Description Shows the row number of the table entry.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Shows the IP address or host name of the device in which the MDA is installed. Shows the identity of the slot in which the MDA is installed. Shows the number of the MDA. Shows the type of the MDA. Shows the MDA description. Possible values include:
OC-3c SMF MDA--Dual port OC-3c SMF OC-3c MMF MDA--Dual port OC-3c MMF OC-12c SMF MDA -- Single Port OC-12c SMF OC-12c MMF MDA --Single Port OC-12c MMF
NumPorts
General tab
Use the General tab of the "ERS 8000 Software table" (page 427) to view general information about software running on Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 family devices on the network.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the General tab of the ERS 8000 Software table" (page 428) describes the parts of the General tab.
Parts of the General tab of the ERS 8000 Software table Part No. Device Type SysName Description Location Contact UpTime Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the type of the device. Shows the system name of the device. Shows a description of the device. Shows the location of the device. Shows the administrative contact for the device. Shows the elapsed time since the last restart of the device.
Software tab
Use the Software tab of the "ERS 8000 Software table" (page 427) to view information about the software running on cards installed in the Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 family chassis. The table on the tab will have one row for each CPU card in the chassis. "Parts of the Software tab of the ERS 8000 Software table" (page 428) describes the parts of the Software tab.
Parts of the Software tab of the ERS 8000 Software table Part No. Device Slot SwVersion LastRuntime ImageSource PrimaryImage Source Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the slot number of the card on which the software is running. Shows the version number of the software. Shows the name of the file from which the runtime image was loaded. Shows the name of the file from which the primary image was loaded.
Conguration tab
Use the Conguration tab of the "ERS 8000 Software table" (page 427) to view information about conguration les loaded on the device. The table on the tab will have one row for each CPU card in the chassis.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Conguration tab of the ERS 8000 Software table" (page 429) describes the parts of the Conguration tab.
Parts of the Conguration tab of the ERS 8000 Software table Part No. Device Slot LastBootConfig Source LastRuntime ConfigSource PrimaryConfig Source Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the slot number of the card on which the software is running. Shows the name and location of the file from which the last boot configuration was loaded. Shows the name and location of the file from which the last runtime configuration was loaded. Shows the name and location of the file from which the last primary configuration was loaded.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Shows the configuration file that will be loaded the next time the WSM card resets. Indicates that a save action is required because the configuration has been applied but has not been saved to the flash.
Chassis tab
Use the Chassis tab of the "ERS 8000 Devices folder" (page 430) to view information about the Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 device chassis.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Chassis tab of the ERS 8000 Devices folder" (page 431) describes the parts of the Chassis tab.
Parts of the Chassis tab of the ERS 8000 Devices folder Part Type SerialNumber Hardware Revision NumSlots NumPorts BaseMacAddr HaCpu StandbyCpu Description Shows the module type. Shows the serial number for the device. Shows the current hardware revision of the device chassis. Shows the number of slots (or cards) this device can contain. Shows the number of ports currently on this device. Shows the starting point of the block of MAC addresses used by the switch for logical and physical interfaces. Shows you whether the L2 redundancy on the master CPU is enabled or disabled. Shows you whether the L2 Redundancy is enabled on the standby CPU. The possible states are:
Card tab
Use the Card tab of the "ERS 8000 Devices folder" (page 430) to view information about cards installed in Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 series chassis. "Parts of the Card tab of the ERS 8000 Devices folder" (page 431) describes the parts of the Card tab.
Parts of the Card tab of the ERS 8000 Devices folder Part SlotNum FrontType Description Shows the slot numbers of cards installed in the chassis. Indicates the card types in Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 Series devices. Front refers to the I/O portion of the module, the I/O card. Shows the model number of the module (for example, 8608GT).
FrontDescription
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Shows the serial number of the I/O card. Shows the hardware version of the I/O card. Shows the part number of the I/O card. Shows the manufacturing date code for the I/O card. Shows front deviations for the card. Shows the back type of the card. Possible values are:
Shows the back description for the card. Shows the back serial number for the card. Shows the back hardware version for the card. Shows the back part number for the card. Shows the back date code for the card. Shows the back deviations for the card.
Mda tab
Use the Mda tab of the "ERS 8000 Devices folder" (page 430) to view information about MDA installed in Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 family devices in the network inventory.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Mda tab of the ERS 8000 Devices folder" (page 433) describes the parts of the Mda tab.
Parts of the Mda tab of the ERS 8000 Devices folder Part SlotNum MdaNum Type Description Description Shows the identity of the slot in which the MDA is installed. Shows the number of the MDA. Shows the type of the MDA. Shows the MDA description. Possible values include:
OC-3c SMF MDA--Dual port OC-3c SMF OC-3c MMF MDA--Dual port OC-3c MMF OC-12c SMF MDA -- Single Port OC-12c SMF OC-12c MMF MDA --Single Port OC-12c MMF
NumPorts
General tab
Use the General tab of the "ERS 8000 Devices folder" (page 430) to view general information about software running on Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 family devices on the network. "Parts of the General tab of the ERS 8000 Devices folder" (page 433) describes the parts of the General tab.
Parts of the General tab of the ERS 8000 Devices folder Part Type SysName Description Location Contact UpTime Description Shows the type of the device. Shows the system name of the device. Shows a description of the device. Shows the location of the device. Shows the administrative contact for the device. Shows the elapsed time since the last restart of the device.
Software tab
Use the Software tab of the "ERS 8000 Devices folder" (page 430) to view information about software running on cards installed in Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 family chassis. The table on the tab will have one row for each CPU card in the chassis.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Software tab of the ERS 8000 Devices folder" (page 434) describes the parts of the Software tab.
Parts of the Software tab of the ERS 8000 Devices folder Part Slot SwVersion LastRuntime ImageSource PrimaryImage Source Description Shows the slot number of the card on which the software is running. Shows the version number of the software. Shows the name of the file from which the runtime image was loaded. Shows the name of the file from which the primary image was loaded.
Conguration tab
Use the Conguration tab of the "ERS 8000 Devices folder" (page 430) to view information about conguration les loaded on the device. The table on the tab will have one row for each CPU card in the chassis. "Parts of the Conguration tab of the ERS 8000 Devices folder" (page 434) describes the parts of the Conguration tab.
Parts of the Conguration tab of the ERS 8000 Devices folder Part Slot LastBootConfig Source LastRuntime ConfigSource PrimaryConfig Source Description Shows the slot number of the card on which the software is running. Shows the name and location of the file from which the last boot configuration was loaded. Shows the name and location of the file from which the last runtime configuration was loaded. Shows the name and location of the file from which the last primary configuration was loaded.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the WSM Image tab of the ERS 8000 Devices folder" (page 435) describes the parts of the WSM Image tab.
Parts of the WSM Image tab of the ERS 8000 Devices folder Part No. Device SlotNum Software Version Enabled SwFeatures BootVer Image1Ver Image2Ver ImageForNxt Reset ConfigForNxt Reset SavePending Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the slot number of the card on which the software is running. Shows the software version of the WSM image. Shows the enabled features of the WSM image. Shows the boot version of the WSM image. Shows the version number of WSM image 1. Shows the version number of WSM image 2. Shows the image file that will be loaded the next time the WSM card resets. Shows the configuration file that will be loaded the next time the WSM card resets. Indicates that a save action is required because the configuration has been applied but has not been saved to the flash.
FlashFiles tab
Use the Flash Files tab of the "ERS 8000 Devices folder" (page 430) to view information about the les in the ash memory of the selected Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 device. "Parts of the Flash Files tab of the ERS 8000 Devices folder" (page 435) describes the parts of the Flash Files tab.
Parts of the Flash Files tab of the ERS 8000 Devices folder Part Slot Name Date Size Description Displays slot number of the card that contains the Flash files. Displays the name of the file Displays the date the file was written to the flash memory Displays the file size in bytes
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Stack tab
Use the Stack tab of the "Legacy BayStack Hardware table" (page 441) to view information about devices within Ethernet Switch stacks.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Stack tab of the Ethernet Switch Hardware table" (page 437) describes the parts of the Stack tab.
Parts of the Stack tab of the Ethernet Switch Hardware table Part No. Device Indx Descr Ver SerNum Location Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the unit number within the stack. Shows the description of the unit. Shows the hardware version of the unit. Shows the serial number of the unit. Shows the location of the unit.
MDA tab
Use the MDA tab of the "Legacy BayStack Hardware table" (page 441) to view information about media dependent adapters installed in Ethernet Switch and similar devices. "Parts of the MDA tab of the Ethernet Switch Hardware table" (page 437) describes the parts of the MDA tab.
Parts of the MDA tab of the Ethernet Switch Hardware table Part No. Device Indx Descr Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device in which the MDA is installed. Shows the number of the unit in which the MDA is installed. Shows a description of the MDA.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Ethernet Switch Software table" (page 438) describes the parts of the Ethernet Switch Software table.
Parts of the Ethernet Switch Software table Part "General tab" (page 443) "Image Config tab" (page 443) Description Allows you to view general information about the software currently running on Ethernet Switch and similar devices. Allows you to view information about the image and configuration files for Ethernet Switch and similar devices.
General tab
Use the General tab of the Ethernet Switch Software table to view general information about the software currently running on an Ethernet Switch. "Parts of the General tab of the Ethernet Switch Software table" (page 438) describes the parts of the General tab.
Parts of the General tab of the Ethernet Switch Software table Part No. Device Type SysName Description Location Contact UpTime Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the device type. Shows the device system name (if any). Shows a description of the device, including hardware, firmware, and software version levels if available. Shows the location of the device. Shows the administrative contact for the device. Shows the elapsed time since last reset for the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Shows the filename of the last image file downloaded to the device. Shows the filename of the last configuration file downloaded to or uploaded from the device.
Stack tab
"Parts of the Stack tab of the Ethernet Switch Devices folder" (page 439) describes the parts of the Stack tab.
Parts of the Stack tab of the Ethernet Switch Devices folder Part No. Device Indx Descr Ver SerNum Location Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the unit number within the stack. Shows a description of the unit. Shows hardware version of the unit. Shows the serial number of the unit. Shows the location of the unit.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
MDA tab
"Parts of the MDA tab of the Ethernet Switch Devices folder" (page 440) describes the parts of the MDA tab.
Parts of the MDA tab of the Ethernet Switch Devices folder Part No. Device Indx Descr Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device in which the MDA is installed. Shows the number of the unit in which the MDA is installed. Shows a description of the MDA.
General tab
Use the General tab of the Ethernet Switch Devices folder to view general information about the selected Ethernet Switch device. "Parts of the General tab of the Ethernet Switch Devices folder" (page 440) describes the parts of the General tab.
Parts of the General tab of the Ethernet Switch Devices folder Part Type SysName Description Location Contact UpTime Description Shows the type of the device. Shows the system name of the device. Shows a description of the device. Shows the location of the device. Shows the administrative contact for the device. Shows the elapsed time since the last restart of the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Stack tab
Use the Stack tab of the "Legacy BayStack Hardware table" (page 441) to view information about devices within Legacy BayStack stacks.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Stack tab of the Legacy BayStack Hardware table" (page 442) describes the parts of the Stack tab.
Parts of the Stack tab of the Legacy BayStack Hardware table Part No. Device Indx Descr Ver SerNum Location Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the unit number within the stack. Shows the description of the unit. Shows the hardware version of the unit. Shows the serial number of the unit. Shows the location of the unit.
MDA tab
Use the MDA tab of the "Legacy BayStack Hardware table" (page 441) to view information about media dependent adapters installed in Legacy BayStack and similar devices. "Parts of the MDA tab of the Legacy BayStack Hardware table" (page 442) describes the parts of the MDA tab.
Parts of the MDA tab of the Legacy BayStack Hardware table Part No. Device Indx Descr Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device in which the MDA is installed. Shows the number of the unit in which the MDA is installed. Shows a description of the MDA.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of The Legacy BayStack Software table" (page 443) describes the parts of the Legacy BayStack Software table.
Parts of The Legacy BayStack Software table Part "General tab" (page 443) "Image Config tab" (page 443) Description Allows you to view general information about the software currently running on Legacy BayStack and similar devices. Allows you to view information about the image and configuration files for Legacy BayStack and similar devices.
General tab
Use the General tab of the "Legacy BayStack Software table" (page 442) to view general information about the software currently running on a Legacy BayStack device. "Parts of the General tab of the Legacy BayStack Software table" (page 443) describes the parts of the General tab.
Parts of the General tab of the Legacy BayStack Software table Part No. Device Type SysName Description Location Contact UpTime Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the device type. Shows the device system name (if any). Shows a description of the device, including hardware, firmware, and software version levels if available. Shows the location of the device. Shows the administrative contact for the device. Shows the elapsed time since last reset for the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Image/Cong tab of the Legacy BayStack Software table" (page 444) describes the parts of the Image/Cong tab.
Parts of the Image/Cong tab of the Legacy BayStack Software table Part No. Device ImgFname CfgFname Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the filename of the last image file downloaded to the device. Shows the filename of the last configuration file downloaded to or uploaded from the device.
Stack tab
"Parts of the Stack tab of the Legacy BayStack Devices folder" (page 444) describes the parts of the Stack tab.
Parts of the Stack tab of the Legacy BayStack Devices folder Part No. Device Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Shows the unit number within the stack. Shows a description of the unit. Shows hardware version of the unit. Shows the serial number of the unit. Shows the location of the unit.
MDA tab
"Parts of the MDA tab of the Legacy BayStack Devices folder" (page 445) describes the parts of the MDA tab.
Parts of the MDA tab of the Legacy BayStack Devices folder Part No. Device Indx Descr Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device in which the MDA is installed. Shows the number of the unit in which the MDA is installed. Shows a description of the MDA.
General tab
Use the General tab of the "Legacy BayStack Devices folder" (page 444) to view general information about the selected Legacy BayStack device. "Parts of the General tab of the Legacy BayStack Devices folder" (page 445) describes the parts of the General tab.
Parts of the General tab of the Legacy BayStack Devices folder Part Type SysName Description Location Contact UpTime Description Shows the type of the device. Shows the system name of the device. Shows a description of the device. Shows the location of the device. Shows the administrative contact for the device. Shows the elapsed time since the last restart of the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Passport 1000 Hardware table" (page 447) describes the parts of the Passport 1000 Hardware table.
Parts of the Passport 1000 Hardware table Part "Chassis tab" (page 447) "Card tab" (page 447) Description Shows information about Passport (legacy) 1050, 1150, 1200, and 1250 chassis. Shows information about cards installed in Passport (legacy) 1050, 1150, 1200, and 1250 chassis.
Chassis tab
Use the Chassis tab of the "Passport 1000 Hardware table" (page 446) to view information about Passport (legacy) 1050, 1150, 1200, and 1250 chassis. "Parts of the Chassis tab of the Passport 1000 Hardware table" (page 447) describes the parts of the Chassis tab.
Parts of the Chassis tab of the Passport 1000 Hardware table Part No. Device Type SerialNumber Hardware Revision NumSlots NumPorts Description Shows the row number of the table entry. The IP address or host name for the device. The Passport module type. The serial number for the device. The current hardware revision of the device chassis. The number of slots (or cards) this device can contain. The number of ports currently on this device.
Card tab
Use the Card tab of the "Passport 1000 Hardware table" (page 446) to view information about cards installed in Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 series chassis. "Parts of the Card tab of the Passport 1000 Hardware table" (page 447) describes the parts of the Card tab.
Parts of the Card tab of the Passport 1000 Hardware table Part No. Device Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Shows the card type. Shows the serial number of the card. Hardware revision number of the card. Part number of the card. Shows the QuidVersion number for the card. Shows the AruVersion number for the card.
General tab
Use the General tab of the "Passport 1000 Software table" (page 448) to view general information about the software running on Passport (legacy) 1050, 1150, 1200, and 1250 devices. "Parts of the General tab of the Passport 1000 Software table" (page 448) describes the parts of the General tab.
Parts of the General tab of the Passport 1000 Software table Part No. Device Type SysName Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the type of the device. Shows the system name of the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Shows a description of the device. Shows the location of the device. Shows the administrative contact for the device. Shows the elapsed time since the last restart of the device.
Software tab
Use the Software tab of the "Passport 1000 Software table" (page 448) to view information about software running on the Passport (legacy) 1050, 1150, 1200, or 1250 device. "Parts of the Software tab of the Passport 1000 Software table" (page 449) describes the parts of the Software tab.
Parts of the Software tab of the Passport 1000 Software table Part No. Device SysVersion LastBoot Source PrimarySource PrimarySource FileName Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the version number of the software. Shows the last boot source. Shows the primary source. Shows the primary source filename.
Conguration tab
Use the Conguration tab of the "Passport 1000 Software table" (page 448) to view information about conguration les loaded on the device. "Parts of the Conguration tab of the Passport 1000 Software table" (page 449) describes the parts of the Conguration tab.
Parts of the Conguration tab of the Passport 1000 Software table Part No. Device ConfigSource ConfigSource FileName Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the source for the device configuration. Shows the filename for the configuration source.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Note: The contents pane displays the tabs described in "Parts of the Passport 1000 Devices folder" (page 450) only when you select a device from the device folder.
Chassis tab
Use the Chassis tab of the "Passport 1000 Devices folder" (page 450) to view information about Passport (legacy) 1050, 1150, 1200, and 1250 chassis. "Parts of the Chassis tab of the Passport 1000 Devices folder" (page 450) describes the parts of the Chassis tab.
Parts of the Chassis tab of the Passport 1000 Devices folder Part No. Device Type SerialNumber Description Shows the row number of the table entry. The IP address or host name for the device. The Passport module type. The serial number of the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description The current hardware revision of the device chassis. The number of slots (or cards) this device can contain. The number of ports currently on this device.
Card tab
Use the Card tab of the "Passport 1000 Devices folder" (page 450) to view information about cards installed in Passport (legacy) 1050, 1150, 1200, and 1250 chassis. "Parts of the Card tab of the Passport 1000 Devices folder" (page 451) describes the parts of the Card tab.
Parts of the Card tab of the Passport 1000 Devices folder Part No. Device Type SerialNum HardwareRevisio n PartNumber QuidVersion AruVersion Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name of the device. Shows the card type. Shows the serial number of the card. Hardware revision number of the card. Part number of the card. Shows the QuidVersion number for the card. Shows the AruVersion number for the card.
General tab
Use the General tab of the "Passport 1000 Devices folder" (page 450) to view general information about the selected Passport (legacy) 1050, 1150, 1200, and 1250 device. "Parts of the General tab of the Passport 1000 Devices folder" (page 451) describes the parts of the General tab.
Parts of the General tab of the Passport 1000 Devices folder Part Type SysName Description Location Description Shows the type of the device. Shows the system name of the device. Shows a description of the device. Shows the location of the device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Shows the administrative contact for the device. Shows the elapsed time since the last restart of the device.
Software tab
Use the Software tab of the "Passport 1000 Devices folder" (page 450) to view information about software running on the selected Passport (legacy) 1050, 1150, 1200, and 1250 device. "Parts of the Software tab of the Passport 1000 Devices folder" (page 452) describes the parts of the Software tab.
Parts of the Software tab of the Passport 1000 Devices folder Part SysVersion LastBoot Source PrimarySource PrimarySource FileName Description Shows the version number of the software. Shows the last boot source. Shows the primary source. Shows the primary source filename.
Conguration tab
Use the Conguration tab of the "Passport 1000 Devices folder" (page 450) to view information about conguration les loaded on the device. "Parts of the Conguration tab of the Passport 1000 Devices folder" (page 452) describes the parts of the Conguration tab.
Parts of the Conguration tab of the Passport 1000 Devices folder Part ConfigSource ConfigSource FileName Description Shows the source for the device configuration. Shows the filename for the configuration source.
FlashFiles tab
Use the FlashFiles tab of the "Passport 1000 Devices folder" (page 450) to view information about the les in the ash memory of the selected Passport (legacy) 1050, 1150, 1200, and 1250 device.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the FlashFiles tab of the Passport 1000 Devices folder" (page 453) describes the parts of the FlashFiles tab.
Parts of the FlashFiles tab of the Passport 1000 Devices folder Part No. Device Name Date FileDetail Type Description Shows the row number of the table entry. Shows the IP address or host name for the device. Shows the name of the file Shows the date the file was written to the flash memory Shows detailed information about the file Shows the file type. Recognized file types are:
Mode
compressed uncompressed
Shows the file size in bytes. Shows the CRC code for the file Shows the status of the file. Recognized statuses are:
active inactive
WLAN AP folder
Use the WLAN AP device to view information about WLAN AP hardware, software, and devices in the network inventory.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the WLAN AP folder" (page 454) describes the parts of the WLAN AP folder.
Parts of the WLAN AP folder Part "WLAN AP Device Hardware table" (page 454) "Unit tab" (page 454) Description Displays information about WLAN AP device hardware in the network inventory. Displays information about WLAN AP device software in the network inventory.
Unit tab
The Unit tab of the WLAN AP device Hardware table shows information about WLAN AP device unit "Parts of the Unit tab of the WLAN AP device Hardware table" (page 454) describes the parts of the WLAN AP device Unit table.
Parts of the Unit tab of the WLAN AP device Hardware table Part No. Device Hardware Ver Description Displays the row number of the table entry. Displays the IP address or host name of the device. Displays the current hardware version of the main board
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
General tab
Use the General tab of the WLAN AP device to view general information about the software currently running on an WLAN AP device. "Parts of the General tab of the WLAN AP device Software folder" (page 455) describes the parts of the General tab.
Parts of the General tab of the WLAN AP device Software folder Part No. Device Type SysName Description Location Contact UpTime Description Displays the row number of the table entry. Displays the IP address or host name of the device. Displays the device type. Displays the device system name (if any). Displays a description of the device, including hardware, and software version levels if available. Displays the location of the device. Displays the administrative contact for the device. Displays the elapsed time since last reset for the device.
Software tab
Use the Software tab of the WLAN AP device Software table to view software information for an WLAN AP device. "Parts of the Software tab of the WLAN AP device Software table" (page 455) describes the parts of the Software tab.
Parts of the Software tab of the WLAN AP device Software table Part No. Device BootRomVer OpCodeVer NNDataFileVer CountryCode Description Displays the row number of the table entry. Displays the IP address or host name of the device. Displays Boot ROM code version of the main board Displays Op Code version Displays Nortel Networks Customization Data File Version Displays Country code of the AP device
"Parts of the WLAN AP device folder" (page 456) describes the tabs available for each device in the WLAN AP Devices folder.
Parts of the WLAN AP device folder Part General tab Software tab Unit tab Description Allows you to view general information about the software currently running on WLAN AP devices. Allows you to view information about software versions and sources for WLAN AP devices. Allows you to view information about WLAN AP device hardware.
General tab
Use the General tab of the "WLAN AP Devices folder" (page 455) to view general information about the selected WLAN AP device. "Parts of the General tab of the WLAN AP device Software folder" (page 456) describes the parts of the General tab.
Parts of the General tab of the WLAN AP device Software folder Part Type SysName Description Location Contact UpTime Description Displays the device type. Displays the device system name (if any). Displays a description of the device, including hardware, and software version levels if available. Displays the location of the device. Displays the administrative contact for the device. Displays the elapsed time since last reset for the device.
Software tab
"Parts of the Software tab of the WLAN AP device Software table" (page 456) describes the parts of the Software tab.
Parts of the Software tab of the WLAN AP device Software table Part BootRomVer OpCodeVer NNDataFileVer CountryCode Description Displays Boot ROM code version of the main board Displays Op Code version Displays Nortel Networks Customization Data File Version Displays Country code of the AP device
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Unit tab
"Parts of the Unit tab of the WLAN AP device Hardware table" (page 457) describes the parts of the WLAN AP device Unit table.
Parts of the Unit tab of the WLAN AP device Hardware table Part Hardware Ver Description Displays the current hardware version of the main board
Part Action
Description For Alteon devices, these radio buttons let you choose whether to download a configuration file (get-configuration) or an image file (get-image). For ERS 1424, 1612, 1624, and 1648 devices, these radio buttons let you choose whether to download a configuration file (DownloadConfiguration) or an image file (DownloadImage). For Ethernet Switch, ERS 55xx/35xx and Legacy Baystack devices, these radio buttons let you choose whether to download a configuration file (dnldConfig), an image file (dnldImage), a firmware file (dnldFW), or an ASCII configuration file (dnldAsciiConfig). For WLAN AP devices, these radio buttons let you choose whether to download a Configuration file, ApplicationImageFile or NN DataFile
Allows you to choose a configuration file to download to Alteon, Ethernet Switch, Ethernet Routing Switch 55xx/35xx, Legacy Baystack, or ERS 1424, 1612, 1624, or 1648 devices. The source directory for the download operation is determined by the settings of the TFTP server. Review the configuration settings of the TFTP server to determine the source directory. Allows you to choose a file to download to Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 devices. The source directory for the download operation is determined by the settings of the TFTP server. Review the configuration settings of the TFTP server to determine the source directory. Allows you to enter a destination filename for a Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 download operation. Allows you to choose an image file to download.
Destination File Name ImageFileName or ApplicationImage FileName (only for WLAN AP device)
Allows you to set the target image for Alteon devices. Allows you to choose an Ethernet Switch 450 image file to download in mixed stack configurations.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Part FWFileName(diag) Nortel Networks(NN) DataFile Name Target Config (Only for WLAN AP device) Target Image (Only for WLAN AP device) Action
Description Allows you to choose a diagnostic firmware file to download. Allows you to choose a Nortel customer data file Allows you to choose syscfg or syscfg_bak for WLAN AP device Allows you to choose ntl-img or dflt-img for WLAN AP device Allows you to choose whether to download an image file, a configuration file, a diag. firmware file, or an ASCII configuration file. Use the Prefix IP address for Source File radio buttons to set whether or not you are downloading files according to the IP address appended to the filename:
When you choose No, File Inventory Manager downloads the selected file to all selected devices. When you choose Yes, File Inventory Manager downloads files to the selected devices according to the IP address appended to filename. For example, suppose you have entered "config.cfg" as the filename, and selected the device, 10.160.41.204. File Inventory Manager will download the file 10_160_41_204_config.cfg to 10.160.41.204.
The source directory for the download operation is determined by the settings of the TFTP server. Review the configuration settings of the TFTP server to determine the source directory.
Download Log file name Reboot after successful download (only for WLAN AP device) Available devices list Target devices in order list
Allows you to enter the file to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the operation. Click the ... button to browse available files. Allows you to specify reboot WLAN AP device action after successful download (only for WLAN AP devices).
Allows you to choose from all the available devices. Allows you to arrange multiple devices in the order in which you want to download the file.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Allows you to move all the devices from the Available devices list into the Target devices in order list. Allows you to move the selected device from the Available devices list into the Target devices in order list. Allows you to move the selected device from the Target devices in order list to the Available devices list. Allows you to move all the devices in the Target devices in order list to the Available devices list. Allows you to move the selected device up one position in the Target devices in order list. Allows you to move the selected device down one position in the Target devices in order list. Allows you to open the schedule dialog box and schedule the download operation for a specific time or a recurring basis. Downloads the files to the devices shown on the Target devices in order list. Discards your settings and closes the dialog box. Opens Online Help for the Download File to Device(s) dialog box.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Part Action
Description For Alteon devices, these radio buttons let you choose whether to upload configuration files (put-configuration) or dump files (put-dump) from multiple Alteon devices to a workstation accessible by the TFTP server. For ERS 1424, 1612, 1624, and 1648 devices, these radio buttons let you choose whether to upload configuration files (UploadConfiguration) or history log files (UploadHistoryLog).
For Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 devices, allows you to enter a base filename for the destination file. Observe the following points regarding the destination filename:
During the upload operation, the IP address of the device or devices will be appended to the base filename. This feature helps you upload configuration files from multiple devices without overwriting the destination files. For example, suppose you have entered "config.cfg" as the filename, and selected two devices, 10.160.41.204 and 10.160.41.229. The actual destination files will be named 10_160_41_204_config.cfg and 10_160_41_229_config.cfg.
The destination directory for the upload is determined by the settings of the TFTP server. Review the configuration settings of the TFTP server to determine the destination directory. For Ethernet Switch, ERS 55xx/35xx, and Legacy BayStack devices, the actual destination filename is limited to a maximum of 29 characters, including the appended IP address.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Part ConfigFileName
Description Allows you to enter a base filename for the destination file. Observe the following points regarding the destination filename:
During the upload operation, the IP address of the device or devices will be appended to the base filename. This feature helps you upload configuration files from multiple devices without overwriting the destination files. For example, suppose you have entered "config.cfg" as the filename, and selected two devices, 10.160.41.204 and 10.160.41.229. The actual destination files will be named 10_160_41_204_config.cfg and 10_160_41_229_config.cfg.
The destination directory for the upload is determined by the settings of the TFTP server. Review the configuration settings of the TFTP server to determine the destination directory. For Ethernet Switch, ERS 55xx/35xx, and Legacy BayStack devices, the actual destination filename is limited to a maximum of 29 characters, including the appended IP address.
For ERS 1424, 1612, 1624, and 1648 devices, allows you to enter the name of the history log file to upload if you select the UploadHistoryLog Action radio button. For Alteon devices, allows you to enter the name of the dump file to upload if you selected the put-dump Action radio button. Allows you to enter the file to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the operation. Allows you to choose from all the available devices. Allows you to arrange multiple devices in the order in which you want to upload the files from them. Allows you to move all the devices from the Available devices list into the Target devices in order list.
Upload Log file name Available devices list Target devices in order list All >>
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Part >>
Description Allows you to move the selected device from the Available devices list into the Target devices in order list. Allows you to move the selected device from the Target devices in order list to the Available devices list. Allows you to move all the devices in the Target devices in order list to the Available devices list. Allows you to move the selected device up one position in the Target devices in order list. Allows you to move the selected device down one position in the Target devices in order list. Allows you to open the schedule dialog box and schedule the upload operation for a specific time on a recurring basis. Uploads the file from the devices shown in the Target devices in order list and closes the dialog box. Discards your settings and closes the dialog box. Opens online Help for the Upload File from Device(s) dialog box.
File
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Part Available devices list Target devices in order list All >> >>
Description Allows you to choose from all the available devices. Allows you to arrange multiple devices in the order in which you want to back up the configuration files. Allows you to move all the devices from the Available devices list into the Target devices in order list. Allows you to move the selected device from the Available devices list into the Target devices in order list. Allows you to move the selected device from the Target devices in order list to the Available devices list. Allows you to move all the devices in the Target devices in order list to the Available devices list. Allows you to move the selected device up one position in the Target devices in order list. Allows you to move the selected device down one position in the Target devices in order list. Allows you to open the schedule dialog box and schedule the backup operation for a specific time on a recurring basis. Backs up the configuration file(s) for the devices shown in the Target devices in order list and closes the dialog box. Discards your settings and closes the dialog box. Opens Online Help for the Backup Config File dialog box.
Backup
Close Help
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Restore Cong File dialog box" (page 465) describes the parts of the Restore Cong File dialog box.
Parts of the Restore Cong File dialog box Part TFTP Server Description Allows you to enter the IP address for the TFTP server for the operation. The default setting is the TFTP server (if any) specified on the Preferences dialog box.For more information, see "Preferences dialog box" (page 66). The File radio button allows you to choose whether to restore the config.cfg or boot.cfg file (available for Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 devices only). Allows you to enter a name of the file to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the operation. Click the ... button to browse available files. Allows you to specify reboot WLAN AP device action after successful download (only for WLAN AP devices).
File
Reboot after successful download (only for WLAN AP device) Available devices list Target devices in order list All >> >>
Allows you to choose from all the available devices. Allows you to arrange multiple devices in the order in which you want to restore configuration files. Allows you to move all the devices from the Available devices list into the Target devices in order list. Allows you to move the selected device from the Available devices list into the Target devices in order list. Allows you to move the selected device from the Target devices in order list to the Available devices list. Allows you to move all the devices in the Target devices in order list to the Available devices list. Allows you to move the selected device up one position in the Target devices in order list. Allows you to move the selected device down one position in the Target devices in order list. Allows you to open the schedule dialog box and schedule the restore operation for a specific time or a recurring basis. Restores the configuration files for the devices shown in the Target devices in order list and closes the dialog box.
Restore
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Discards your settings and closes the dialog box. Opens Online Help for the Restore Config File dialog box.
File
TFTP Server Base Directory Available devices list Target devices in order list All >> >>
<<
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Allows you to move all the devices in the Target devices in order list to the Available devices list. Allows you to move the selected device up one position in the Target devices in order list. Allows you to move the selected device down one position in the Target devices in order list. Allows you to open the schedule dialog box and schedule the archive operation for a specific time on a recurring basis. Archives the configuration files for the devices shown in the Target devices in order list and closes the dialog box. Discards your settings and closes the dialog box. Opens online Help for the Archive Config File dialog box.
Archive
Close Help
File
Synchronize log file name Available devices list Target devices in order list
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Allows you to move all the devices from the Available devices list into the Target devices in order list. Allows you to move the selected device from the Available devices list into the Target devices in order list. Allows you to move the selected device from the Target devices in order list to the Available devices list. Allows you to move all the devices in the Target devices in order list to the Available devices list. Allows you to move the selected device up one position in the Target devices in order list. Allows you to move the selected device down one position in the Target devices in order list. Allows you to open the schedule dialog box and schedule the synchronize operation for a specific time on a recurring basis. Uploads the configuration files for the device(s) shown in the Target devices in order list to the currently deployed subdirectory of the TFTP root directory and closes the dialog box. Discards your settings and closes the dialog box. Opens Online Help for Synchronize Config File dialog box.
Synchronize
Close Help
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Part 450ImageFileName (Mix Stack) Image Device Upgrade Log file name Reboot after successful download (only for WLAN AP devices) Available devices list Target devices in order list All >> >>
Description Allows you to choose a BayStack 450 image file to download in mixed stack configurations. Allows you to set the target image for Alteon devices. Allows you to enter a name for the file to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the operation. Click the ... button to browse available files. Allows you to specify reboot WLAN AP device action or not after successful download (only for WLAN AP devices). Allows you to choose from all the available devices. Allows you to arrange multiple devices in the order in which you want to upgrade them. Allows you to move all the devices from the Available devices list into the Target devices in order list. Allows you to move the selected device from the Available devices list into the Target devices in order list. Allows you to move the selected device from the Target devices in order list to the Available devices list. Allows you to move all the devices in the Target devices in order list to the Available devices list. Allows you to move the selected device up one position in the Target devices in order list. Allows you to move the selected device down one position in the Target devices in order list. Allows you to open the schedule dialog box and schedule the upgrade operation for a specific time or a recurring basis. Downloads the selected image file to the device(s) shown in the Target devices in order list and closes the dialog box. Discards your settings and closes the dialog box. Opens Online Help for Device Upgrade dialog box.
Device Upgrade
Close Help
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
The following sections describe the different versions of the Device List for Query Inventory dialog box you encounter in Enterprise Switch Manager: "Device List dialog box, schedule or query version" (page 470) "Device list dialog box, query only version" (page 470) "Device list dialog box, schedule only version" (page 471)
Cancel Help
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the Device List for Inventory Query dialog box, query only version" (page 471) describes the parts of the Device List for Query Inventory dialog box, query-only version.
Parts of the Device List for Inventory Query dialog box, query only version Part Clear all/Select all Description Click once to clear all selected IP addresses in the device list to the right. Click again to select all IP addresses in the list. Queries the selected devices and closes the dialog box. Discards your settings and closes the dialog box. Opens online Help for the Device List for Query Inventory dialog box.
OK Cancel Help
Schedule
Cancel Help
For more information, see "Scheduling tasks" (page 401). "Parts of the schedule dialog box" (page 472) describes the parts of the schedule dialog box.
Parts of the schedule dialog box Part Id Name Log File Description Displays the system-assigned identification number for the scheduled task. Allows you to enter a name for the task so that you can identify it easily later. Allows you to enter a name for the file to which Enterprise Switch Manager logs the results of the operation after it executes it. The Schedule radio buttons allow you to set how often you want the task to run.
Schedule
When you choose One Time Only, Enterprise Switch Manager executes the task only once at the time you specify. When you choose Every Month on the __ Day, Enterprise Switch Manager executes the task every month on the day of the month and at the time you specify. When you choose Every Week on __, Enterprise Switch Manager executes the task every week on the day of the week and at the time you specify. When you choose Every __ Days, Enterprise Switch Manager executes the task at the interval and time you specify. When you choose Every Day, Enterprise Switch Manager executes the task every day at the time you specify.
Allows you to set the date and time you want Enterprise Switch Manager to execute the task. Stores your settings and closes the dialog box. Discards your settings and closes the dialog box. Opens online Help for the schedule dialog box.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
CreatedThe task has been created, but not scheduled. ScheduledThe task is scheduled for execution. CanceledThe task is canceled and will not be executed. ErrorInSchedulingAn error in scheduling prevents Enterprise Switch Manager from executing the task.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description None-The task has been scheduled and not executed yet. n/a-The task encountered an error while scheduling the task. In ProgressEnterprise Switch Manager is currently executing the task. CompletedEnterprise Switch Manager has finished executing the task. ErrorInExecutionEnterprise Switch Manager encountered an error and cannot execute the task.
Updates the user on how many times a task has been executed so far Allows you to view the Scheduled Task log file. Updates the scheduled task list to show any new information. Removes the selected task from the task list. Enterprise Switch Manager will not execute the task. Removes the selected task from the schedule. Enterprise Switch Manager will not execute the task, but the task remains visible in the task list unless you delete it with the Delete Task button. Opens online Help for View Scheduled Task dialog box. Closes the dialog box.
Help Exit
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Hardware
Software
OK Close Help
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
477
This chapter describes how to use NSNA Manager to manage NSNA on Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8300 and Ethernet Routing Switch 55xx devices. It includes the following information: "What is NSNA Manager?" (page 477) "Starting NSNA Manager" (page 479) "NSNA Manager Window" (page 479) "Working with NSNA Manager" (page 486) "Viewing NSNAS subnet members in Enterprise Switch Manager" (page 499)
NSNA
The Nortel Secure Network Access (NSNA) solution is a protective framework to completely secure the network from endpoint vulnerability. The NSNA solution addresses endpoint security and enforces policy compliance. NSNA delivers endpoint security by enabling only trusted, role-based access privileges premised on the security level of the device, user identity, and session context. NSNA enforces policy compliance such as for Sarbanes-Oxley, and COBIT, ensuring the required anti-virus applications or software patches are installed before a user is granted network access. The NSNA solution provides a policy-based, clientless approach to corporate network access. The NSNA solution provides both authentication and enforcement (operating system/antivirus/rewall code revision enforcement, Windows* registry content verication and enforcement, le system verication and enforcement). A PC user gains access into the corporate network by passing through: authentication host integrity check and remediation (if needed)
Before authentication, the user is given restricted access within the whole network (Red VLAN). By default, the restrictions allow access to the Nortel Secure Network Access Switch (NSNAS) and to the Windows domain controller network only (this is based on the default NSNA Red lter set). This is necessary to allow the authentication trafc. You can customize the lter sets to allow greater access, if necessary. After the clients credentials are checked with an authentication server, a TunnelGuard applet (the security agent) is downloaded to every PC client. TunnelGuard provides continual device integrity checking. If the host integrity check fails after password authentication, the user is given access to the remediation network only (Yellow VLAN). After successful completion of all of these phases, the user is given full access to the network, depending on the user prole (Green VLAN). IP phones are given access to one of the precongured VoIP subnets, and are permitted a prespecied type of communication. The VoIP lters are constructed to prevent the VoIP trafc from going anywhere but to a specic subnet. This subnet is specied by the VoIP VLAN. For detailed information about the NSNA solution and deployment scenarios, see Nortel Secure Network Access Solution Guide (320817-A). For information about conguring the NSNAS, see Nortel Secure Network Access Switch 4050 User Guide (320818-A). For switch-specic conguration information, refer to your switch documentation.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
You cannot use NSNA Manager to congure VLAN properties. To congure NSNA VLAN properties, you must use VLAN Manager. See "Conguring VLANs for NSNA" (page 106). The following sections describe the NSNA Manager window and available management functions.
The NSNA Manager window opens ("NSNA Manager Window" (page 480)). End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"NSNA Manager window parts" (page 480) describes the parts of the NSNA Manager window.
NSNA Manager window parts Part Title bar Menu bar Description Displays the submanager name. Provides access to all NSNA Manager commands. For more information, see "NSNA Manager menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 481). Provides quick access to commonly used NSNA Manager commands. For more information, see "NSNA Manager menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 481). Provides a navigation tree showing NSNA Manager network folder resources. For more information, see "NSNA Manager navigation pane" (page 483). Displays information about the objects selected in the navigation pane. For more information, see "NSNA Manager contents pane" (page 483). Displays status information, including the type of device highlighted and command status. For more information, see "Status bar" (page 484).
Toolbar
Navigation pane
Contents pane
Status bar
"NSNA Manager menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 481) lists the NSNA Manager menus and toolbar buttons.
NSNA Manager menu bar commands and toolbar buttons Menu File Command Refresh Toolbar button Shortcut key Description Queries devices and updates the contents pane for the selected tree node in the navigation pane. Ctrl+R Rediscovers the network and reloads NSNA Manager with the latest information. For more information, see "Reloading NSNA Manager" (page 485). Opens the Print dialog box, where you enter print parameters.
Reload
Ctrl+P
Closes the NSNA Manager window. Reverses any changes you made to an item or field.
Preferences
Identifies specific devices for Enterprise Switch Manager to configure and manage. See "Submanager preferences" (page 73)for more information. Ctrl+C Copies the contents of a selected cell.
Copy
Paste
Ctrl+V
Insert
Ctrl+I
Opens the Insert dialog box, where you insert an NSNAS configuration or IP Phone signature. Removes a selection and displays a message to confirm deletion of
Delete
Ctrl+D
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Menu
Command
Toolbar button
Shortcut key
Description the selected item. After you make changes to your NSNA configuration, this command applies these changes to the selected devices in the network.
Apply Changes
Find
Ctrl+F
Opens the Find dialog box, where you set parameters to find matching entries in your network. Highlights the NSNA topology map in the Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane.
View
Help
Online Support
Opens a Web browser that loads the Nortel Customer Support Web page. Displays information about NSNA Manager.
Navigation pane
The NSNA Manager navigation pane ("NSNA Manager navigation pane" (page 483)) is located on the left side of the window. It contains a network folder for the NSNA-capable devices found in the network, as well as for each NSNAS subnet. When you click a Devices folder, the folder expands to display the device information. In the navigation pane, select the folder for which you want to view NSNA information, or choose Edit > Print to print the navigation tree.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"Parts of the NSNA Manager navigation pane" (page 483) describes the parts of the NSNA Manager navigation pane.
Parts of the NSNA Manager navigation pane Part Network folder Capable folder Attributes node Devices folder Devices icon NSNAS subnet folder Description Contains all of the icons and folders in the navigation pane. Contains all NSNA-capable devices that do not belong to an NSNAS subnet. Allows you to enable and disable NSNA on a switch or stack and configure related NSNAS properties. Contains network devices. Represents individual devices in the network. Contains all NSNA-capable devices that belong to the same NSNAS subnet.
Contents pane
When you select a network resource in the navigation pane, a table appears in the contents pane ("NSNA Manager contents pane" (page 483)).
NSNA Manager contents pane
To view the NSNA information in the contents pane: Step 1 Action In the navigation pane, select an Attributes node or a Device icon.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
The example in "NSNA Manager contents pane" (page 483) shows the NSNA VLAN conguration information for a device. End
Status bar
The NSNA Manager status bar is located at the bottom of the NSNA Manager window ("NSNA Manager Window" (page 480)). "NSNA Manager status bar elds" (page 484) describes the parts of the NSNA Manager navigation pane.
NSNA Manager status bar elds Field Message Description Located on the left, the message field displays information about NSNA Manager operations.
The Find dialog box appears ("Find dialog box" (page 484)).
Find dialog box
In the Find text box, type the text or number for your search.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
3 4
In the In section, select the Tree option to search the navigation tree, or select the Table option to search the contents pane. In the From text box, click Selection to start the search from the highlighted selection, or click Start to begin searching from the top of the tree or table. To perform a non-case-sensitive search, click the Ignore Case check box. To perform a case-sensitive search, clear the Ignore Case check box. To search for an exact text match, click the Exact Match check box. To perform a partial text search, clear the Exact Match check box. Click Next. NSNA Manager starts its search and highlights the rst match that it nds or displays a message that it found no matches.
6 7
If the search nds a match, click Next to nd each subsequent match, or click Previous to go back to the last match. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Click Reload with discovery of topology to rediscover network topology and reload the Enterprise Switch Manager topology map and all of the submanagers. Click Reload NSNA Manager only to just reload NSNA Manager. Enterprise Switch Manager polls devices for settings and features, but does not perform a full network topology discovery. Click Cancel to abandon the reload operation. Note: Reloading only NSNA Manager takes less time than reloading with topology discovery. However, if there are any changes in network topology, it can result in discrepancies between the information in NSNA Manager and the information about the topology map. Such discrepancies can cause incorrect operation when you perform operations (such as highlighting the network map) that involve interactions between the submanagers and the topology map. If you observe such incorrect operations, reload the network map. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
487
In the contents pane, the NSNA Globals tab appears (see "DCAM-5706861" (page 486)).
NSNA Globals tab
2 3
In the Enabled column, click the row for the device you want to enable, and choose true from the drop-down list. Click Apply Changes. Note: It can take 23 minutes to globally enable or disable NSNA on a device, especially on a fully populated Ethernet Routing Switch 55xx stack. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Click Insert. The NSNAS Conguration Insert dialog box appears (see "NSNAS Conguration Insert dialog box" (page 488)).
NSNAS Conguration Insert dialog box
4 5 6 7
In the Address box, type the IP address of the NSNAS. In the AddressMask box, type the subnet mask of the NSNAS. In the Port box, enter the port number (if it is different than the default value). In the device list, select the devices to which you want the NSNAS subnet conguration to apply.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
489
Click OK. A dialog box appears, alerting you that ESM is rebuilding the NSNA network (see "NSNAS entry insertion dialog box" (page 489)).
NSNAS entry insertion dialog box
Click OK. The information for the congured NSNAS subnet appears in the NSNAS Conguration tab for all selected devices. Note: With the current release, only one entry for the NSNAS subnet can be congured per device. "NSNAS Conguration tab elds" (page 489) describes the elds in the NSNAS Conguration tab.
NSNAS Conguration tab elds Field Device AddressType Description Specifies devices by IP address. Specifies the type of IP address used by the NSNAS. IPv4 is the only available option at this time. Specifies the IP address of the NSNAS. Specifies the NSNAS IP address subnet mask. Specifies the TCP port number for the Secure Switch Communication Protocol (SSCP) server. The default setting is 5000.
End
Click the NSNAS Conguration tab. The NSNAS Conguration tab appears.
3 4
Select the rows corresponding to the devices you want to remove from the NSNAS subnet. Click Delete. A dialog box appears, alerting you that ESM is rebuilding the NSNA network.
NSNAS entry deletion dialog box
Click OK. The selected devices are removed from the NSNAS Conguration tab in the contents pane. If, as a result, the NSNAS subnet no longer has any associated devices, the NSNAS subnet folder is also removed from NSNA Manager. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
491
NSNAS Status tab elds Field Device ConnectionState InetAddressType Description Specifies devices by IP address. Indicates whether an NSNAS is currently connected to the switch.. If an NSNAS is currently connected to the switch, this indicates the Internet address type from which the NSNAS is connected. The InetAddress field is of this type. If no NSNAS is currently connected, the value is listed as unknown. The interval for sending Secure Switch Communication Protocol (SSCP) Hello messages for the current SSCP connection. If this period of time passes without any SSCP messages being sent, a Hello message is generated. If no NSNAS is currently connected, this value is zero. The inactivity interval for the current SSCP connection. If this period of time passes without any SSCP messages being received, the SSCP connection will be closed. If no NSNAS is currently connected, this value is zero; otherwise it is non-zero.
InetAddress
SendHelloInterval
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Field InactivityInterval
Description The inactivity interval for the current SSCP connection. If this period of time passes without any SSCP messages being received, the SSCP connection will be closed. If no NSNAS is currently connected, this value is zero; otherwise it is non-zero. The status-quo interval for the current or last SSCP connection. If the NSNAS is disconnected from the switch for any reason, the switch waits this period of time before moving all NSNA-enabled ports to the Red VLAN. The maximum value, 65535, indicates that no status quo interval is used, and SSA-enabled ports are not moved to the Red VLAN. If the NSNAS is disconnected and the status-quo interval timer is running, this value reflects the time remaining until the status-quo timer expires.
StatusQuoInterval
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
493
Do one of the following: From the NSNA Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Insert. On the NSNA Manager toolbar, click Insert.
The IP Phone Signatures Insert dialog box appears (see "IP Phone Signatures Insert dialog box" (page 493)).
IP Phone Signatures Insert dialog box
4 5
In the IpPhoneSignatureString eld, type the IP Phone signature string (for example, Nortel-i2007-A). In the device list, select the devices to which you want the IP Phone signature to apply.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Click OK. The IP Phone signature you entered appears in the IP Phone Signatures tab for all selected devices. End
The VLAN tab displays the NSNA VLANs for this device. This is a view-only table. You cannot use NSNA Manager to congure VLAN properties. To congure NSNA VLAN properties, you must use VLAN Manager. See "Conguring VLANs for NSNA" (page 106).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
495
"NSNA VLAN tab elds" (page 495) describes the elds in the NSNA VLAN tab.
NSNA VLAN tab elds Field Id StgId Name Color FilterSetName Description Specifies the VLAN ID. Specifies the STG ID. Specifies the VLAN name. Specifies the color of the NSNA VLAN (red, yellow, green, voip, or none). Specifies the name of the filter set. Note: This field is applicable only when the Color field is set to red, yellow, or green. FilterSetId Specifies the NSNA filter ID. Values are in the range 11024. Note: This field is applicable only to Ethernet Routing Switch 8300 devices. Further, this field is not allowed for configuration of a VoIP VLAN. VoIP filters are part of the Red/Yellow filter sets. YellowSubnetType Specifies the Ethernet type for the Yellow VLAN subnet (IPv4 is currently the only available option). Note: This field is applicable only when the Color field is set to yellow.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Field YellowSubnet
Description Specifies the subnet of the Yellow VLAN. Note: This field is applicable only when the Color field is set to yellow.
YellowSubnetMask
Specifies the mask for the Yellow VLAN subnet. Note: This field is applicable only when the Color field is set to yellow.
To congure the port: a. In the Mode column, select the port mode. b. If the VoipVlans eld is available for the port (that is, if it does not appear dimmed), enter the VoIP VLAN IDs. c. If the UplinkVlans eld is available for the port, enter the uplink VLAN IDs.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
497
Specifies the VoIP VLANs to which this port belongs. Note: This field is only available when the port mode is dynamic.
UplinkVlans
Specifies the uplink VLANs to which this port belongs. Note: This field is only available when the port mode is uplink.
State
Specifies the current NSNA color of the port. Possible states are as follows: none red yellow green
DhcpState
Specifies the DHCP state of the port. Possible DHCP states are as follows: blocked unblocked
End
In the contents pane, the VLAN tab appears. 2 In the contents pane, select the Client tab. The Client tab appears (see "NSNA Client tab" (page 498)). Clients currently connected to the network access device appear in this tab.
NSNA Client tab
"NSNA Client tab elds" (page 498) describes the elds in the NSNA - Client tab elds.
NSNA Client tab elds Field IfIndex MacAddress DeviceType VlanId FilterVlanId Description Specifies the logical interface index assigned to the VLAN. Specifies the MAC address of the host. Specifies the type of client device (pc, ipPhone, or passive). Specifies the ID of the VLAN of which the client is a member. Specifies the ID of the VLAN whose associated filter set is installed on this port for this client. This is used when MAC Authentication is enabled. If MAC Authentication is not enabled, this field will return the same value as the VlanId field. Specifies the type of IP address used by this client (IPv4 is currently the only option available).
AddressType
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
499
Description Specifies the IP address of the client. Specifies whether this client has been aged-out.
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
500 Using NSNA Manager NSNAS subnet topology in the ESM contents pane
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
501
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
The Routing Manager window appears ("Routing Manager window" (page 502)).
"Routing Manager window parts" (page 502) describes the parts of the Routing Manager window.
Routing Manager window parts Part Title bar Menu bar Description Displays the submanager name. Provides access to all Routing Manager commands. For more information, see "Menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 503). Provides quick access to commonly used Routing Manager commands. For more information, see "Menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 503).
Toolbar
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
503
Description Provides a navigation tree showing Routing Manager network folder resources. For more information, see "Navigation pane" (page 505). Displays Routing Manager tables. For more information, see "Contents pane" (page 505). Displays status information, including discovery information, type of node highlighted, and command status. For more information, see "Status bar" (page 506).
Ctrl+P
Preferences
Identifies specific devices for Enterprise Switch Manager to configure and manage. See "Submanager preferences" (page 73) for more information. Ctrl+C Copies the contents of the selected cell.
Copy
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Menu
Command Paste
Toolbar button
Description Pastes the cell contents when you select a new location.
Opens the Insert dialog box, where you insert a node for a selected protocol.
Opens the Insert dialog box to add a new row to the selected table. Removes the selected table row from the table. Applies any changes you made to your routing configuration.
Find
Ctrl+F
Opens the Find dialog box, where you set parameters to find matching entries in your network. For more information, see "Finding network resources" (page 506). Highlights routing items in the Enterprise Switch Manager contents pane.
View
Help
Opens a Web browser that loads the Nortel Customer Support Web page. Displays information about Routing Manager.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
505
Navigation pane
Routing Manager displays devices and adjacent devices in a tree structure. The Routing Manager navigation tree is located on the left side of the window and contains branches with the IP address of devices discovered by Enterprise Switch Manager. "Routing Manager navigation pane" (page 505) shows an example of the Routing Manager navigation pane.
Routing Manager navigation pane
From the navigation tree in the navigation pane, select the folder for which you want to view routing information, or use the Edit > Print command to print the navigation tree.
Contents pane
When you choose a folder in the navigation pane, its contents appear in the contents pane. To view the folder in the contents pane:
In the navigation pane, select a Network folder. The contents of the folder appear as a table in the contents pane, as shown in the example in "Routing Manager contents pane" (page 505). Routing Manager contents pane
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Status bar
The Routing Manager status bar is located at the bottom of the Routing Manager window and contains two elds. "Routing Manager status bar elds" (page 506) describes the elds in the Routing Manager status bar.
Routing Manager status bar elds Field Message Description Located on the left, the message field displays information about the following:
The Find dialog box appears ("Routing Manager Find dialog box" (page 506)).
Routing Manager Find dialog box
2 3
In the Find box, type the text or number you are searching for. In the In section, click Tree to search the navigation tree or Table to search the contents pane.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
507
Click Next. Routing Manager starts its search and highlights the rst match that it nds, or it displays a message that it found no matches.
If a rst match is found, click Next to nd each subsequent match, or click Previous to go back to the last match. End
Do one of the following: Click Reload with discovery of topology to rediscover network topology and reload the Enterprise Switch Manager topology map and all of the submanagers. Click Reload Routing Manager only to just reload Routing Manager. Enterprise Switch Manager polls devices for routing settings and features, but it does not perform a full network topology discovery. Click Cancel to abandon the reload operation. Note: Reloading just Routing Manager takes less time than reloading with topology discovery. However, if changes in the
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
network topology occur, they can result in discrepancies between the information in Routing Manager and the information on the topology map. Such discrepancies can cause incorrect operation when you perform operations (such as highlighting the network map) that involve interactions between the submanagers and the topology map. If you observe incorrect operation, reload the network map. For more information, see "Rediscovering the network map" (page 74). Enterprise Switch Manager reloads topology information from the network devices and refreshes the Routing Manager window. End
This section contains information about conguring routes for IPv4 routes and protocols. This section includes the following topics: "Conguring IPv4 routing" (page 508) "Conguring OSPF" (page 515) "Conguring RIP" (page 525) "Conguring VRRP" (page 531)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
509
Step 1
Action In the navigation pane, select IPv4 Networks > IP ROUTING > Globals. The Globals table appears in the contents pane.
To modify any of the congurable global routing properties, modify the elds directly in the contents pane and click Apply Changes. The following table describes the elds in the IPv4 routing Globals table.
IPv4 routing Globals table elds Field Devices Forwarding DefaultTTL Description Identifies the device. Sets the switch for forwarding (routing) or nonforwarding. Sets the default time-to-live (TTL) value for a routed packet. TTL indicates the maximum number of seconds elapsed before a packet is discarded. Enter an integer between 1 and 255. The default value of 255 is inserted in the TTL field whenever one is not supplied in the datagram header.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Field ReasmTimeout
Description The maximum number of seconds that received fragments are held while they wait for reassembly at this entity. The default value is 30 seconds. The lifetime in minutes of an ARP entry within the system. If selected, enables the generation of Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) net unreachable messages if the destination network is not reachable from this router. These messages assist in determining if the routing switch is reachable over the network. The default is disabled (not selected). Enables or disables the switch from sending ICMP destination redirect messages. Enables or disables the alternative-route feature globally. Note: If the alternative-route parameter is disabled, all existing alternative routes are removed. When the parameter is enabled, all alternative routes are re-added.
ICMPRedirectMsgEnable AlternativeEnable
If selected, enables the ICMP Route Discovery feature. Enables or disables a more specific nonlocal route. Enables or disables UDP checksum calculation. Globally enables or disables the Equal Cost Multipath (ECMP) feature. Note: When ECMP is disabled, the EcmpMaxPath is reset to the default value of 1.
EcmpMaxPath
Used to globally configure the maximum number of ECMP paths. When the switch is in R mode, the interval is 1 to 8. When the switch is not in R mode, the interval is 1 to 4. The default value is 1.
You cannot configure this feature unless ECMP is enabled globally on the switch. Ecmp<1-4>PathList EcmpPathListApply Used to select a preconfigured ECMP path. Set this field to true to apply any changes in the ECMP path list configuration or in the prefix lists configured to be used as path lists.
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
511
Step 1
Action In the navigation pane, select a node under IPv4 Networks > IP ROUTING > Static Route. The Static Route table appears in the contents pane.
To add a route, from the menu bar, click Edit > Add Table Row . The Insert Static Route dialog box appears.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
3 4 5
Complete the elds as required, and select the devices for which the static route applies. Click OK. Click Close. The new entry appears in the contents pane.
To modify any of the congurable static route properties of an entry, modify the elds directly in the contents pane and click Apply Changes. The following table describes the elds in the IPv4 routing Static Route table.
IPv4 routing Static Route table elds Field Dest Mask NextHop Description Shows the destination network address. Shows the destination mask. Displays the next hop IP address. When you create a black hole static route, set this field to 255.255.255.255. Displays the primary routing metric for this route. If this metric is not used, set the value to 1. The index value that uniquely identifies the local interface through which the next hop of this route should be reached. The interface identified by a particular value of this index is the same interface as identified by the same value of ifIndex. The routing preference of the destination IP address.
Metric Interface
Preference
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
513
Field Enable
Description Sets whether the configured static route is available on the port. The default is enable. Note: If a static route is disabled, you must enable it before it can be added to the system routing table.
Status LocalNextHop
The status of the route. The IP address of the next hop of this route.
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
To add a route, from the menu bar, click Edit > Add Table Row. The Insert ARP dialog box appears.
Insert ARP dialog box
3 4
Complete the elds as required, and select the devices for which the ARP route applies. Click OK.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
515
Click Close. The new entry appears in the contents pane. The following table describes the elds in the IPv4 routing ARP table.
IPv4 routing ARP table elds Field Interface Description The router interface for this ARP entry: MacAddress IpAddress Type Brouter interfaces are identified by the slot/port number of the brouter port. For virtual router interfaces, the brouter slot/port and the name of the VLAN followed by the (VLAN) designation are specified.
The Ethernet MAC address. The IP address corresponding to the MAC address. The type of ARP entry: locala locally configured ARP entry statica statically configured ARP entry dynamica learned ARP entry
End
Conguring OSPF
This section contains information about the following topics: "Conguring OSPF General" (page 515) "Conguring OSPF Interfaces" (page 518) "Conguring OSPF Area" (page 521) "Conguring OSPF Neighbors" (page 523)
You can use VLAN Manager to enable and disable OSPF on a VLAN. For details, see "Enabling OSPF on a VLAN interface" (page 138)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
To modify any of the congurable OSPF properties, modify the elds directly in the contents pane and click Apply Changes. The following table describes the elds in the OSPF General table.
OSPF General table elds Field Devices RouterId AdminStat Description Identifies the device. The Router ID, which in OSPF has the same format as an IP address but identifies the router independent of other routers in the OSPF domain. The administrative status of OSPF in the router. The value enabled denotes that the OSPF process is active on at least one interface; disabled disables the OSPF process on all interfaces. The default is disabled. Current version number of OSPF. A flag to note if this router is an area border router (ABR). Note: The AreaBdrRtrStatus value must be true to create a virtual router interface.
VersionNumber AreaBdrRtrStatus
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
517
Description When the ASBdrRtrStatus option is selected, the router is configured as an autonomous system boundary router (ASBR). The number of external (LS type 5) link state advertisements in the link state database. The 32-bit unsigned sum of the link state checksums of the external link state advertisements contained in the link state database. This sum is used to determine if a changed occurred in a router link state database and to compare the link state databases of two routers. The number of new link state advertisements that have been originated. This number is incremented each time the router originates a new link state area (LSA). The number of link state advertisements received that are determined to be new instances. This number does not include newer instances of self-originated link state advertisements. Indicates the default cost to be applied to the 10 Mb/s interface (port). Indicates the default cost to be applied to the 100 Mb/s interface (port). Indicates the default cost to be applied to the 1000 Mb/s interface (port). Indicates the default cost to be applied to the 10 000 Mb/s interface (port). Indicates whether to enable traps relating to the OSPF. Enables or disables automatic creation of virtual links. Allows you to change the OSPF hold-down timer value (3 to 60 seconds). Allows you to initiate a new SPF run to update the routing table. Allows you to control the preference rules used when choosing among multiple AS-External LSAs advertising the same destination. When you enable this setting, the preference rule is the same as specified by RFC 1583. When you disable the setting, the new preference rule as described in RFC 2328 is applicable, which potentially prevents the routing loops when AS-External LSAs for the same destination originate from different areas. Used to indicate the time (SysUpTime) since the last SPF calculated by OSPF.
OriginateNewLsas
RxNewLsas
DefaultMetric 10MegPort DefaultMetric 100MegPort DefaultMetric 1000MegPort DefaultMetric1000 0MegPort TrapEnable AutoVirtLink Enable SpfHoldDown Time Action Rfc1583 Compatibility
LastSpfRun
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
To add an interface, from the menu bar, click Edit > Add Table Row. The Insert Interface dialog box appears.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
519
3 4 5
Complete the elds as required. Click OK. Click Close. The new entry appears in the contents pane.
To modify any of the congurable OSPF interface properties for an entry, modify the elds directly in the contents pane and click Apply Changes. The following table describes the elds in the OSPF Interfaces table.
OSPF Interfaces table elds Field IpAddress AddressLessIf Description IP address of the current OSPF interface. Designates whether an interface has an IP address. Interfaces with an IP address = 0 Interfaces without IP address = ifIndex
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Field AreaId
Description Dotted decimal value to designate the OSPF area name. VLANs that maintain the default area setting on the interface cause the link-state database (LSDB) to be inconsistent. Note: The area name is not related to an IP address. You can use any value for the OSPF area name (for example, 1.1.1.1 or 200.200.200.200).
Current administrative state of the OSPF interface (enabled or disabled). Current designated router (DR) state of the OSPF interface (DR, BDR, OtherDR) OSPF priority for the interface during the election process for the designated router. The interface with the highest priority number is the designated router. The interface with the second-highest priority becomes the backup designated router. If the priority is 0, the interface cannot become the designated router or the backup. The priority is used only during election of the designated router and backup designated router. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 1. IP address of the router elected by the Hello Protocol to send link state advertisements on behalf of the NBMA network. IP address of the router elected by the Hello Protocol to send link state advertisements on behalf of the NBMA network if the designated router fails. Type of OSPF interface (broadcast, nbma, or passive) Type of authentication required for the interface. noneNo authentication required. simple passwordAll OSPF updates received by the interface must contain the authentication key specified in the interface AuthKey field. MD5 authenticationAll OSPF updates received by the interface must contain the md5 key.
Key (up to 8 characters) required when simple password authentication is specified in the interface AuthType field. The primary MD5 key used for encrypting outgoing packets. Length of time, in seconds, between Hello packets. This value must be the same for all routers attached to a common network. The default is 10 seconds. Note: When you change the Hello interval values, you must save the configuration file and reboot the switch for the values to be restored and checked for consistency.
TransitDelay RetransInterval
Length of time, in seconds between 1 and 3600, required to transmit an LSA update packet over the interface. Length of time, in seconds between 1 and 3600, required between LSA retransmissions.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
521
Field RtrDeadInterval
Description Interval used by adjacent routers to determine if the router was removed from the network. This interval must be identical on all routers on the subnet and a minimum of four times the Hello interval. To avoid interpretability issues, the RtrDeadInterval value for the OSPF interface must match the RtrDeadInterval value for the OSPF virtual interface. The default is 40 seconds. If true, the network on this interface is advertised as up, even if the port is down. Specifies whether the interface MTU flag ignores the MTU setting. Number of state changes or error events that occurred through all interfaces. Length of time, in seconds, between Hello packets sent to an inactive OSPF router.
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
To add an area, from the menu bar, click Edit > Add Table Row. The Insert Area dialog box appears.
Insert Area dialog box
3 4 5
Complete the elds as required and select the devices for which the area applies. Click OK. Click Close.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
523
The new entry appears in the contents pane. The following table describes the elds in the OSPF Area table.
OSPF Area table elds Field AreaId Description A 32-bit integer uniquely identifying an area. Area ID 0.0.0.0 is used for the OSPF backbone. VLANs that maintain the default area setting on the interface cause the LSDB to be inconsistent. The area support for importing AS-external link-state advertisements (LSA). Options include importExternal (default), importNotExternal, or importNssa (not so stubby area). The total number of area border routers reachable within this area. The value, initially zero, is calculated in each SPF Pass. The total number of autonomous system border routers reachable within this area. The value, initially zero, is calculated in each SPF pass. The total number of link state advertisements in the link state database for this area, excluding AS-external LSAs. The 32-bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements. This sum excludes external (LS type 5) link state advertisements. The sum is used to determine if a change occurred in a router link state database and to compare the link state database of two routers. The support for Summary advertisements in a stub area.
ImportAsExtern
AreaSummary
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
To add a neighbor entry, from the menu bar, click Edit > Add Table Row. The Insert Neighbor dialog box appears.
Insert Neighbor dialog box
3 4
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
525
Click Close. The new entry appears in the contents pane. The following table describes the elds in the OSPF Neighbors table.
OSPF Neighbors table elds Field IpAddr AddressLess Index Description The neighbor IP address. On an interface having an IP address, this value is zero. On addressless interfaces, this value is the corresponding value of ifIndex in the Internet standard management information base (MIB). On row creation, this value is derived from the instance. The router ID of the neighboring router, which in OSPF has the same format as an IP address but identifies the router independent of its IP address. A bit mask corresponding to the options field of the neighbor. Indicates the preferential treatment assignment, which places the transmitted packets into queues. The priority field also indicates the possible selection of the priority field in the data link header when the switch forwards the packet. The OSPF interface state. The number of state changes or error events that occurred between the OSPF router and the neighbor router. The number of elapsed seconds between advertising retransmissions of the same packet to a neighbor. Indicates whether the neighbor is a manually configured NBMA neighbor. This variable indicates whether Hellos to a neighbor are suppressed. OSPF neighbor External Interface Address.
End
Conguring RIP
This section contains information about the following topics: "Conguring RIP Globals" (page 526) "Conguring RIP interface parameters" (page 527) "Conguring RIP advanced interface parameters" (page 528) "Viewing RIP statistics" (page 530)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
To modify any of the congurable RIP global properties, modify the elds directly in the contents pane and click Apply Changes. The following table describes the elds in the RIP Globals table.
RIP Globals table elds Field Devices Operation UpdateTime Description Identifies the device. Enables or disables the operation of RIP on all interfaces. The default is disabled. The time interval between RIP updates on all interfaces. This is a global parameter for the switch and it applies to all interfaces. You cannot set this parameter individually for each interface.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
527
Description The number of route changes RIP made to the IP route database, excluding the refresh of a route age. The number of responses sent to RIP queries from other systems. Sets the length of time that RIP continues to advertise a network after determining it is unreachable. Sets the RIP timeout interval in seconds. Sets the value of the default import metric to import a route into a RIP domain. For announcing OSPF internal routes into a RIP domain, if the policy does not specify a metric value, the default import metric must be used. For OSPF external routes, the external cost is used.
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
To modify any of the congurable RIP interface properties, modify the elds directly in the contents pane, and click Apply Changes. The following table describes the elds in the RIP Interfaces tab.
RIP Interfaces tab elds Field Address Domain AuthType AuthKey Send Description The IP address of the router interface. The value inserted into the Routing Domain field of all RIP packets sent on this interface. The type of authentication used on this interface. The value to be used as the authentication key whenever the corresponding instance of rip2IfConfAuthType has a value other than noAuthentication. What the router sends on this interface (selected from a menu): Receive DoNotSendno RIP updates sent on this interface ripVersion1RIP updates compliant with RFC 1058 rip1Compatiblebroadcast RIP2 updates using RFC 1058 route subsumption rules ripVersion2multicasting RIP2 updates
Indicates which versions of RIP updates are accepted: rip1 rip2 rip1OrRip2
Note that rip2 and rip1OrRip2 imply reception of multicast packets. TimeOutInterval DefImportMetric Sets the RIP timeout interval in seconds. Sets the value of the default import metric to import a route into a RIP domain. For announcing OSPF internal routes into a RIP domain, if the policy does not specify a metric value, the default import metric must be used. For OSPF external routes, the external cost is used.
End
529
The Interfaces tab appears in the contents pane. 2 Click Interfaces Advance. The Interfaces Advance tab appears.
Interfaces Advance tab
To modify any of the congurable RIP advance interface properties, modify the elds directly in the contents pane, and click Apply Changes. The following table describes the elds in the Interfaces Advance tab.
Interfaces Advance tab elds Field Address Interface Enable Supply Listen Description Displays the address of the entry in the IP RIP interface table. The index value of the RIP interface. Displays if the RIP interface is enabled or disabled. Enables (true) or disables (false) the switch to send out RIP updates on this interface. What the router sends on this interface (selected from a menu). The default is rip1compatible.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Field Poison
Description Sets whether (true) or not (false) RIP routes on the interface learned from a neighbor are advertised back to the neighbor. If disabled, split horizon is invoked and IP routes learned from an immediate neighbor are not advertised back to the neighbor. If enabled, the RIP updates sent to a neighbor from which a route is learned are poisoned with a metric of 16. Therefore, the receiver neighbor ignores this route because the metric 16 indicates infinite hops in the network. Enables (true) or disables (false) an advertisement of a default route on this interface. This command takes effect only if a default route exists in the routing table. Enables (true) or disables (false) the switch to accept the default route learned through RIP on this interface. Enables (true) or disables (false) the switch to send out RIP updates on this interface. Enables (true) or disables (false) automatic route aggregation on this interface. When enabled, the switch automatically aggregates routes to their natural mask when they are advertised on an interface. This configuration aggregates only the routes with a mask length longer than natural mask. This policy determines whether to learn a route on this interface. It also specifies the parameters of the route when it is added to the routing table. This policy determines whether to advertise a route from the routing table on this interface. This policy also specifies the parameters of the advertisement. Indicates the RIP cost for this interface. Enter a value between 1 and 15.
DefaultSupply
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
531
The following table describes the elds in the RIP Status table.
RIP Status table elds Field Address RcvBadPackets Description The IP address of the router interface. The number of RIP response packets received by the RIP process that were subsequently discarded for any reason (for example, a version 0 packet or an unknown command type). The number of routes, in valid RIP packets, that were ignored for any reason (for example, unknown address family or invalid metric). The number of triggered RIP updates actually sent on this interface. This field explicitly does not include full updates sent containing new information.
RcvBadRoutes SentUpdates
End
Conguring VRRP
This section contains information about the following topics: "Conguring VRRP Globals" (page 532) "Conguring VRRP Interfaces" (page 533)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
For information about conguring VRRP on a VLAN using VLAN Manager, see "Inserting a VRRP interface on a VLAN" (page 139).
To modify any of the congurable VRRP global properties, modify the elds directly in the contents pane and click Apply Changes. The following table describes the elds in the VRRP Globals table.
VRRP Globals table elds Field Devices NotificationCntl Description Identifies the device. Indicates whether the VRRP-enabled router generates Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps for events defined in this management information base (MIB): VirtualAddr Enable EnabledSNMP traps are sent Disabledno traps are sent
Used to configure whether this device must respond to pings directed to a virtual router IP address.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
533
End
To modify any of the congurable VRRP interface properties, modify the elds directly in the contents pane and click Apply Changes. The following table describes the elds in the VRRP Interfaces table.
VRRP Interfaces table elds Field Interface Description Interface of the VRRP router.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Field VrId
Description A number that uniquely identifies a virtual router on a given VRRP router. The virtual router acts as the default router for one or more assigned addresses (1 to 255). The assigned IP addresses that a virtual router is responsible for backing up. The MAC address of the virtual router interface. The state of the virtual router interface: initializewaiting for a startup event backupmonitoring availability and state of the master router masterfunctioning as the forwarding router for the virtual router IP addresses
Control Priority
Whether VRRP is enabled or disabled for the port (or VLAN). Priority value to be used by this VRRP router. Set a value from 1 to 255, where 255 is reserved for the router that owns the IP addresses associated with the virtual router. The default is 100. The IP address of the physical interface of the master virtual router that is responsible for forwarding packets sent to the virtual IP addresses associated with the virtual router. Enables or disables the fast advertisement interval. When disabled, the regular advertisement interval is used. The default is disabled. The time interval (in seconds) between sending advertisement messages. Set from 1 to 255 seconds with a default of 1 second. Only the master router sends advertisements. Sets the fast advertisement interval, which is the time interval between sending VRRP advertisement messages. The interval is between 200 and 1000 milliseconds, and you must enter the same value on all participating routers. The default is 200. You must enter the values in multiples of 200 milliseconds. The time interval, in hundredths of a second, since this virtual router was initialized. Sets the IP interface on the local router to enable or disable the backup. An IP interface on the local router configured so that a change in its state causes a role switch in the virtual router (for example, from master to backup) in case the interface stops responding.
MasterIpAddr
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
535
This section contains information about conguring routes for IPv6 routes and protocols. This section includes information about the following topics: "Conguring IPv6 routing" (page 535) "Conguring IPv6 OSPF" (page 539)
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
To modify any of the congurable global routing properties, modify the elds directly in the contents pane and click Apply Changes. The following table describes the elds in the IPv6 routing Globals table.
IPv6 routing Globals table elds Field Devices Forwarding Description Identifies the device. Indicates whether this entity is acting as an IPv6 router in respect to the forwarding of datagrams received by, but not addressed to, this entity. IPv6 routers forward datagrams. IPv6 hosts do not (except those source-routed through the host). The default value inserted into the Hop Limit field of the IPv6 header of datagrams originated at this entity whenever a Hop Limit value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol. The number of IPv6 interfaces (regardless of their current state) present on this system. The value of sysUpTime at the time of the last insertion or removal of an entry in the ipv6IfTable. If the number of entries is unchanged since the last reinitialization of the local network management subsystem, then this object contains a zero value. Enables or disables ICMP net unreach feature. Enables or disables ICMP redirect feature.
DefaultHopLimit
Interfaces IfTableLastChange
IcmpNetUnreach IcmpRedirectMsg
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
537
Description The rate (in milliseconds) at which ICMP error messages can be sent out. A value of zero indicates that no ICMP error messages are sent. This indicates the global admin status for multicast.
End
To add an interface entry, from the menu bar, click Edit > Add Table Row. The IPv6 Routing - Insert Interface dialog box appears.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
538 Using Routing Manager IPv6 Routing Insert Interface dialog box
3 4 5
Complete the elds as required. Click OK. Click Close. The new entry appears in the contents pane. The following table describes the elds in the IPv6 Routing Interfaces table.
IPv6 Routing Interfaces table elds Field Interface Description A unique value to identify a physical interface or a logical interface (VLAN). For the brouter port, this is the ifindex of the port. For the VLAN, this is the ifindex of the VLAN. IPv6 address interface identifiers. This is a binary string of up to 8 octets in network byte-order. The length of the interface identifier in bits. A textual string containing information about the interface. This string can be set by a network management system. A value that uniquely identifies the VLAN associated with this entry. This value corresponds to the lower 12 bits in the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tag. The interface type.
Type
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
539
Description MTU for this IPv6 interface. This value should be the same for all the IP addresses defined on this interface. The media-dependent physical address. For Ethernet media, this is the MAC address. The indication of whether IPv6 is enabled (up) or disabled (down) on this interface. This object does not affect the state of the interface itself, only its connection to an IPv6 stack. Operating status of the interface. The time (in milliseconds) a neighbor is considered reachable after receiving a reachability confirmation. Reference RFC2461, Section 6.3.2 The time (in milliseconds) between retransmissions of Neighbor Solicitation messages to a neighbor when resolving the address or when probing the reachability of a neighbor. Reference RFC2461, Section 6.3. The admin status for multicast for this interface.
OperStatus ReachableTime
RetransmitTime
MulticastAdminStatus
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
To modify any of the congurable IPv6 OSPF global routing properties, modify the elds directly in the contents pane and click Apply Changes. The following table describes the elds in the IPv6 OSPF Globals table.
IPv6 OSPF Globals table elds Field Devices RouterId AdminStat VersionNumber AreaBdrRtr Status Description Identifies the device. Identifies the router independent of other routers in the OSPF domain. The router ID has the same format as an IPv6 address. The administrative status of OSPF in the router. Enabled indicates that you can activate OSPF interfaces. Disabled deactivates OSPF on all interfaces. Current version number of OSPF. A read-only flag identifying this router as an area border router (ABR). Note: The AreaBdrRtrStatus value must be true to create a virtual router interface. When you select the ASBdrRtrStatus option, the router is configured as an autonomous system boundary router (ASBR). A read-only field displaying the number of external (LS type 5) LSAs in the link-state database.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
541
Description A read-only field displaying the 32-bit unsigned sum of the LS checksums of the external LSAs in the link-state database. This sum determines changes and compares the linkstate databases of two routers. A read-only field displaying the number of new LSAs. The number is incremented each time the router originates a new LSA. A read-only field displaying the number of new LSAs received. This number does not include new instantiations of self-originated LSAs. A read-only field displaying the number of external (LS type 0x4005) LSAs in the link-state database. The maximum number of nondefault AS-external LSA entries stored in the link-state database. If the value is -1, then there is no limit. The default is -1. You must set the LSDB limit to the same value for all routers attached to the OSPFv3 backbone or any regular OSPFv3 area (that is, OSPFv3 stub areas and NSSAs are excluded). A bit mask indicating whether the router is forwarding IPv6 multicast datagrams based on the algorithms defined in the multicast extensions to OSPF. Possible forwarding includes: intraAreaMulticastforwards to directly attached areas (called intra-area multicast routing) interAreaMulticastforwards between OSPFv3 areas (called inter-area multicast routing) interAsMulticastforwards between Autonomous Systems (called inter-AS multicast routing)
Multicast Extensions
ExitOverflow Interval
The number of seconds that, after entering the overflow state, a router attempts to leave the overflow state. This allows the router resend nondefault AS-external LSAs. When the value is set to 0, the router does not leave the overflow state until the router is restarted. The router support for demand routing. The router support for traffic engineering extensions.
The reference bandwidth in kilobits per second for calculating default interface metrics. The default value is 100 000 Kb/s (100 Mb/s). The router support for OSPF hitless restart. Options include no restart support, only planned restarts, or both planned and unplanned restarts. Options include: none (default) plannedOnly plannedAndUnplanned
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Field RestartStatus
Description A read-only field indicating the current status of OSPF hitless restart. Options include: notRestarting (default) plannedRestart unplannedRestart
The configured OSPF hitless restart timeout interval in the range 1 through 1800 seconds. A read-only field indicating the remaining time in the current OSPF hitless restart interval in seconds. The range is 1 to 1800. A read-only field indicating the outcome of the last attempt at a hitless restart. Options include: none: indicates no restart was attempted inProgress: indicates a restart attempt is currently underway completed: indicates a completed restart timedout: indicates a timed out restart topologyChanged: indicates a cancelled restart due to topology change
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
543
The following table describes the elds in the IPv6 OSPF Interfaces table.
IPv6 OSPF Interfaces table elds Field Index AreaId Description The interface index of this OSPFv3 interface. The index corresponds to the interface index of the IPv6 interface where OSPFv3 is configured. Dotted decimal value to designate the OSPF area name. VLANs that maintain the default area setting on the interface cause the LSDB to be inconsistent. Note: The area name is not related to an IPv6 address. You can use any value for the OSPF area name (for example, 1.1.1.1 or 200.200.200.200). Type AdminStat RtrPriority Type of OSPF interface (broadcast, nbma, point-to-point, or point-to-multipoint). Current administrative state of the OSPF interface (enabled or disabled). OSPF priority for the interface during the election process for the designated router. The interface with the highest priority number is the designated router. The interface with the second-highest priority becomes the backup designated router. If the priority is 0, the interface cannot become the designated router or the backup. The priority is used only during election of the designated router and backup designated router. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 1. Length of time, in seconds (1 through 1800), required to transmit an LSA update packet over the interface.
TransitDelay
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description Length of time, in seconds (1 through 1800), required between LSA retransmissions. Length of time, in seconds, between Hello packets. This value must be the same for all routers attached to a common network. Note: When you change the Hello interval values, you must save the configuration file and reboot the switch for the values to be restored and checked for consistency.
RtrDeadInterval
Adjacent routers use this interval to determine if the router has been removed from the network. The interval must be identical on all routers on the subnet and a minimum of four times the Hello interval. To avoid interpretability issues, the RtrDeadInterval value for the OSPF interface must match the RtrDeadInterval value for the OSPF virtual interface. Length of time, in seconds, between Hello packets sent to an inactive OSPF router. A read-only field indicating the OSPFv3 interface state. Options include: down loopback waiting pointToPoint designatedRouter backupDesignatedRouter otherDesignatedRouter
PollInterval State
A read-only field indicating the router ID of the designated router. A read-only field indicating the router ID of the backup designated router. A read-only field indicating the number of times this OSPF interface changed state or an error occurred. The metric assigned to this interface. The default value of the metric is the Reference Bandwidth or ifSpeed. The value of the reference bandwidth is configured by the rcOspfv3ReferenceBandwidth object. A read-only field indicating the number of Link-Scope LSAs in the link-state database. A read-only field indicating the 32-bit unsigned sum of the Link-Scope link-state advertisement LS checksums in the link-state database. The sum determines a change in the router link-state database and compares the link-state database of two routers. Enables multiple instances of OSPFv3 over a single link. The switch assigns each protocol instance a separate ID. This ID has local link significance only.
InstId
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
545
Description Indicates whether neighbor probing is enabled. Neighbor probing determines whether the neighbor is inactive. The number of consecutive LSA retransmissions before the neighbor is deemed inactive and the neighbor adjacency is deactivated. Defines how often, in seconds, the neighbor is probed.
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
To add an area, from the menu bar, click Edit > Add Table Row . The Insert Areas dialog box appears.
IPv6 OSPF Insert Areas dialog box
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
547
3 4 5
Complete the elds as required. Click OK. Click Close. The new entry appears in the contents pane. The following table describes the elds in the IPv6 OSPF Area table.
IPv6 OSPF Area table elds Field Id Description A 32-bit integer uniquely identifying an area. Area ID 0.0.0.0 is used for the OSPF backbone. VLANs that maintain the default area setting on the interface cause the LSDB to be inconsistent. The support for importing AS-external LSAs. Options include importExternal (default), importNotExternal, or importNssa (not so stubby area). Indicates the number of SPF calculations OSPF performs. The number of area border routers reachable within this area. The switch calculates the value, initially zero, in each SPF pass. The total number of autonomous system border routers reachable within this area. The switch calculates the value, initially zero, in each SPF pass. The number of LSAs in the area link-state database, excluding AS External LSAs. The 32-bit unsigned sum of the LSAs. This sum excludes external (LS type 5) LSAs. The sum determines changes in a router link-state database and compares the link-state databases of two routers. The area support for summary advertisements in a stub area. The number of active interfaces in this area. Indicates an NSSA border router ability to translate NSSA type-7 LSAs into type-5 LSAs. Options include: NssaTranslator State always candidate (default)
ImportAsExtern SpfRuns BdrRtrCount AsbdrRtrCount ScopeLsaCount ScopLsaCksum Sum Summary StubMetric NssaTranslator Role
Indicates if and how an NSSA border router translates NSSA type-7 LSAs into type-5 LSAs. Options include: enabled indicates the NSSA border router translator role is set to always. elected indicates a candidate NSSA border router is translating type-7 LSAs into type-5. disabled indicates a candidate NSSA border router is not translating type-7 LSAs into type-5.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description The number of seconds after an elected translator determines translation is not required that it resumes translation duties. A read-only field indicating the number of Translator State changes that occurred since the last bootup. Sets the type of metric advertised as a default route: rcOspfv3Metric indicates the OSPF metric comparableCost indicates an external type 1 nonComparable indicates an external type 2
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
549
The following table describes the elds in the IPv6 OSPF Neighbors table.
IPv6 OSPF Neighbors table elds Field Interface RtrId Description A read-only field indicating the local link ID of the link over which the neighbor is reached. A read-only field indicating the router ID of the neighboring router, which in OSPF has the same format as an IPv6 address but identifies the router independent of IPv6 address. A read-only field indicating the address type of rcOspfv3NbrAddress. Only IPv6 addresses without zone index are expected. Options include: Address Options Priority unknown ipv6 ipv6z dns
AddressType
A read-only field indicating the IPv6 address for the neighbor associated with the local link. A read-only field indicating the bit mask corresponding to the options field on the neighbor. A read-only field indicating the preferential treatment assignment, which places the transmitted packets into queues. The priority field also indicates the possible selection of the priority field in the data link header when the switch forwards the packet. A read-only field indicating the OSPF interface state: down attempt init twoWay exchangeStart exchange loading full
State
A read-only field indicating the number of state changes or error events occurring between the OSPF router and the neighbor router. A read-only field indicating the number of elapsed seconds between advertising retransmissions of the same packet to a neighbor. A read-only field indicating whether Hellos are suppressed at a neighbor.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Description A read-only field indicating the interface ID that the neighbor advertises in Hello packets on this link, that is, the neighbor local interface index. A read-only field indicating that the router acts as a hitless restart helper for the neighbor. Options include: notHelping helping
A read-only field indicating the time remaining in the current OSPF hitless restart interval, if the router acts as a restart helper for the neighbor. The range is 1 through 1800 seconds. A read-only field indicating the outcome of the last attempt to act as a hitless restart helper for the neighbor. Options include: none: indicates no restart was attempted (default) inProgress: indicates a restart attempt is currently underway completed: indicates a completed restart timedout: indicates a timed-out restart topologyChanged: indicates a cancelled restart due to the topology change
End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
551
From the Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows 2003, or Windows XP Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel > Enterprise Switch Manager > MibBrowser. In a Windows environment, double-click the MIB Browser shortcut icon on your desktop, if it is present. In a Solaris/Linux terminal window, run the MibBrowser.sh le from the directory where MIB Browser has been installed.
Conguration
The parameters, such as host, port, and community, can be set in the MIB Browser main window. Applications use the host name or the IP address of the device to communicate with the agent of the device in a particular port number. This remote port number is UDP port 161. By default, all the SNMP request messages are received in this port.
SNMP communications
SNMP mandates that SNMP agents must accept request messages only if the community string in the message matches its community name. Therefore, the management application must always communicate with the agents using the associated community name. The default SNMP community names are public for read-only (Get) operations and private for read-write (Set) operations. Management applications must have provision to include the community names in their request messages. Community strings are used to authenticate SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDU). Since SNMP packets are usually sent using UDP packets, there is no connection established as in the case of TCP/IP packets. Therefore, when a UDP packet is sent to the agent, the agent validates the packet. It accepts and sends a response if the community string of the PDU is equal to that set on the agent, or else drops the packet. The agent does not change the community name after communicating. Applications typically communicate with the SNMP agents by specifying the community name of the agent. The MIB Browser window contains the parts identied in "MIB Browser window" (page 553).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
553
"MIB Browser window parts" (page 553) describes the parts of the MIB Browser window.
MIB Browser window parts Part Title bar Menu bar Description Displays the MIB Manager name. Provides access to all MIB Browser commands. For more information, see "Menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 87). Provides quick access to commonly used MIB Browser commands. For more information, see "Menu bar commands and toolbar buttons" (page 87). Provides a navigation tree showing MIB resources. For more information, see "Navigation pane" (page 89). Displays information selected in the navigation pane. For more information, see "Contents pane" (page 91). Displays the output for operations. Displays the properties of the selected MIB. For more information, see "Node Properties pane" (page 556). Displays command status.
Toolbar
Navigation pane Contents pane Output pane Properties pane Status bar
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Unload MIB
Delete
Save Results As
Ctrl+S
Print Results
Ctrl+P
Ctrl + Q
Settings
SNMP GetBulk (see "SNMP GetBulk" (page 561)) SNMPv3 (see "SNMPv3 Settings" (page 563))
Find Node
Ctrl + F
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
555
Menu Description
Command
Toolbar button
Shortcut Key
Description
Operations
Get
Ctrl+G
Retrieves the value of the leaf object from the managed objects. For more information, see "SNMP Get" (page 560). Similar to the SNMP Get operation, but retrieves the value of the next OID in the tree. For more information, see "SNMP GetNext" (page 560). If the selected node in the MIB tree has child nodes or columnar nodes, retrieves the values for all the nodes under that sub-tree "SNMP Walk" (page 561). Retrieves data from a large table. For more information, see "SNMP GetBulk" (page 561). Allows you to modify the data for one or more MIB variables. For more information, see "SNMP Set" (page 563). Stops the ongoing query.
GetNext
Ctrl+N
Walk
Ctrl+A
GetBulk
Ctrl+B
Set
Ctrl+W
Stop
Ctrl+C
Clear
Ctrl+L
Help
Contents
F1
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Navigation pane
The MIB Browser navigation pane("MIB Browser navigation pane" (page 556)) is located on the left side of the window. When you select a MIB folder, the tree expands, and the MIB conguration information is displayed in the contents pane.
MIB Browser navigation pane
The navigation pane displays all the loaded MIBs. The MIB tree allows you to view and select the loaded MIBs, and navigate the tree.
Contents pane
When you select a MIB node in the navigation pane, the MIB information displays in thecontents pane, as shown in the following gure("MIB information in the contents pane" (page 557)). The contents pane contains text elds to specify the basic parameters, such as host, community, and so on. It also contains a text area to display the results.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Loading MIBs
To load a MIB: Step 1 Action Do one of the following: From the menu bar, select File > Load MIB. From the toolbar, select the Load MIB button.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
2 3
In the le dialog box, pick the desired MIB le from the MIBs folder. Click Open. The MIB le is loaded. End
Unloading MIBs
To unload a MIB: Step 1 Action In the navigation pane, select the MIB node to delete, and do one of the following: From the menu bar, select File > UnLoad MIB. From the toolbar, click the Unload MIB button. Press Delete.
The conrmation dialog box dialog box appears("Conrm Unload dialog box" (page 559)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Finding a node
To nd a specic node in the MIB tree:
Do one of the following:
From the menu bar, select Edit > Find Node. From the toolbar, click the Find Node icon.
SNMP Operations
The MIB Browser allows you to perform standard SNMP operations. The operations are categorized as follows: Retrieving Data: Get GetNext GetBulk Altering Variables Set To perform any basic operation as categorized above, it is essential to specify the Object ID, the instance, host name, and the community string. Changes can also be made to the parameters in the MIB Browsers Set panel in the contents pane. Host IP Address: To enter the IP Address or the Host name of the SNMP agent. Port Number: To enter the port number of the SNMP agent
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Object ID: To enter the OID of the variable on which the SNMP operation is to be carried Read Community: To enter the read community string of the SNMP agent Write Community: To enter the write community string of the SNMP agent.
SNMP Get
The Get operation is performed to get the value of the leaf object from the managed objects. To perform SNMP Get: Step 1 2 Action In the navigation pane, select the desired node from the MIB tree. Do one of the following: From the menu bar, select Operations > Get. From the toolbar, click Get SNMP variable. End
The MIB Browser gets the specied object, or the specic object instance, if a MIB node is specied.
SNMP GetNext
This operation is similar to the SNMP Get operation, but it retrieves the value of the next OID in the tree. This operation is used for traversing the MIB tree. To perform SNMP GetNext: Step 1 2 Action In the navigation pane, select the desired node from the MIB tree. Do one of the following: From the menu bar, select Operations > GetNext. From the toolbar, click the Get Next SNMP variable button. End
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
The MIB Browser gets the next object after the specied object, or the specic object instance, if a MIB node is specied.
SNMP Walk
This operation is similar to the SNMP GetNext operation, which gets all objects under the selected MIB object. If the selected node in the MIB tree has child nodes or columnar nodes, this operation is performed to retrieve the values for all the nodes under that sub-tree. To perform SNMP Walk: Step 1 2 Action In the navigation pane, select the desired node from the MIB tree. From the menu bar, select Operations > Walk. End
The MIB Browser retrieves the values for all the nodes under the sub-tree.
SNMP GetBulk
To retrieve voluminous data from a large table, use the GetBulk operation. A GetBulk request is performed by specifying an OID along with two additional parameters, Max-Repetitions and Non-Repeaters. The GetBulk operation is performed only on SNMPv2c and SNMPv3. To perform SNMP GetBulk. Step 1 2 Action Select the desired node in the MIB tree. Ensure that the SNMP version is set to either SNMPv2c or SNMPv3. From the menu bar, choose Edit > SNMP, and select SNMPv2c or SNMPV3.
From the menu bar, select Edit > Settings > SNMP BULK. The GetBulk Settings pane appears, replacing the output pane("GetBulk Settings pane" (page 562)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
"GetBulk Settings pane" (page 562) describes the parts of the GetBulk Settings pane.
GetBulk Settings pane Part Max. Repetitions Description The Max-Repetitions value specifies the number of lexicographic successors to be returned for the remaining variables in the variable-bindings list. The Non-Repeaters value specifies the number of variables in the variable-bindings list for which a single lexicographic successor is to be returned. Adds the selected MIB variable to the variable-bindings list, Removes the selected node from the variable-bindings list. Closes the GetBulk Settings pane.
Non Repeaters
4 5 6
To add a MIB variable to the variable-bindings list, select the node from the MIB tree and click the Add button. Specify the values for the Max-Repetitions eld and the Non-Repeaters eld. To retrieve the bulk SNMP data, do one of the following: From the menu bar, choose Operation > GetBulk. From the toolbar, click the Get Bulk SNMP Data button or icon. End
The MIB Browser retrieves the sequence of next objects immediately after the specied object. The number of object instances returned is equal to the Max-Repetitions eld.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
SNMP Set
Most network devices have a default value maintained by the agent. Sometimes applications modify the data for one or more MIB variables, thereby using the SNMP Set operation. The following steps will guide one to understand how one can perform the Set operation. Step 1 Action Select the desired node in the MIB tree to which the value has to be set. The Set operation can be performed only on a node that has read-write access. Set the value in the Set Value eld. Do one of the following: From the menu bar, select Operations > Set. From the toolbar, click the Set SNMP Variable icon. End
2 3
SNMPv3 Settings
To perform operations based on SNMPv3, several security related parameters are required. Step 1 Action From the menu bar, select Edit > SNMP > SNMP V3. The SNMP-V3 conrmation dialog box appears("SNMPv3 conrmation dialog box" (page 563)).
SNMPv3 conrmation dialog box
Click Yes. The SNMP-V3 settings dialog box appears("SNMPV3 Settings dialog box" (page 564)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
The following table"SNMP V3 Settings dialog box" (page 564) describes the parts of the SNMP-V3 Settings dialog box.
SNMP V3 Settings dialog box Part User Name Authentication Auth Password Privacy Privacy Password Description Specifies the SNMPv3 user name. Specifies the Authentication protocol used. Specifies password that is used for authentication purposes. Specifies the privacy protocol used. Specifies the password that is used for privacy purposes.
Note: You can also access the SNMP-V3 Settings dialog box by selecting Edit > Settings > SNMP V3 from the menu bar. 3 4 Complete the elds in the SNMPv3 Settings dialog box. Click OK. In the contents pane, the Read Community and Write Community parameters of SNMP V1 and SNMP V2C are replaced by the SNMPv3 parameters Context Name and Context Engine("SNMPv3 properties parts" (page 565)).
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Context Engine
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
567
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
569
Resolving problems
"Enterprise Switch Manager problems and solutions" (page 569) describes common Enterprise Switch Manager problems and solutions.
Enterprise Switch Manager problems and solutions Problem Enterprise Switch Manager does not display all network devices in the topology map. Solution Use the ping command to verify that the network device is connected. Choose Edit > Preferences, and verify that the Automatically Relayout after discovery check box is selected in the Map section. Increase the maximum hop count in the Preferences dialog box.
View the error log to determine if the timeout is due to the following, and take the recommended action:
Invalid read-community stringadd the correct community in the Edit Communities dialog box. Slow networkIncrease the retry count in the SNMP section of the Edit Preferences dialog box.
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Problem
Solution NMS socket overflowSet the Max Outstanding Requests in the SNMP preferences section of the Edit Preferences dialog box.
Error messages
"Enterprise Switch Manager error messages" (page 570) describes Enterprise Switch Manager messages and their meanings.
Enterprise Switch Manager error messages Message Discrepancies were found, see View > Audit Meaning The submanager can still function, but it has found discrepancies between nodes. From the submanager menu bar, choose View > Audit to view the Audit dialog box. You attempted to edit a read-only item.
Bad Assignment
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
571
Index
39
C
CLI access conguring for a security group 278 communities SNMP passwords 78 using a wildcard 79 Communities changes to SNMP communities 79 Communities dialog box 78 Comparing 365 conguration ID-based VLAN 125 port-based VLAN 115 protocol-based VLAN 118 source IP subnet-based VLAN 116 source MAC address-based VLAN 121 sVLAN 123, 123 Contact item 47 contents pane Enterprise Switch Manager 39 MIB Browser 556, 556 Multicast Manager 186 MultiLink Trunking Manager 146, 146 Routing Manager 505, 505 VLAN Manager 91, 91 customer support 18
A
access policies adding to a security group 321 deleting from a security group 323 Adding devices to a security group 275 Address eld in the Communities dialog box 79 Asynchronous Transfer Mode. See ATM 41 ATM 41 Automatically Relayout after discovery option 68 Automatically Save on Exit option 68
B
Bay Auto Topology Protocol. See BTP 65 BayStack 450 switch number of MLTs supported 142 BridgeAddress eld 101 BridgeForwardDelay eld 99 BridgeForwardDelay item 110 BridgeHelloTime eld 99 BridgeHelloTime item 110 BridgeMaxAge eld 99 BridgeMaxAge item 110 brouter ports about 95 viewing 96 VLAN 85 BTP 65 Business Policy Switch 2000 number of MLTs supported 142
D
Default Ports table 103 deleting a user 37 deleting table rows 191
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
572 Index
Neighbor tab 216 deleting tree nodes 190 Next Hop tab 217 Description item 47 Route tab 215 DesignatedRoot eld 101 viewing information 196 device arranging on a topology map 62 nding on the topology map 59 Device eld Edit Mac - VLAN dialog box 122 in the Conguration table 99 Edit Mac Addresses command 122 in the Isolated Device table 153 editing multiple table cells 193 in the No Trunk table 151 editing table cells 193 in the Root table 101 Enable eld in the Status table 100 in the Isolated Device table 153 in the Trunk table 150, 155, 156 in the No Trunk table 152 device icons 48 in the Trunk table 150 dimmed 50 Enable Stp item 110 device item Enable Stp Traps item 110 nding unsaved or changed EnableStp eld 99 conguration les 51 Enterprise Switch Manager selecting by type 61 contents pane 39 Device item contents pane icons 48 in the Bridge Routing Ports table 96 devices supported 21 in the Default Ports table 104 discovering network topology in the Isolated Routing Ports table 96 map 65 in the Members table 98 features 20 in the Ports table 105 help 63 in the Tagging Ports table 96 introduction 19 in the Unassigned Ports table 95 menu bar 39 Device Manager MLT links 175 documentation 32 Multicast Manager information, features 32 viewing 196 reference guides 567 shortcut menu 45 standalone application 32 size of network discovered 39 device properties 46 starting 33 Device Properties dialog box status bar 47 viewing device properties 46 submanager support viewing port status 47 submanagers 28 discovery process. See network topology window 37 map 65 error messages 569 dMultiLink Trunking Manager Ethernet 41 viewing Ethernet Routing Switch 1424 and 16xx MLTs in network map 175 switches DVMRP number of MLTs supported 142 and Multicast Manager 190 Ethernet Routing Switch 8100 coupled with layer 3 IGMP 179 IGMP Snoop support 201 denition 179 Ethernet Routing Switch 8100 module globals, conguring 193 creating protocol-based VLANs 120 Interface tab 215
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Index 573
Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 IGMP Snoop support 201 Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 module creating protocol-based VLANs 120 number of MLTs supported 142 Ethernet Switch IGMP Snoop support 201 ExpiryTime eld in the Next Hop tab 218
F
File-Inventory Manager Alteon folder 410 Archive Cong File dialog box 466 archiving conguration and boot.cfg les 382 backing up conguration les 379 Backup Cong from Device dialog box 463 cancelling scheduled tasks 404 changing display preferences 351 contents pane 348 denition 339 deleting scheduled tasks 405 Device Upgrade dialog box 468 Display Preferences dialog box 474 Download File to Device(s) dialog box 457 downloading image and conguration les Alteon devices 355 Ethernet Routing Switch 1424 devices 359 Ethernet Routing Switch 16xx devices 359 Ethernet Routing Switch 55xx-35xx devices 357 Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 devices 361 Ethernet Switch devices 357 Legacy BayStack devices 357 WLAN AP devices 363 downloading image and conguration les to devices 354 editing conguration les 398 ERS 1424-16xx folder 414
ERS 55xx-35xx folder 419 ERS 8000 folder 423 Ethernet Switch folder 436 features 30 le management capabilities by product 339 Find dialog box 406 nding inventory elements 406 inventory le types 350 Legacy BayStack folder 441 loading inventory information 352 navigation pane 348 navigation tree 407 network topology map viewing devices on 406 Passport 1000 folder 446, 446 printing inventory information 407 refreshing window 353 reloading inventory 353 Restore Cong to Device dialog box 464 restoring conguration les to devices 381 saving inventory information 350 saving inventory information in tab-delimited text le 351 schedule dialog box 402 Schedule dialog box 471 scheduling tasks 401 cancelling scheduled tasks 404 deleting scheduled tasks 405 inventory query 399 viewing scheduled tasks 403 viewing scheduled tasks log les 403 standalone application 30 starting 342 Synchronize Cong File dialog box 467 synchronizing conguration les 384 upgrading devices 385 Alteon devices 385, 386 Ethernet Routing Switch 55xx-35xx devices 387 Ethernet Routing Switch 8000, 1424, and 16xx devices 389 Ethernet Switch devices 387
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
574 Index
help, accessing 63 Legacy Baystack devices 387 hidden devices 76 WLAN AP devices 397 hide devices 76 Upload File from Device dialog highlighted topology view 129 box 460 HighPriority item uploading conguration les in the Default Ports table 104 Alteon devices 370 in the Ports table 105 Ethernet Routing Switch 1424 HoldTime eld 101 devices 374 Ethernet Routing Switch 16xx devices 374 Ethernet Routing Switch icons 55xx-35xx devices 372 device 48 Ethernet Routing Switch 8000 dimmed 50 devices 376 VLAN 101 Ethernet Switch devices 372 Id eld Legacy BayStack devices 372 in the Isolated Device table 153 WLAN AP devices 378 in the No Trunk table 151 uploading image and conguration in the Trunk table 150, 155 les 369 Id item View Scheduled Task dialog box 473 in the Insert MLT dialog box 160, viewing log le 405 162 viewing scheduled tasks 403 in the STG dialog box 109 viewing scheduled tasks log les 403ID-based VLANs window 343 creating 125 WLAN AP folder 453 IfIndex eld nd in the No Trunk table 152, 153 unsaved or changed device in the Trunk table 150 conguration les 51 IfIndex item Find dialog box in the Default Ports table 104 File-Inventory Manager 406 in the Ports table 106 Multicast Manager 187 IGMP MultiLink Trunking Manager 148 conguring 195 Routing Manager 506 view information about 195 VLAN Manager 92 IGMP and IGMP Snoop Find Unsaved Congurations dialog box 52 and Multicast Manager 189 nding devices on the topology map 59 IGMP Snoop Finding resources 187 Group Access folder for ERS ForwardDelay eld 101 8300 212 Group Access folder for ERS 8600 211 IGMP Snoop support 201 Group Access tab for ERS 8300 212 IGMP Snooping, denition 178 Group Access tab for ERS 8600 211 IGMP, denition 178 individual routing ports, VLAN 85 Insert MLT dialog box HelloTime eld 100 one device 158, 161 Help 63
G H
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Index 575
pair of devices 163 viewing port status 164 inserting table rows 191 inserting tree nodes 190 Inter switch trunk . See IST 166 inter-switch trunks viewing 154 Interface tab displaying DVMRP enabled devices 215 displaying L3-IGMP interface statistics 202 IpAddress item in the Default Ports table 104 in the Ports table 106 IPv4 routing 508 IPv4 Routing ARP 513 Globals 508 Static Route 510 IPv6 OSPF 539 Area 545 Globals 539 Interfaces 542 Neighbors 548 IPv6 routing 535 Globals 535 interfaces 537 IRP, viewing information 96 Italic text on VLAN icon label 103
L
L3-IGMP Interface tab 202 Layout slider 77 Link Types, denition 41 Location item 47 logging in 33
M
Max Hops eld 67 MaxAge eld 100 menu bar denition 38 Enterprise Switch Manager 39 Multicast Manager 182
MultiLink Trunking Manager 143 Routing Manager 503 Metric eld 218 in the Route tab DVMRP table 218 MIB Browser contents pane 556, 556 features 551 nding a node 559 loading MIBs 557 navigation pane 556 SNMP operations 559 starting 551 unloading MIBs 558 window 551, 552 MLT denition 141 icon 149 No trunk congurations 151 viewing 150 MLT Manager commands Apply Changes 145 Audit 145 Close 144 Copy 144 Delete 144 Edit 144 File 144 Find 145 Help 145 Highlight Topology 145 Insert 144 Online Support 145 Paste 144 Print 144 Reload 144 Undo Changes 144 Using 145 View 145 MLT Manager, features 29 MRoute denition 196 MSTP adding a VLAN 135 adding an MSTI instance 133 deleting an MSTI instance 134 deleting VLAN 136 editing MSTI properties 137
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
576 Index
editing properties 137 managing 133 member ports, viewing 135 membership 133 MSTP members viewing 135 Multicast 193 Multicast Manager contents pane 186 delete table row 191 delete tree node 190 DVMRP 190 denition 179 globals, conguring 193 edit multiple table cells 193 edit table cell 193 features 29, 31, 180 highlighting multicast information in Enterprise Switch Manager 196 IGMP conguring 195 denition 178 viewing information about 195 IGMP and IGMP Snoop 189 IGMP Snoop conguring 195 viewing information about 195 IGMP Snooping denition 178 insert table row 191 insert tree node 190 menu bar 182 multicast protocols 178 Multicast Route 190 navigation contents pane 186 Status bar 187 navigation pane 184 network resources nding 187 PIM-SM 190 denition 179 globals, conguring 194 refreshing 188 reloading 188 routing interface, nding 187 starting 180
status bar 187 Status bar 187 viewing forwarding node in Enterprise Switch Manager 196 multicast protocols 198 source subnet in Enterprise Switch Manager 196 window 180 Multicast Manager navigation tree 199 Multicast Route and Multicast Manager 190 Multicast Route. See MRoute. 196 multicast, denition 178 MultiLink Trunking Manager conguring a single port SMLT 173 conguring an MLT on one device 158 conguring an MLT on two devices 162 conguring IST links on a pair of devices 168 conguring IST links on a single device 169 conguring IST peers 172 conguring SMLT links on non-peer devices 172 conguring SMLT links on peer devices 171 contents pane 146 creating an MLT 157 deleting a single-port SMLT 174 deleting an MLT 165 editing MLT information 166 features 142 Find dialog box 148 highlighting devices and MLTs in Enterprise Switch Manager 175 Insert MLT dialog box 157 inter-switch trunks 154 Isolated devices 152 menu bar 143 navigation tree 145 No trunk icon 151 reloading 148 starting 142 status bar 147
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Index 577
status bar icon eld 147 status bar message eld 147 Trunk icon 149 viewing isolated devices 175 no trunk devices 175 port information 164 port link status 164 topology information 175 window 143 MultiLink Trunking. See MLT. 141
N
Name eld in the Isolated Device table 153 in the No Trunk table 151 in the Trunk Table 150 Name item in the Insert MLT dialog box 160, 162 navigation command buttons information panel view menu bar navigation keys navigation tree scroll bars 39 navigation pane MIB Browser 556 Multicast Manager 184 VLAN Manager 89 Neighbor tab 216 network resource, nding 92 network topology map 53, 65 arranging devices 62, 62 discovering 65 exporting 54 nding a device 59 layout slider 77 loading 55 printing 57 printing specic area 58 rediscovering 74 restrict discovery 75 saving 53 saving as a specic le type 54
selecting devices by type 61 stop discovery 75 viewing separate networks 67 New VLAN dialog box by Subnet 116 protocol-based 118 source MAC-based 121 Next Hop tab 217 No trunk congurations, viewing 151 Node item, in the Insert MLT dialog box 160, 162 Non-highlighted option 68 Notify Table conguring 238 NSNA displaying client information 497 displaying NSNA VLANs 494 displaying NSNAS subnet members 499 enabling 486 enabling on ports 496 entering IP Phone signatures 492 NSNA Manager 477 window 479 NSNAS displaying status 490 NSNAS subnet conguring 487 NumPorts eld 100
O
OSPF 515 Area 521 general 515 Interfaces 518 Neighbors 523
P
Passport 1000 Series routing switch creating Protocol-based VLANs 120 IGMP Snoop support 201 number of MLTs supported 142 password 34 PIDs format 120 invalid 120
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
578 Index
in the Default Ports table 104 PIM-SM in the Ports table 105 and Multicast Manager 190 denition 179 globals, conguring 194 Port dialog box 164 RADIUS servers Port item 96 removing from a security group 284 port numbers setting global parameters for a depressed 165 security group 285 dimmed 163, 165 report highlighted 163 device 43 PortMembers dialog box 98, 136, 165 Restrict Discovery eld 67 PortMembers eld RIP 525 in the Isolated Device table 153 advanced interface 528 in the No Trunk table 152 Globals 526 in the Trunk table 150 Interfaces 527 PortMembers item statistics 530 in the Default Ports table 104 RootCost eld 101 in the Members table 98 RootPort eld 101 in the Ports table 105 Route tab 215 Ports item Routing Manager 501 Device Properties dialog box 47 contents pane 505 in the Bridge Routing Ports table 96 features 501 in the Insert MLT dialog box 160, Find dialog box 506 162 menu bar 503 in the Isolated Routing Ports table 96 reloading 507 in the Unassigned Ports table 95 starting 502 PortType eld status bar 506 in the Isolated Device table 153 status bar message eld 506 in the No Trunk table 152 window 502 in the Trunk table 150 Routing Manager commands Preferences dialog box 66 Add Table Row 504 print preview 57 Apply Changes 504 Priority eld 99 Close 503 Priority item 109 Copy 503 product support 18 Delete Table Row 504 protocol-based VLANs Delete Tree Node 504 creating 118 Edit 503 PIDs 120 File 503 using user-dened protocols 120 Find 504 ProtocolId box 119 Help 504 ProtocolSpecication eld 100 Highlight Topology 504 publications Insert Tree Node 504 related 16 Online Support 504 Paste 504 Print 503 Reload 503 QosLevel item
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Index 579
Undo Changes 503 Using 504 View 504 Routing Manager navigation tree 505 Routing Manager window 502 RSTP adding a VLAN 132 deleting VLANs 132 editing properties 132 managing 131 membership 131
creating 272 deleting 275 deleting access policies from 323 displaying Community Table 297 displaying Notify Filter Prole Table 309 displaying Notify Filter Table 311 displaying Notify Table 306 displaying VACM Group Access 291 enabling and disabling access policies 319 manage attributes 277 removing devices from 276 Security Manager schedule dialog box 402 features 30 scroll bars 39 standalone application 30 security domain starting 266 conguring RADIUS server for 281 window 266 conguring SNMP access for 285, security thresholds 277 285 seed address conguring VACM MIB View 295 using multiple IP addresses 66 displaying VACM MIB View 294 Seed Address(es) item 67 removing RADIUS servers from 284 seed device 65 saving settings 271 Select all devices menu 61 setting attributes 273 Setting security group properties 273 setting global RADIUS server shortcut menu 45, 45 parameters for 285 Show Device security group host name 68 adding access policies to 321 IP Address 68 adding devices to 275 SysName 68 congure SNMPv3 users with the Show Device by, setting 68 Insert Wizard 313 SNMP conguring CLI access for 278 level of access 79 conguring Notify Filter Prole read and write operations 78 Table 310, 312 SNMP access conguring Notify Table 307 conguring for a security group 279 conguring SNMP access for 279 SNMP Listen for Traps item 69 conguring SSH access for 327 SNMP Max Outstanding Requests item 69 conguring Target Params SNMP Retry Count item 69 Table 303, 304 SNMP Timeout item 69 conguring Target Table 301 SNMP Trace item 69 conguring USM access for 286 SNMPv3 access conguring VACM Group conguring for a security group 285 Access 292 Source IP subnet-based VLANs 116 conguring VACM Group Members source MAC address-based VLANs for 289 adding MAC addresses 122 conguring Web access for 280 creating 121
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
580 Index
spanning tree groups root 101 denition 84 root conguration 130 viewing conguration information 85 status, viewing 100 viewing root information 85 STG members in Enterprise Switch Spanning Tree Protocol Manager, viewing 129 about 84 STG root conguration, viewing 130, Spanning Tree Protocol. See STP 84 130, 130 SSH access STG roots in Enterprise Switch conguring for a security group 327 Manager, viewing 128 SSH security group STGs in Enterprise Switch Manager, adding devices to 326 viewing 128 creating 325 STG members deleting 326 adding ports 98, 136 viewing 98 removing devices from 327 STP starting Enterprise Switch Manager 33 about 84 status bar controlling path redundancy 84 Enterprise Switch Manager 39, 47, spanning tree algorithm 84 47 viewing Root information 101 Multicast Manager 187 StpTrapEnable eld 100 MultiLink Trunk Manager 147 submanager preferences 73 Routing Manager 506 submanager, windows and Enterprise VLAN Manager 92 Switch Manager 38 status bar icon eld subnet address 79 VLAN Manager 92, 147 subnet discovery 75 status bar message eld support, Nortel Networks 18 MultiLink Trunking Manager 147 sVLANs Routing Manager 506 creating 123, 123 VLAN Manager 92 synchronizing VLANs 127 Status table 100 SysLog STG viewing 237 adding members to existing SysName item 46 STGs 111 System Log Cong 99 conguring 230 conguration information 99 creating STGs 108 deleting STGs 111 editing port membership 112 TaggedBpduAddress eld 100 editing STGs 110 TaggedBpduAddress item 109 information, viewing 97 TaggedBpduVlanId eld 100 maximum number of STGs per TaggedBpduVlanId item 109 product 85 tagging VLAN 94, 95 member ports, viewing 98 Target Address Table membership 108 conguring 238 port members 129 Target Params Table ports conguring 238 adding 98, 136 task les blocking 130
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
Index 581
upgrading 52 technical support 18 TFTP Server setting default for 69 TimeSinceTopologyChange eld 100 title bar 38 toolbar 39 TopChanges eld 100 topology dumping to log 43 trap log viewing 254 Trap/Log Manager 229 starting 229 System Log conguring 230 traps conguring 238 Trim HostName Domains item 68 troubleshooting 129, 569 trunk, denition 149 Type eld in the New VLAN dialog box 114 Type item in the Device Properties dialog box 46 in the Insert MLT dialog box 160
congurations, viewing 85 creating ID-based 125 port-based 115, 123, 125 port-based VLANs 115 protocol-based VLANs 118 source IP-subnet-based 116 source MAC-based 121 sVLANs 123, 123 default 103 denition 84 deleting 127 determining frame membership 113 enabling tagging and STGs 113 ID 94 information, viewing 105 maximum number of VLANs by product 85 member of STG 105 members in Enterprise Switch Manager, viewing 128 membership 85 policy-based network protocol 102 source IP subnet 102 source MAC address 102 port-based 102 rules 113 synchronizing 127 viewing information 105 unassigned VLAN viewing ports 105 about 94 VLAN icons 101 viewing information 95 VLAN Manager upgrading old task les 52 brouter ports 96 UpstreamNeighbor eld contents pane 91, 91 in the Route tab DVMRP table 218 denition 83 UpTime item 47 features 28, 85, 86 user nd a network resource 92 deleting 37 Find dialog box 92 user-dened protocols 120 highlighting STGs and VLANs in UserDenedPId text box 120 Enterprise Switch Manager 128 icons 105 IRPs 96 viewing device properties 46 navigation pane 89 virtual LAN. See VLAN 83 refreshing window 93 VLAN reload dialog box 93 and IGMP Snooping 178 reloading 93
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.
582 Index
starting 86 status bar 92 status bar icon eld 92 status bar message eld 92 STG add ports 98, 136 viewing and conguring parameters 99 STG member ports 98 STGs 97 tagged ports 95 unassigned ports 95 VLAN icons 94 VLAN table 105 window 86 VLAN manager STG viewing status 100 VLAN table 105
VlanIds eld in the Isolated Device table 153 in the No Trunk table 152 in the Trunk table 150 VlanIds item in the Insert MLT dialog box 160 in the Tagging Ports table 96 VRRP 531 Globals 532 interfaces 533
W
Web access conguring for a security group 280
Y
You can use Security Manager to add 281
Enterprise Switch Manager (ESM) Using Enterprise Switch Manager NN47300-100 02.02 Standard 6.0 15 November 2006
Copyright 2005-2006, Nortel Networks
.